Window-Eyes 8.0 Manual (c) 2012, GW Micro, Inc. -- All Rights Reserved Getting Started Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of Window-Eyes, a screen reader from GW Micro. Window-Eyes enables visually impaired persons to independently use their computers by translating information on the screen into synthetic speech and braille. Window-Eyes works with many popular programs such as those from Microsoft, Mozilla, Adobe, and Apple. For programs that do not work as well, Window-Eyes can be easily customized to give you the information you want to hear. Dozens of Window-Eyes settings and functions, which can be saved and recalled automatically, allow you to operate programs interactively and without pause. For example, while creating a document in your word processor, Window-Eyes announces the letters you type, reads the dialog boxes that appear, and reads menu items as you move from one to another, all without your needing to press extra keys or enter any special mode. Window-Eyes lets you correct words your speech synthesizer mispronounces, and even lets you decide through character dictionaries how to pronounce individual characters such as punctuation marks and Unicode graphic characters. In the rare event Window-Eyes must be customized or behave in a special way, users can write miniature programs, called apps, that can do virtually anything you want. The possibilities are limitless. Despite its flexibility, GW Micro has strived to make Window-Eyes the easiest screen reader to use. We want you, our customer, to have a screen reader that is adaptable to your specific needs and likes, and yet work automatically enough for you to focus attention on your program, not so much on operating the screen reader. After all, the purpose for having a screen reader in the first place is to gain access to computers, not to use computers to operate the screen reader. This user manual describes how Window-Eyes works and how to configure it to meet your individual needs. It does not, however, discuss how to operate Windows or specific programs. For more details, consult the documentation that accompanies your operating system and application software. GW Micro's website, www.gwmicro.com, also contains tutorials and knowledge base articles covering a wide variety of subjects. Of course, if you encounter problems, GW Micro is always a phone call or E-mail away. Thank you for your patronage, and we sincerely hope you enjoy using Window-Eyes. System Requirements In order to install and run Window-Eyes successfully, you need to have at least one of the following supported operating systems: *32-bit* * Windows XP Home Service Pack 3 * Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3 * Windows XP Media Center Service Pack 3 * Windows Server 2003 * Windows Vista Home Basic * Windows Vista Home Premium * Windows Vista Business * Windows Vista Enterprise * Windows Vista Ultimate * Windows 7 Home Basic * Windows 7 Home Premium * Windows 7 Professional * Windows 7 Enterprise * Windows 7 Ultimate * Windows 8 Standard * Windows 8 Professional * Windows 8 Enterprise *64-bit* * Windows Vista Home Basic * Windows Vista Home Premium * Windows Vista Business * Windows Vista Enterprise * Windows Vista Ultimate * Windows Server 2008 * Windows Server 2008 R2 * Windows Server 2012 * Windows 7 Home Basic * Windows 7 Home Premium * Windows 7 Professional * Windows 7 Enterprise * Windows 7 Ultimate * Windows 8 Standard * Windows 8 Professional * Windows 8 Enterprise In addition, the system requirements for Window-Eyes should match, or exceed, those of the recommended Operating System specifications where Window-Eyes will be installed. For information on recommended Operating System specifications, please refer to http://www.microsoft.com.* GW Micro's system specification recommendations are: * For Windows XP: 1.5Ghz processor or greater, 1GB RAM or greater * For Windows Vista: 2Ghz processor or greater, 2GB RAM or greater * For Windows 7: 2Ghz processor or greater, 2GB RAM or greater * For Windows 8: 2Ghz processor or greater, 2GB RAM or greater * Requirements may vary depending on your system configuration and applications installed. Package Contents Please take a moment to inventory the contents of the Window-Eyes package. It should include: * 1 Window-Eyes CD containing installation components, an electronic version of this manual in Windows Help, HTML, and plain text formats. The Window-Eyes tutorial is also included in MP3 format. * Print Installation Guide * Braille Installation Guide and Hot Key Quick Reference Guide Now would be a good time to register your copy of Window-Eyes. Registering with GW Micro is your only way of being assured technical support from factory staff should you ever need our help. In addition, we will use your registration information to keep you informed about upgrades and new products. You may register online by visiting http://www.gwmicro.com/upgrade, and entering your serial number in the appropriate place. If your record is not found, you will be prompted to enter your registration information. Upon receiving your registration information, our sales department will update our records. You may also access this feature through the Window-Eyes Help menu by selecting the "check for updates" option. If you do not have Internet access, you may call us at 260-489-3671 to register. Thank you for taking the time to register your purchase. Also, please notify us if you change your address. Getting Technical Support Free and unlimited technical support on the current production version from factory-trained professionals is available over the telephone on non-holiday weekdays 8:30 a.m. - 5:00 p.m., Eastern Standard Time. Call 260-489-3671. Our e-mail address is support@gwmicro.com. You also have the option of subscribing to one of several GW Micro mailing lists. There are several to choose from: GW-Info for lively discussions of GW Micro products and services, GW-News for GW Micro news announcements only, GW-Scripting for Window-Eyes app developers, GW-Apps for Window-Eyes app users, and many more. To subscribe, unsubscribe, or manage an existing subscription, visit http://www.gwmicro.com/lists. Subscribing is as simple as entering your email address in the email address edit box, selecting the Subscribe/Default radio button, selecting the GW-Info email list from the combo box of available lists, then selecting the Modify button. You will then receive a confirmation message. Select the link provided in the confirmation email, and you will become a member of the largest public network of Window-Eyes users, always eager and willing to answer any questions you may have. Although we encourage all users to help each other with questions and problems, you can take comfort in knowing that the GW-Info list is constantly monitored by GW Micro employees. When you call or email for technical support, you may be asked for your Window-Eyes serial number. To obtain this number: 1. Press Control-Backslash to display the Window-Eyes Control Panel. 2. Press the Alt key to activate the menu bar and then press "H" for Help. 3. Press "A" for About Window-Eyes. This will display the version number and the serial number of your copy of Window-Eyes. 4. Press Escape twice to exit the Window-Eyes Voice Control Panel. Many Window-Eyes features, some of the most basic and some of the most advanced, are the result of input from the GW Micro customer community, and that can include you. GW Micro is never completely happy until Window-Eyes features are made as flexible and adjustable as they can be, in order to satisfy the widely varying needs of our customers. Call or write us with your comments and suggestions. Protecting Your Investment Before exploring Window-Eyes any further, please store the original Window-Eyes CD in a clean, dry place, not too hot or cold. Please remember that CDs are not indestructible. Be very careful when handling any CD. A single scratch mark could permanently damage the disk. Installing Window-Eyes Installing Window-Eyes can be a simple and pain-free process if you follow the instructions provided in this manual. The Window-Eyes Cd contains an easy-to-use installation program that will walk you through the install process, step by step. If you have the Windows CD auto run feature enabled (which is on by default), the installation program will startup automatically when the Window-Eyes CD is inserted in your CD-ROM drive. For information on turning auto run on, please consult your Microsoft Windows manual. As an added bonus, if you have a compatible sound card installed, you have the option of choosing the "Run Install With Speech" from the install menu. This will cause the installation program to speak the install to you through a temporary copy of Window-Eyes. This allows the install to be used without sighted assistance. How does the installation program speak? When the install starts, it immediately launches a temporary copy of Window-Eyes from the CD. Window-Eyes itself is actually speaking the installation program. The talking installer is also smart enough to detect if another copy of Window-Eyes is currently running. If this is the case, the temporary copy of Window-Eyes will not be launched. If you are using a screen reader other than Window-Eyes, the installation program will not detect this and still launch the temporary copy of Window-Eyes. If you put the Window-Eyes installation CD in the drive and the installation program does not start after waiting one minute (which will be the case if the auto run feature is disabled) you will need to start the installation program manually. If the install did not start automatically after waiting 60 seconds from inserting the Window-Eyes CD, do the following: 1. Press Windows-R to open the Run dialog. 2. Type "D:\SETUP" and press Enter. If D: is not your CD ROM drive letter, replace the "D" with your actual CD ROM drive letter. Note: Under Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, and Windows Server 2008/R2 and 2012, CD-ROM setup programs are not run automatically. You are, however, presented with a dialog containing autorun options. The default choice is to run the setup.exe program. Simply press enter to launch the initial Window-Eyes Installation Welcome dialog. These operating systems also include a security feature called the user account control (UAC). When the Window-Eyes installation begins and you are running these versions of Windows, you might hear a soft ding from your computer's speakers. If this happens, press Alt-C in Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, or Alt-Y in Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2008 R2, or Windows Server 2012to tell the user account control that you want to continue with the Window-Eyes installation. The installation program will then begin. If it does not after placing the CD in your CD-ROM drive, answering "continue" to the user account control prompt, or after starting the installation manually, then please contact our technical support department at 260-489-3671 for troubleshooting tips. When the installation program starts, you will hear a recorded voice informing you of the different installation options. They are as follows: * S = Run Install With Speech * W = Run Install Without Speech * T = Play Tutorial * R = Replay Welcome Message * X = Exit Let us take a look at what each of these options entails. *S = Run Install With Speech* Selecting this option will launch a temporary copy of Window-Eyes to speak the rest of the install program. *W = Run Install Without Speech* Selecting this option will cause the installation program to continue without running the temporary copy of Window-Eyes. *T = Play Tutorial* Selecting this option will cause the installation program to launch an MP3 copy of the Window-Eyes Tutorial. Note that the installation program itself will exit. When the tutorial is complete, you will need to re-run the Window-Eyes installation to install the product. *R = Replay Welcome Message* Selecting this option will cause the initial recorded voice file to be replayed so that you can hear any information that you may have missed during the first playing. *X = Exit* Selecting this option will exit the installation program. Note: if the Windows audio service is not running, Window-Eyes will start it automatically. If the start up type is not set to automatic, Window-Eyes will adjust that setting as well. This means that going forward, the audio service will start up automatically when your computer boots. This procedure is completed when the initial welcome install dialog comes up. If you do not want this change to be permanent, you will have to set the audio service to manual or disabled after the install has completed. A Bit about Synthesizers Window-Eyes works with your speech synthesizer and its software to make a total speech-access system. Window-Eyes supports many different models of voice synthesizers, and your copy will include at least one synthesizer at no additional charge. Unless you tell the installation program otherwise, your newly installed copy of Window-Eyes will default to using Nuance Vocalizer or DECTalk Access 32 (depending on which voice is included on your product CD). If, however, you are planning on using a different speech synthesizer that requires its own software, you will have to install the software according to the instructions that came with the synthesizer. Quick Install If you elected to install Window-Eyes without voice output, or elected to install Window-Eyes with voice output (and have since rebooted), the installation program will prompt you with a dialog asking if you want to use the quick install. If you choose the quick install by selecting the YES button in the Quick Install dialog the following will happen. 1. The User Information dialog will be displayed. You will need to type your name in the "Name" field and a company name if applicable in the "Company" field. Press the Tab key to move from option to option. Notice you may tab to the Serial Number field, but you cannot modify it. This number has been registered to you at the factory. When you have typed your name and/or company, press Tab to move to the Next button and press Enter. 2. The End User License Agreement dialog will next be displayed. You can use the Up or Down Arrow keys to select "I accept this license agreement," or "I do not accept this license agreement." It is important that you carefully read through the EULA prior to accepting it. If you select the latter, you will not be able to install Window-Eyes. Once you have accepted the EULA, press Tab until you get to the Next button, and press ENTER. 3. The installation will begin copying all the necessary files to your hard drive. 4. When all components have been installed, the "Setup Complete" dialog will be displayed. If you chose to install without voice output, you will have three buttons to choose from: "Restart Computer Now," "Restart Computer Later," and "Cancel." It is strongly suggested you accept the "Restart Computer Now" button as your newly installed copy of Window-Eyes will probably not function until you restart your computer. Only select the "Restart Computer Later" button if you do not plan on using your newly installed copy of Window-Eyes until after you restart your computer at a later time. If you chose to install with voice output, you will receive a different dialog allowing you to continue booting without having to restart. The following settings will be used by choosing the quick installation: * Window-Eyes is installed in the default program files location. * Window-Eyes will load at the login screen (if one exists), and at the desktop after you login. * If your system has a compatible sound card, Window-Eyes will speak through either the Nuance Vocalizer or DECtalk Access 32 text-to-speech synthesizers. * If you do not have a compatible sound card, Window-Eyes will be configured for the synthesizer you selected during the quick install. * By default, no Braille display will be selected. You can easily change the Braille display and speech synthesizer selection at any time. * The Window-Eyes advanced options will be hidden. * Control-Alt-W will be set as a shortcut key to launch Window-Eyes when it is not running. * A Window-Eyes group will be added to the Start menu under Programs. * The Java Access Bridge will be installed into any registered Java runtime environments that are discovered. Custom Install If you do not choose the quick install by selecting the NO button in the Quick Install dialog, the following will happen. 1. The User Information dialog will be displayed. You will need to type your name in the "Name" field and a company name if applicable in the "Company" field. Press the Tab key to move from option to option. Notice you may tab to the Serial Number field, but you cannot modify it. This number has been registered to you at the factory. When you have typed your name and/or company, press Tab to move to the Next button and press Enter. 2. The End User License Agreement dialog will next be displayed. You can use the Up or Down Arrow keys to select "I accept this license agreement," or "I do not accept this license agreement." It is important that you carefully read through the EULA prior to accepting it. If you select the latter, you will not be able to install Window-Eyes. Once you have accepted the EULA, press Tab until you get to the Next button, and press ENTER. 3. The Choose Destination dialog will be displayed. This allows you to select the directory into which you wish to install Window-Eyes. By default this will be "C:\Program Files\GW Micro\Window-Eyes" on 32-bit operating systems or "C:\Program Files (X86)\GW Micro\Window-Eyes" on 64-bit operating systems assuming that C: is the drive on which Windows is installed. If you wish to change this option, tab to the Browse button and press Enter. This will open the Choose Folder dialog. You can either type in the new path manually or use the other options in this dialog to locate the path you want to use. Once you have specified the new location, press Enter on the OK button. This will return you to the Choose Destination dialog, and your new location will be displayed. If this is acceptable, Tab to the Next button and press Enter. 4. The Select Synthesizer dialog will be displayed. There are several options on this dialog but only those options that are relevant to the synthesizer you have selected will be available. By default either the Nuance Vocalizer or DECtalk Access32 (Window-Eyes) synthesizers will be selected (depending on which voice was included on your installation CD). If this is not the synthesizer you wish to use, press the Tab key until you get to the Synthesizer list box. Arrow up and down until you locate your preferred synthesizer. Depending on which synthesizer you select you may or may not have to enter more information. After selecting your synthesizer, press Tab to move through the options and change them if necessary. For example, if you select the DECtalk Express and you press Tab you will be in the Ports list box. You will need to tell the installation program to which COM port the Express is connected. Again, several other options may or may not be required depending on your synthesizer. Take the time to Tab between all the options and set them correctly. When you have selected all the necessary choices, press Enter on the Next button. 5. The Braille Display Selection dialog will be displayed. Using your Up and Down Arrow keys, select the Braille display that you currently have installed. After selecting your display, press the Tab key to go to the Ports list box. Here you can choose whether your Braille display is attached via a serial port (COM 1 to COM 50), a parallel port (LPT 1 to LPT 4), or USB. After selecting how your Braille display is connected, press Enter to continue. If you have no Braille display installed, choose none and press Enter. 6. The Shortcut Key dialog will be displayed. This dialog allows you to set the shortcut key used to launch Window-Eyes manually. Tab to the Shortcut Hot Key field, and press the hot key combination you want to use for launching Window-Eyes manually. By default, the shortcut is Control-Alt-W. You can press the Delete key to disable the shortcut feature. Note that only operating system keystrokes can be used with this hot key field. Press Enter once you have defined the shortcut to be used. 7. The Window-Eyes Startup Selection dialog will be displayed. This dialog offers two check boxes: Run Window-Eyes at the Login Screen, and Run Window-Eyes after Login for all users. If you want Window-Eyes to run both before and after login, check both options. If you do not want to start Window-Eyes automatically, leave both options unchecked. If you only want Window-Eyes to run at the login screen, only check the first option (Run Window-Eyes at the Login Screen), and leave the second option unchecked. Regardless of how you choose to start Window-Eyes, Control-Alt-W (or the hot key you have defined) has been set up as a shortcut to launch Window-Eyes. This means if Window-Eyes is not currently running at any point, you can press Control-Alt-W (or the hot key you have defined) and Window-Eyes will startup immediately. After choosing the option you want, press Enter on the Next button. 8. A prompt will next appear that asks you if you want to install the Java Access Bridge. The Access Bridge enables Java-based software that takes advantage of the Java Accessibility API to be usable with Window-Eyes. If you say "Yes" to the prompt, the Java Access Bridge will be installed into any registered Java runtime environments that have been registered. If you answer "No" or if you have no Java runtime environments installed, you will be informed about this and the setup will continue. Should you need to install the Java Access Bridge at a later time, you can manually run the "Install Java Access Bridge" shortcut in the Window-Eyes Advanced Options Start Menu program group. 9. The installation will begin copying all the necessary files to your hard drive. 10. When all components have been installed, the "Setup Complete" dialog will be displayed. If you chose to install without voice output, you will have three buttons to choose from: "Restart Computer Now," "Restart Computer Later," and "Cancel." It is strongly suggested you accept the "Restart Computer Now" button as your newly installed copy of Window-Eyes will probably not function until you restart your computer. Only select the "Restart Computer Later" button if you do not plan on using your newly installed copy of Window-Eyes until after you restart your computer at a later time. If you chose to install with voice output, you will receive a different dialog allowing you to continue booting without having to restart. Installation Tips You can press the Tab key to move between all of the options in the current installation dialog or Shift-Tab to move backwards through them. If you are on a button, pressing the Enter key will act on that button. If you are on a check box, pressing the Space Bar will toggle between selecting and unselecting the option. If you are on a radio button, pressing the Up or Down Arrows will deselect the current item and select the new one. If you are in a list box or combo box, pressing the Up or Down Arrow will move you through the list of available choices. Selecting Cancel at any time will display a dialog asking if you are sure you wish to abort the installation. If you choose Yes, the installation program will close, and Window-Eyes will not be installed. If you choose NO, you will be returned back to the original dialog you were in before selecting the Cancel button. Most dialogs offer a "Back" and "Next" button. If you select the "Back" option, the previous dialog will be displayed again. This is useful if you change your mind and wish to change something in a previous dialog. If you select the "Next" button, your settings for the current dialog will be accepted, and the next dialog will be displayed. Colors To maximize the graphic speaking capability of Window-Eyes, we recommend setting your display colors to 32 bit. This option is typically found in the "Display" section of the Windows control panel, though the steps to change it will vary depending on the version of Windows you are using. Consult your Windows manual for more information on adjusting your display adapter's color depth. Resolution While you are in the area of changing colors, you might want to take a look at your screen size (also known as resolution), too. The screen size setting is located in the same place as the color settings. You will want, at the very minimum, to have your screen resolution set to 1024x768. It may help, however, to increase the resolution to a higher value (assuming your video adapter supports it). The higher the resolution, the easier it is for Windows to display more items on the screen, thereby allowing Window-Eyes access to more information. Advanced Install Options When the initial dialog of the Window-Eyes install is displayed (where you can select to install with speech, without speech, etc.), one button that is not mentioned verbally is the Advanced button. Please note that these options are for advanced users only. If you do not understand the purpose of these utilities, or are not comfortable running them, please call our technical support department for assistance. You will also need to have speech running when you access this dialog; it will not speak automatically. *A = Advanced Options* Selecting this button will present you with a dialog containing the following options: * V = Install Window-Eyes Video Support - Select this option to install the main Window-Eyes Video Support system for the Window-Eyes Mobile installs. * M = Install Window-Eyes Mobile - Select this option to install Window-Eyes Mobile. Window-Eyes Mobile can be used to install Window-Eyes onto a USB stick, removable drive, or to another directory on your machine. * S = Install Network Client With Speech - Select this option to begin the client install with speech. * W = Install Network Client Without Speech - Select this option to begin the client install without speech. * E = Window-Eyes Emergency Removal - If you attempt to remove Window-Eyes from the Add/Remove Programs or Programs and Features item in the Windows control panel and are not able to do so, you can use this utility to remove your Window-Eyes installation. Please attempt to remove Window-Eyes from the Add/Remove Programs or Programs and Features item in the Windows control panel before using this utility. This utility will remove all Window-Eyes files from your hard drive along with all Window-Eyes entries from your system's registry. Again, this utility should only be used as a last resort in the case that the Add/Remove Programs uninstall does not work correctly. Network Installation Prior to attempting a network installation of Window-Eyes you will need to make sure that your network connections are working correctly. The installation process will take place in two steps: The Server Installation In order to have a successful installation of Window-Eyes on the server, you will need to be logged in either as administrator or as a user with administration privileges. After you have successfully logged in, place the Window-Eyes CD in the CD-ROM. Once you are presented with the initial installation dialog, select how you want to run the installation process: with or without speech, and choose if you want to run the custom or quick install. Once Window-Eyes is installed, you will need to make sure that the Window-Eyes folder hierarchy is shared with appropriate restrictions. For maximum security, we recommend the following folder settings: * Window-Eyes Program Folder - Read Only Access * Window-Eyes User Folder - Read Only Access * Individual User Folders - Read/Write Access Depending on the operating system you are working with, you should be able to assign permissions to specific user folders for each user. The Client Installation Once you have successfully completed the server installation of Window-Eyes, proceed to the client machine to perform the client installation. In order to successfully complete the client installation, you must be logged into the client machine as either administrator or as a user with administrator privileges. Before you begin the Window-Eyes client installation, you will need to make sure that the path to the Window-Eyes server installation has been mapped to a local drive on the client machine. For example, map the server path (\\server\wineyes) to local drive s for the client installation. The mapped drive must remain constant to ensure Window-Eyes is available for use at all times, and for any Window-Eyes user. You may, however, change the mapped drive letter between client machines. Once you have verified that you are logged in as either administrator or as a user with administrator privileges, and have verified that the path to the server installation of Window-Eyes has been mapped to a driver letter, place the Window-Eyes CD in the CD-ROM drive. When the initial installation dialog appears, either Tab to the Advanced button and press Enter, or press Alt-A to access the advanced setup options dialog. In the advanced setup options dialog, you have two options concerning the client installation: 1. Install Client With Speech 2. Install Client Without Speech Each install will prompt for the following information * Remote Location * Server Location * Software Synthesizer Selection * Startup Options All Window-Eyes files will be stored and accessed from the server except for the Window-Eyes video driver, the enable/disable video driver utility, and the Window-Eyes program group icons located in the start menu. The program group icons (or shortcuts) will point to the Window-Eyes server installation located on the mapped drive you designated before the client install. It is important to recognize that the speed of the network may impact the performance of Window-Eyes. On a slower network, more time may be necessary to access files such as Window-Eyes core components, set files, and apps. Window-Eyes Mobile Window-Eyes offers the ability to be installed on a removable drive for easy portability. In order for Window-Eyes Mobile to function correctly, there are a few rules that must be followed: 1. While Window-Eyes Video Support is not essential to run Window-Eyes Mobile, it is highly recommended for the best screen reading experience. 2. If installed, the Window-Eyes Video Support version must match the Window-Eyes Mobile version. 3. Administrator rights are required to install Window-Eyes Video Support. 4. Window-Eyes Video Support will offer an uninstall option in the Add/Remove Programs control panel. Window-Eyes Mobile will not offer an uninstall option in the Add/Remove Programs control panel, as it is portable, and may not exist on the same machine where the installation was run. Window-Eyes Mobile is self-contained, and can be removed simply by deleting the Window-Eyes Mobile directory. Let us take a look at how Window-Eyes Mobile can allow you to take Window-Eyes on the go. Roger recently learned of a new research computer station at his local library, and was anxious to check it out. Rather than taking his CD to the library and installing his own personal copy of Window-Eyes onto a public computer, Roger decided to use the Window-Eyes Mobile install so that he could keep all of his Window-Eyes settings on his personal USB pen drive. Before heading off to the library, Roger installed Window-Eyes Mobile onto his pen drive using the Window-Eyes Mobile install located under the Advanced Options in the initial Window-Eyes Setup Options dialog. After the Window-Eyes Mobile installation completed, Roger copied a simple Window-Eyes Video Support installation file from his Window-Eyes CD-ROM (located in the wevideo folder on the root of his Window-Eyes CD-ROM) to the root of his pen drive, knowing that while Window-Eyes Mobile would work without Window-Eyes Video Support, having it already installed would provide him with the best screen reading experience. Roger could have also downloaded the Window-Eyes Video Support tool from http://www.gwmicro.com/support. Once Window-Eyes Mobile and the Window-Eyes Video Support tool were successfully copied onto Roger's pen drive, he headed off to the library. After obtaining Administration rights from the librarian, Roger ran the Window-Eyes Video Support tool that he copied to the root of his USB pen drive. Once the machine finished rebooting, the librarian set his permissions back to a normal user, and Roger launched Window-Eyes Mobile directly from his USB pen drive, and he was able to check out all of the new research material available on the new research computer. Roger has been able to return to that computer several times, always able to work with confidence, reassured that all of his Window-Eyes settings were securely stored on his personal pen drive, and that the new research computer would always be available with his own copy of Window-Eyes any time he needed it. He was also confident that if he needed access to any other public computer that did not already have the Window-Eyes Video Support installed, he could still run his copy of Window-Eyes Mobile to gain basic access to the machine. Although the Window-Eyes Mobile install provides you with an easy way to get a fresh copy of Window-Eyes installed onto a removable drive, you could also choose to copy an existing Window-Eyes installation instead. For example, if you have made several set file changes to your own copy of Window-Eyes and want to use those settings on your removable drive without having to start from scratch, simply copy your entire Window-Eyes directory along with the contents of %appdata%\GW Micro\Window-Eyes to your removable drive, and you can run it just like a copy of Window-Eyes Mobile. If you elect to use Window-Eyes Mobile, take note of the following restrictions: 1. Only hosted Window-Eyes apps will function in a mobile environment. Externally hosted apps will not work. Do not worry if you are uncertain of what this means as, since nearly all Window-Eyes apps are internally hosted, this restriction will affect only a small number of users. Please consult the Window-Eyes app development documentation or contact GW Micro for more details. 2. If Window-Eyes Mobile is run outside of the computer's "Program Files" directory (which will very likely be the case), the Windows user account control (UAC) is enabled, and you are running as a standard user (without administrative priveleges), Window-Eyes will be unable to speak inside programs which run with elevated priveleges (such as the registry editor or even the user account control prompt itself). This issue is due to security restrictions found in Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2008/R2, and Windows Server 2012. It does not apply to Windows XP. Uninstalling Window-Eyes If you wish to remove Window-Eyes from your machine, you should use the Add/Remove Programs or Programs and Features option located in the Windows Control Panel. Simply select Window-Eyes and select the Remove button. Window-Eyes will automatically be removed from your hard drive. The specific steps are as follows: Windows XP and Windows Server 2003: 1. Press Control-Escape or the Windows key to bring up the start menu. 2. Press "C" for Control Panel. 3. Tab to Add or Remove Programs, and press Enter. 4. Arrow down until you find the Window-Eyes entry. 5. Tab to the Change/Remove button and press Enter. 6. A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Simply press "Y" to confirm the removal. 7. At this point the removal process will begin. If not, follow any directions Windows gives you. Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2008/R2, and Windows Server 2012: 1. Press Control-Escape or the Windows key to bring up the start menu. 2. In the Start Search edit box, type "Programs and Features" and press Enter. 3. Press W until you have selected Window-Eyes. 4. Press Enter to begin the uninstall procedure. Note, you may need to confirm a User Account Control dialog to being the uninstall. 5. A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Simply press "Y" to confirm the removal. 6. At this point the removal process will begin. If not, follow any directions Windows gives you. Window-Eyes Features All of Window-Eyes' most important concepts and features are explained in this section of the user guide. Throughout this section are general references to the Window-Eyes control panel, though very few options are discussed unless they directly relate to the concept or feature being described. Once you understand how a Window-Eyes feature works, you are encouraged to read about its options in the next part of the guide that describes the Window-Eyes control panel in depth. Setting up the Voices Window-Eyes speaks with three different voices. These are the screen, keyboard, and mouse voices. The screen voice is heard whenever activity occurs on the screen. For example, a dialog box opens, your cursor moves through a document, you move through a menu, etc. The keyboard voice speaks whenever you type text or press keys on your keyboard. The mouse voice likewise speaks whenever the mouse moves, buttons are clicked, or the shape of the mouse pointer changes. Each voice supports four different parameters: pitch, rate, tone, and volume. The voice pitch is how high or low it speaks; for example, a male voice has a lower pitch than one which is female. The voice rate is simply how fast or slowly the synthesizer speaks. The tone setting will act differently depending on the synthesizer you use. With some synthesizers, such as DECtalk Access 32 or Eloquence, changing the tone switches among the different voice variations that the synthesizer supports. Other synthesizers, most notably those that are SAPI-based, do not support the tone setting. In this case, changing the tone will do nothing. Experiment with your particular synthesizer to determine how changing the tone effects its speech. Finally, the volume parameter sets how loudly the synthesizer speaks. Note that depending on your active synthesizer, changing this setting may also change your computer's overall volume as well. Adjusting the Voices with the Keyboard You can change all aspects of these voices from anywhere by using four simple hot keys. They are: * Control-Alt-Right-Arrow: Voice Selection Rotor * Control-Alt-Left-Arrow: Voice Parameter Rotor * Control-Alt-Up-Arrow: Voice Up * Control-Alt-Down-Arrow: Voice Down The voice selection rotor, reached with Control-Alt-Right-Arrow, will cycle through the screen, keyboard, mouse, and all voices. Press this key until you reach the voice you want to change. By default, all voices are selected. The voice parameter rotor, reached with Control-Alt-Left-Arrow, lets you choose which aspect of the voice you want to change. By default, the rate parameter is selected. Finally, press Control-Alt-Up-Arrow and Control-Alt-Down-Arrow to adjust the selected parameter until you are satisfied. If these hot keys are not working, your computer likely has a program running that is intercepting the keys before Window-Eyes sees them. See KB 1022 on the GW Micro support website for steps on how to remedy this problem. Adjusting the Voices within the Window-Eyes Control Panel All of the Window-Eyes voices can also be adjusted inside the Window-Eyes control panel itself. First, press Control-Backslash to bring focus to the control panel. Next, press the up and down arrows until you reach the name of the voice you want to change. For example, arrow until you reach "screen," "keyboard," or "mouse." Next, press the right arrow to open the group, and down arrow until you reach "voice." Next, press the Tab key to move through and set the parameters for the selected voice. For more information on the items you find in the control panel, either press F1 to receive additional help, or see the control panel reference later in this guide. You are not limited to setting the tone, rate, pitch, and volume of the three Window-Eyes voices. You can also set how Window-Eyes handles keys as they are pressed as well as what types of information it speaks when the mouse moves or when buttons are clicked. In addition, Window-Eyes also permits you to adjust the amount of punctuation each voice speaks. Note that advanced options must be visible inside the Window-Eyes control panel before you will be able to adjust its punctuation settings. See the Window-Eyes control panel reference later in this user's guide for more details on all of the customizations you can make to the three voices. Saving your Changes When you have adjusted the voices to your liking, you can save the changes so that Window-Eyes will always come up speaking the way you want. To do this, press Control-Backslash to open the Window-Eyes control panel. Next, press Control-S to cause Window-Eyes to save your settings. Finally, press the Escape key to return to your previously open program. Window-Eyes Hot Keys Window-Eyes is primarily controlled and manipulated via a series of keyboard commands called hot keys. We have already introduced several such hot keys. The command to focus the Window-Eyes control panel, for instance, is a hot key, as are the commands to adjust speech parameters. Each hot key can be reassigned if desired, and each can be completely undefined. As Window-Eyes has hundreds of assignable commands, only a few of the most popular will be described here. It is also assumed that you are using the default keyboard layout that ships with Window-Eyes. If you are using another, such as the laptop layout, some of the commands described here and in other parts of this guide may differ. See the hot key reference near the end of the manual for a complete listing of commands for each layout. Reading Information Around the Cursor When you are in a program that uses a cursor such as a word processor or spreadsheet, Window-Eyes will speak as your cursor moves around the document area. Often times, it is useful to find out what text is around your cursor without moving it. Use the following commands to hear the information that interests you: * Read current character: Control-Numpad-Left Arrow. Press this key a second time to hear a phonetic representation for the character. For example, "alpha," "bravo," and "Charley" will be spoken instead of "a," "b," and "c." * Read current word: Control-Numpad-Right Arrow. Press this key again to cause Window-Eyes to spell the word. Press it a third time to cause Window-Eyes to spell the word phonetically. * Read current line: Control-Numpad-Center. Note that if you press this key but there is no visible cursor, Window-Eyes will perform a speak summary (described below). * Read current sentence: Control-Numpad-Down Arrow. * Read current paragraph: Control-Numpad-Up Arrow. Note: Window-Eyes has the capability to read the previous and next character, word, line, sentence, and paragraph. However, the commands to perform these actions are undefined by default. Automatically Detecting the Cursor Most of the time, Window-Eyes will locate and track the cursor correctly. If you discover a program that has a cursor that Window-Eyes cannot track, there are a few things you can try. First, look through the options in your program, and make sure that the cursor is set to blink; some programs will not have this option available. However, most of them will use a blinking cursor. If a program uses a cursor that does not blink, Window-Eyes will not be able to detect it. Next, look for options that allow you to define the shape of the cursor. Generally, you want to set the cursor to be a line rather than a block, but try both settings if one does not work. Finally, you are ready to use the Window-Eyes Autodetect Cursor feature. To engage this feature while the cursor is displayed, press the autodetect cursor hot key, which is Control-Insert-C by default. Window-Eyes will say, "determining cursor please wait." If the program uses a system cursor, Window-Eyes will immediately respond with "uses system cursor." If this happens, Window-Eyes is unable to properly track the system cursor in this program. You should contact GW Micro technical support for assistance on resolving this issue. If the program is not using a system cursor, Window-Eyes will wait for five seconds. It will either say "cursor found" if it finds a cursor or "no cursor detected" if it does not find one. If a cursor is found,, Window-Eyes will automatically save this cursor information and will use it in the future when you use this program. If the cursor is not found, then you should try changing options in the program relating to the cursor and try detecting it again. If you go through all of these options and Window-Eyes is never able to detect the cursor, or if it says that it detects the cursor but it is still unable to track it, you will need to contact GW Micro technical support to assist you with this problem. Reading Parts of a Window Window-Eyes is able to read different areas of the active window on demand. Use the following hot keys to review the section of interest: * Read entire window: Control-Shift-W. This hot key is especially helpful when you are in a dialog or message box and you want Window-Eyes to repeat any text the box displays. * Read title bar: Control-Shift-T. Window-Eyes will announce the title of the active window along with the window's state. If Window-Eyes says "normal," then the window is its normal size. If Window-Eyes says "maximized," then the window is as large as possible and takes up the majority of your screen. * Read status line: Control-Insert-S. This causes Window-Eyes to read the lowest line on your computer screen. This is typically a line of text that contains general status information for the active program such as page number, column number, disk space remaining, etc. * Speak summary: Control-Shift-S. This hot key causes Window-Eyes to announce the highlighted portion of the control that has your keyboard focus. For example, if you are in a list of items, a speak summary will tell you which item in the list is highlighted. If you are in a menu, the speak summary hot key will cause Window-Eyes to read the selected menu item. If you are on a website, this hot key will cause Window-Eyes to provide details about the current webpage. The speak summary hot key will always give appropriate information for the type of control with which you are working. * Read highlighted block: Control-Shift-M. This keystroke will cause Window-Eyes to read any text that has been selected inside the active window. Window-Eyes will alert you if no text has been selected. Window-Eyes also offers the ability to read the menu bar of the current program, if any, along with the entire screen. However, as these keys are seldom used, they are undefined by default. Speaking Progress Bars and Scroll Bars When you are reading a long e-mail message, it might be nice to know how far along you are in the message, and how far you have to go before you are done. Similarly, you might want to check on the progress of a file you are downloading from the internet or the over all progress of an operation your computer is performing. To find your position in a window, you can use the Progress or Scroll Bar hot key, which is assigned to Control-Insert-B by default. When this hot key is pressed, Window-Eyes will first look in the active window for progress bars, and if it finds them, it will read them from top to bottom along with their field names. If Window-Eyes does not find any progress bars, it will search the focus window for scroll bars and read them; vertical scroll bars will be reported first followed by those that are horizontal. If Window-Eyes does not find either progress bars or scroll bars, it will say "No progress or scroll bars found." Note that Window-Eyes will only read standard progress and scroll bars; it cannot identify controls that appear to be progress or scroll bars but are not. In addition to this hot key, Window-Eyes will automatically read you the status of any progress bars in the active window. This feature is discussed in more detail in the section about the Progress Indicator app later in this user guide. Redrawing the Screen Programs sometimes draw new text on top of old text. Visually, this hides the old text. Window-Eyes sometimes is able to see parts of both the old and new text and can result in confusing feedback when reviewing the screen. To minimize these occurrences, Window-Eyes itself redraws portions of the screen when it detects these kinds of changes. Use the Redraw hot key, accessed with Insert-Backslash, any time Window-Eyes is either not reading text you know should be displayed or it is reading text in some strange order. Occasionally, automatic screen redrawing by Window-Eyes can be visible and can actually interfere with a program's screen activity. This option is on by default, but you can prevent automatic redraws by going to the Window-Eyes control panel, selecting the General/Other settings group, and Tabbing to the "Allow Auto Redraw" setting. This option is automatically saved when you change it, so you need not worry about doing so yourself. The Redraw hot key not only synchronizes the contents of the screen with the Window-Eyes off-screen model, but it also re-initializes your speech synthesizer. The Reclass Hot Key As you interact with various programs, you may occasionally hear Window-Eyes speak the phrase, "custom control." This means that your focus has landed on some kind of control that Window-Eyes cannot readily identify. Visually, it may look like a button, check box, edit box, etc. However, the underlying way which the program implements the control differs from the standard types that Window-Eyes recognizes. If this happens, the reclass hot key, reached with Insert-R by default, allows you to tell Window-Eyes how to treat this control. The reclass dialog box contains three buttons: Focus Window, Mouse Window, and Cancel. If you press Enter on the Focus Window button, the reclass will take place for the currently focused item. If you choose the Mouse Window button, Window-Eyes will reclass the window underneath the mouse pointer. Choosing Cancel will cancel the operation. Note that if the mouse and the focus window are one in the same, the Focus Window dialog will automatically be presented. After choosing the appropriate button, you will be presented with a dialog containing the following controls: * A list box containing the types of controls which Window-Eyes can identify. * A read only edit box titled Original Class, which includes the current class name of the control that you have selected to reclass. * A read only edit box titled Window Style, which includes the style bits of the control that you have selected to reclass. * A check box labeled Include Style with Class, which, when checked, will allow the reclass to exist for both the window class name and style. * OK and Cancel buttons. When you are reclassing a control that has not already been reclassed, you will hear Window-Eyes announce whether you are reclassing a custom control or an MSAA control. Although MSAA controls can send Window-Eyes information, sometimes reclassing will provide even more. When programmers write custom controls into their programs, they make up names for them, which are called class names. These class names tend to resemble the function of the custom control. For example, a custom control that works like a button in a first-aid program might be called a FA-BTN. Window-Eyes can find and report to you the class name and style for a given custom control. Just Tab to the Original Class read-only edit box. The class name might not sound much like audible English, but you can reread it when you get there by pressing the Speak Summary hot key, which is Control-Shift-S by default. You can also use the Left and Right Arrow keys to move the cursor through the edit box to read one character at a time. Now, hopefully equipped with a clue as to how the custom control may work, use Up and Down Arrow keys to move through the list box until you find a reclassification that should work. Choose it and then try the custom control to see if it does in fact speak interactively. If not, you may simply have to use trial and error until you find an option that works. Sometimes programmers use the same class name to represent two different types of controls. For example, a programmer might use the class name "myClass" to represent both a button and a check box. To solve this problem Window-Eyes allows you to include the window style in the reclassification definition. In the Reclass dialog box, just Tab until you come to the Include Window Style with Class check box and check it. Unfortunately, not all custom controls can be reclassified and made to speak interactively, though most can. If you should encounter this situation, use the original-class item in the Reclass dialog box. If that happens, and you find it difficult to work your way back through the extraneous speech, you can open the .WE file associated with the program inside your Window-Eyes profile, look for a section titled "Reclass on Create," and delete the reclassification from the file. Do not attempt this unless you have already developed reliable skills with editing a file and saving it. Even then, keep a backup copy of the .WE file until you are confident that your work is correct. The Bypass Hot Key Occasionally, you may find that a Window-Eyes hot key conflicts with an identical hot key inside one of your programs. Should this happen, Window-Eyes will see the hot key before your program has a chance to react on it. The bypass hot key, executed with Insert-B, tells Window-Eyes to ignore the hot key that immediately follows it and pass it to your program. For example, many E-mail clients assign the "reply to all' command to Control-Shift-R. This also happens to be the Window-Eyes read-to-end command. If you want to initiate a reply to all, press Insert-B followed by Control-Shift-R. By doing so, Window-Eyes will ignore the command and allow your E-mail program to react to it. If this becomes a regular problem, you can always reassign the offending Window-Eyes hot key to another command while you are inside the program. Accessing the System Tray Windows has an area on the right side of the task bar known as the system tray, which is also known as the notification area. This is used by applications such as the volume control, your wireless networking card, and any other programs or utilities that display notifications to you in real time. Unlike typical programs, these are not accessible from the task bar or the Alt-Tab list. You can Tab to the system tray from the taskbar or press WINDOWS-B to get there, and use your left and right arrows to move through its contents. The Window-Eyes system tray hot key, which is Insert-S by default, provides an alternative method to access the system tray. When you press this hot key, Window-Eyes will say "scanning system tray." Once the scan is complete, Window-Eyes will place you in a dialog box. This dialog consists of a list box which contains the tool tips for the items in your sys tray, four action buttons (for single/double, left/right clicking), and a cancel button. Applications must display a tool tip when the mouse moves over their icons in order for them to be present in the list box. You can use the arrow keys or the first letters of program tool tips to move through the list box. When you find a program with which you wish to work, you can single or double click the left or right mouse buttons on the icon. Generally, you should choose the single right click button to bring up a context menu for the selected application. If you wish to open the selected program, you should select the double click left button. To cancel the sys tray dialog, press the cancel button. Reading A Document Nonstop Window-Eyes lets you start with the cursor at any point in a document and read it from that point forward, all the way to its end or until you press any key. This task is accomplished by pressing the Read to End hot key, Control-Shift-R by default. When you press this hot key, Window-Eyes reads the current line of the document and then issues a Down Arrow command to your program. This process is repeated until the document runs out of new lines to which Window-Eyes can move. You can also use the Right Arrow to jump forward a line or the Left Arrow to jump backward a line while in Read to End. Pressing U during Read to End will increase the speech rate, and pressing D will decrease it. When Read-To-End concludes and if you have changed the speech rate, Window-Eyes will restore it to its original value. Checking the Time and Date When you press the Time/Date hot key, which is Insert-T by default, Window-Eyes will speak the current time and date. The time and date used are retrieved from your computer system. It is important that your computer clock be set correctly in order for Window-Eyes to read the correct time and date. Window-Eyes honors different date formats. For example, if your date format is set to month/day/year, Window-Eyes might say, "March 30, 2011." If your date format is set to be day/month/year, Window-Eyes might say, "30 March 2011." Window-Eyes will also announce the time in either 12 or 24 hour format depending on how your computer's clock is set. Field Name and Data As you Tab between controls in Windows, Window-Eyes reads you the type of control that you have reached. In addition to reading the control type (list box, button, edit box, etc.), it will also try and read what is termed as field name and field data. The field data is simply the option in the current control. For example, in a list box, the field data is all of the items in the list box. In a check box the field data is the checked or unchecked state of the control. In an edit box the field data is all the text in the edit box. Press the Field Data hot key, Control-Shift-D by default, to hear Window-Eyes read this information on demand. The field name for a control is the text, also known as the label, that is usually placed to the left or above it. For example, if you are in the file name edit box of an open dialog, the field name may be "File Name." If you wish to hear the field name spoken on demand, press the Field Name hot key, which is assigned to Control-Shift-N by default. Window-Eyes is usually able to determine the correct field name and data for controls as you Tab to them. However, program developers have many ways to write their software, and sometimes Window-Eyes either speaks the wrong field name, or it may say nothing at all. Because the field name cannot be determined with 100% accuracy, Window-Eyes gives you the ability to tell it what the field name is. After tabbing to a control which does not speak the correct field name or a name you dislike, simply press the Label Field Name hot key, Control-Insert-F by default. A dialog will be displayed with an edit box, ok button and cancel button. You will be placed in the edit box. Type in what you want Window-Eyes to read as the field name for the current control and press Enter on the OK button. From that point forward, Window-Eyes will read what you typed as the field name. Remember, you can label any control even if Window-Eyes was reading the correct field name as displayed on the screen. In other words, you can always override what Window-Eyes would have read. Once you press Enter on the OK button the field name is automatically stored for that particular control only. If you issue the Label Field Name hot key on this same control later, the same dialog box will pop up but the edit box will contain what you previously typed as the default. You can edit it or delete it at this point. The custom field name you entered will be saved immediately, so there is no need to do so yourself. Checking the Battery Level If you have a laptop or netbook, Window-Eyes provides a hot key to tell you how much of your battery charge remains and, if available, an estimate of how long the charge will last. Press the battery status hot key, which is Insert-Q by default. If your computer has no battery, then Window-Eyes will say, "no battery." The Key Describer The key describer is a special mode that, when active, allows you to press virtually any key or combination of keys to cause Window-Eyes to speak their names. If the key you press is a Window-Eyes hot key, Window-Eyes will also describe what that command does without actually performing it. To turn the key describer on, press Insert-1. Window-Eyes will say, "key describer on." Now, you can press any Window-Eyes hot key to hear what it does. For example, press Control-Backslash which normally takes you to the Window-Eyes control panel. Window-Eyes says, "Menu. Activates the Window-Eyes voice control panel." If you have a braille display connected, you can also press its keys to hear what functions they perform. The key describer can be turned off in one of two ways. First, you can press Insert-1 a second time to turn it off yourself. Pressing a system command that normally moves you out of your currently focused program will also turn the key describer off. Pressing the Windows key to open the Start Menu or Alt-Tab to move to another window are examples of system commands. This behavior was created on purpose to ensure you can always exit the key describer, especially if you activated it unintentionally. Assigning Your Own Hot Keys Window-Eyes comes equipped with many hot keys. While we believe we have created a set of keyboard commands that is easy to learn and use, you might want to change some or all of the Window-Eyes hot keys to fit your own preferences. To begin, press Control-Backslash to open the Window-Eyes control panel. Next, press H until you reach the hot keys settings group, and press the right arrow to expand it. Press the down arrow until you reach the hot key category you want to change. Once done, Tab to the list of hot keys. Use your up and down arrows to move through the list until you find the one you want to change. Finally, press the "Capture Key" button to reassign the hot key, or press the "Undefine Key" button to remove the assignment. For specifics on how each control works, see the user interface reference later in this manual. Note that if advanced options are showing, you can also set whether each hot key is defined globally or for the program that was focused immediately before you opened the Window-Eyes control panel. Defining Duplicate Hot Keys If you attempt to assign a keystroke to a hot key but that keystroke has previously been defined elsewhere, Window-Eyes will open its Duplicate Key Definition dialog. This dialog consists of four buttons, as follows: * Replace Key -- Choosing this button undefines the former item, defines the keystroke to the new item, closes the Duplicate Key Definition dialog, and returns you to the Keys list view at the location of the new hot key (where you were when you pressed the duplicate keystroke). * Replace and Redefine Key -- Choosing this button undefines the former hot key, assigns the keystroke to the new hot key, closes the Duplicate Key dialog, and returns you to the Keys list view at the location of the former hot key definition-that is, the hot key that had already claimed the duplicate keystroke you just attempted to reassign. * Allow Duplicate Key -- Choosing this button allows you to define a keystroke for both Browse mode or Microsoft Word actions as well as another action, closes the Allow Duplicate Key dialog, and returns you to the Keys list view at the location of the hot key you are defining. * Cancel -- This is the default button. Choosing this button closes the dialog and reactivates the Hot Key Definitions dialog, returning you to the Keys list view at the location of the same hot key. In short, you can choose Cancel to stay with the former key definition and pick a different keystroke for the new hot key, choose Replace Key to define the keystroke to the new hot key and undefine the former hot key, choose Replace and Redefine Key to define the keystroke to the new hot key and go to the former hot key to define a new keystroke there, or choose Allow Duplicate Key to allow a keystroke to perform two separate actions, depending on whether you are in or out of Browse mode or Microsoft Word. Cursor Keys Differences Between Cursor Keys and Hot Keys A Window-Eyes cursor key is a keystroke that Window-Eyes watches for and acts upon. Unlike hot keys, Window-Eyes allows your program to receive the key, act on it, and then read a specific piece of information. For example, whenever you use your arrow keys to read text in a document, press the Tab key to move through a dialog box, or issue a command that causes your keyboard focus to change, Window-Eyes is able to read the new information you want to hear thanks to cursor keys. Here is how cursor keys work: 1. You press one of the predefined cursor keys, such as the up or down arrow. 2. The program you are working with moves your cursor or performs some sort of action that moves your keyboard focus. 3. After the keyboard focus has moved, Window-Eyes reads the new information. Defining Cursor Keys Window-Eyes is able to store up to 46 cursor key definitions at a time. We have only defined a few of the most commonly used keys, such as the arrows, Tab, Page-Up, Page-Down, Home, and End keys. The remaining cursor keys can be assigned to any keystroke you prefer, and Window-Eyes can perform up to two actions for each key. To add your own cursor key definitions or modify existing ones: 1. Press Control-Backslash to open the Window-Eyes control panel. 2. Ensure "Advanced Options" are enabled from within the "Help" menu. 3. Press F6 until you land on the settings tree. 4. Press the letter C until you reach the "Cursor Keys" group. 5. Press the right arrow to expand the group. 6. Press the down-arrow to focus the "Keys" option. 7. Press the Tab key to move through each control in this section, and set up your cursor key to your liking. Cursor Key Definitions The following list describes all of the possible cursor key types along with their associated actions: * Undefined - Ignores the keystroke. * Prior Character Before - Voices the character to the left of the cursor before Window-Eyes passes the keystroke to the program. * Prior Character After - Passes the keystroke to the program, then voices the character to the left of the cursor in its new position. * Character Before - Voices the character containing the cursor, then passes the keystroke to the program. * Character After - Passes the keystroke to the program, then voices the character containing the cursor in its new position. * Next Character - Voices the character immediately to the right of the cursor. * Word Prior - Voices the word to the left of the cursor. * Word - Voices the word containing the cursor. * Word Next - Voices the word to the right of the cursor. * Line Prior - Voices the line above the cursor. * Line - Voices the line currently containing the cursor. * Line Next - Voices the line below the cursor. * Sentence - Voices the sentence containing the cursor. * Paragraph - Voices the paragraph containing the cursor. * To End Of Line - Voices all text from the character containing the cursor to the end of its line. * Highlight - Reads text within the current user window that is highlighted based on default operating system or user defined colors. * Highlighted Text - Reads newly selected or newly unselected text, punctuation, and spaces-followed by the word Selected or Unselected as appropriate to whether cursor movement is marking or unmarking text. * Cursor Position - Voices the column and line coordinates of the cursor. * Field Data - Voices the data in the field containing the cursor. * Field Name - Voices the name of the current field to the left of the cursor when the cursor is located within the field data. This cursor key also works in many dialog controls. * Field Name And Data - Voices both the name of the field and the data in the field containing the cursor. This cursor key also works in many dialog controls. * Title/Status - Reads the title bar of the focused window and then the title bar of the active window. * Speak Window - When being set, prompts you to select a window number 0-49; when responding to a keystroke, speaks the selected window. * Activate Window - When being set, prompts for the number of a Window-Eyes standard window, 0-49; when responding to a keystroke, makes the specified window the currently active window. * Mouse To Window - When being set, prompts for the number of a Window-Eyes standard window, 0-49, when responding to a keystroke, moves the mouse pointer to the top left of the specified user window. * Mouse Top Left - Instantly moves the mouse to the top left corner of the mouse boundary but makes no announcement. * Load Set - When being set, prompts for the name of a SET file. When responding to a keystroke, loads the Window-Eyes SET file. * Ignore Speak Windows - Ignores new text in a speak window for twice the length of the cursor delay. * Execute Hot Key - Executes the specified hot key. When you set this up, you will be presented with a list box of all available Window-Eyes hot keys. You simply arrow to the hot key you wish to use and press Enter. * Word Enhanced - Reads all consecutive punctuation in a word (or group of characters) if the cursor is on a punctuation mark or reads all consecutive text if the cursor is not on a punctuation mark. This is useful for applications that consider punctuation as a separate word. * Office Attribute Status - Reads attributes such as Bold, Italic, Underline, Font Size, and Show All. By default, CTRL-B, CTRL-I, CTRL-U, and CTRL-SHIFT-* are set up to read Bold, Italic, Underline, and Show All respectively in the Microsoft Word set files. The Office Attribute Status cursor key option also allows a cursoring key to control font size. By default, CTRL-SHIFT-< will decrease the current font size, and CTRL-SHIFT-> will increase the current font size. * Office Smart Tab - The characteristic of this cursoring key will change depending upon the context of the cursor. For example, if the cursor is inside a form in Microsoft Word, then the Office Smart Tab cursoring key will speak the current control. If the cursor is inside a table in Microsoft Word, then the Office Smart Tab cursoring key will speak the new current cell contents. If the cursor is inside the main document in Microsoft Word, then the Office Smart Tab cursoring key will speak the cursor position. Both the TAB and SHIFT-TAB hot keys have been predefined to this action in the Word set files. Depending on the action you select, you may be required to specify additional information. To do so, Tab to, and activate, either the "First Action Info" or "Second Action Info" buttons. For more information on setting up user windows, see KB 1003 in the GW Micro support knowledge base at http://www.gwmicro.com/kb/. Cursor Key Delays There are two types of cursor key delays that impact how well the key will function. The first delay, which is found in the "Keys" section just described, represents how long Window-Eyes should wait after performing the first action to execute the second one. If, for instance, your program requires extra time to fully update the screen, you can tell Window-Eyes to wait after speaking one piece of text before it speaks the second. Sometimes, Window-Eyes might react to your cursor key before your program has had sufficient time to process it. For instance, if you press the down arrow, Window-Eyes waits a brief amount of time for your cursor to move, and then it reads the newly focused line. But what if your program needs more time to move the cursor? In this case, Window-Eyes will end up reading the current line as instructed, but it will read the line you were on before the cursor moved. If you notice this behavior, you can instruct Window-Eyes to wait longer before it starts speaking. To do this: 1. Press Control-Backslash to open the Window-Eyes control panel. 2. Ensure "Advanced Options" are enabled from within the "Help" menu. 3. Press F6 until you land on the settings tree. 4. Press the letter C until you reach the "Cursor Keys" group. 5. Press the right arrow to expand the group. 6. Press the down-arrow twice to focus the "Options" item. 7. Tab to, and modify, the "Cursor Delay" setting. For a more detailed explanation on how to operate the controls in the "Cursor Keys" section of the Window-Eyes control panel, see its related description in the user interface reference later in this guide. Cursor Keys Inside Standard Controls Since Window-Eyes already knows how to handle standard windows controls like check boxes, radio buttons, list views, etc., Window-Eyes will automatically disable cursor keys for all standard controls except for edit boxes and rich edit boxes. For example, as you arrow up and down a list view you would not want Window-Eyes to also read the current line. But in edit and rich edit boxes, you would want Window-Eyes to obey your cursoring key definitions-- which it does. Using the Mouse So far, we have focused on how to read information by moving around with the keyboard, by using Window-Eyes hot keys, and by employing cursor keys. There are times, however, when we will want to browse around the screen to find out what else is displayed or search for information on the screen. The function of the mouse pointer is usually to locate icons or buttons on the screen in order to perform an action, such as a left or right click. Since the pointer is allowed to roam freely around the screen in areas where your keyboard focus cannot, it is also ideal for simply reviewing the screen without clicking on anything. Window-Eyes allows you to move the mouse pointer and read text, icons, menu options, buttons, and other symbols. Window-Eyes provides hot keys to move the pointer up, down, left, right, word by word, icon by icon, and more. You can, of course, use the physical mouse or touch pad if you wish, and Window-Eyes will speak the text or graphics underneath the pointer. Be aware, however, that some practice will likely be required to master this input device. A Word on Pointer Shapes By default, Window-Eyes is configured to announce the shape of the mouse pointer as it changes. For example, Window-Eyes may say something like "arrow," "I beam," "size north south," "hour glass," etc. Each pointer shape represents the state of either your active program or Windows itself. Below is a list of pointer descriptions and what they mean: * Arrow ? The default Windows mouse pointer. * Cross ? Indicates the ability to be more precise when selecting with the mouse. * I beam ? Indicates the window underneath the mouse pointer accepts user input via the keyboard. * Size northeast southwest ? Indicates that the window underneath the mouse pointer may be resized by dragging the top right or bottom left corner of the window. * Size north south ? Indicates that the window border handle underneath the mouse pointer can be moved (when holding down the left mouse button) up or down to alter the height of the active window. * Size northwest southeast ? Indicates that the window underneath the mouse pointer may be resized by dragging the top left or bottom right corner of the window. * Size west east ? Indicates that the window border handle underneath the mouse pointer can be moved (when holding down the left mouse button) left or right to alter the width of the active window. * Hourglass ? Indicates that the operating system is busy performing a task. * App starting ? Indicates that the operating system is opening an application. * Size all ? Indicates the window underneath the mouse can be moved in any direction when the left mouse button is held down. You can adjust whether or not Window-Eyes announces the pointer shape by changing the mouse voice setting within the Window-Eyes control panel. The mouse pointer descriptions themselves can also be changed, and you can even remove the ones you do not like. Because this procedure is rarely performed, it is not described here. Rather, refer to KB 1066 on the GW Micro support knowledge base for full details. Moving the Mouse by Textual Units The following are some essential hot keys to read characters, lines, words, sentences, and paragraphs with your mouse pointer. * Previous Character: Numpad-Left Arrow * Current Character: Control-Insert-Numpad-Center * Next Character: Numpad-Right Arrow * Previous Word: Insert-Numpad-Left Arrow * Current Word: Insert-Numpad-Center * Next Word: Insert-Numpad-Right Arrow * Previous Line: Numpad-Up Arrow * Current Line: Numpad-Center * Next Line: Numpad-Down Arrow * Previous Sentence: Insert-Numpad-End * Current Sentence: Insert-Numpad-Down Arrow * Next Sentence: Insert-Numpad-Page Down * Previous Paragraph: Control-Insert-Numpad-End * Current Paragraph: Control-Insert-Numpad-Down Arrow * Next Paragraph: Control-Insert-Numpad-Page Down Window-Eyes can also move the mouse to the previous, current, and next icons on the screen, but the hot keys to perform these actions are undefined by default. Remember that the above hot keys will move your mouse pointer around the screen-- not your cursor or keyboard focus. In addition, the information you can read with the mouse is limited to what is visible on the screen. If you attempt to read past this with the mouse, Window-Eyes will cause your computer to sound a beep or a ding, and the mouse pointer will not move. The Mouse Directional Movement Keys As useful as it is to be able to move the mouse by specific units of text, there will be times when you will want to move the mouse left, right, up, or down by a specific number of pixels. This is useful if you want to move the pointer by much finer amounts or if there are non-text items on the screen you want to review. Use the following commands to move the pointer by pixels: * Move Mouse Up: Control-Shift-Numpad-Up Arrow * Move Mouse Down: Control-Shift-Numpad-Down Arrow * Move Mouse Left: Control-Shift-Numpad-Left Arrow * Move Mouse Right: Control-Shift-Numpad-Right Arrow Window-Eyes can also announce the mouse pointer's position in terms of its X and Y coordinates on the screen. To hear this information, press Control-Insert-Numpad-Plus. This keystroke is especially useful to verify that your mouse is indeed moving across the screen, even though Window-Eyes may say very little if the pointer is over a blank area. By default, Window-Eyes is configured to move the mouse by 5 pixels at a time. The movement keys can be individually adjusted, though, if you want to move by larger or smaller increments. To update these values: 1. Press Control-Backslash to open the Window-Eyes control panel. 2. Ensure advanced options are showing by enabling the respective item inside the "Help" menu. 3. Press F6 until you land on the settings tree. 4. Press M until you reach the "Mouse" group. 5. Press the right arrow to expand the group. 6. Press the down arrow until you reach "Movement Units." 7. Tab through, and adjust, the up, down, left, and right movement settings. Moving the Mouse by Clips Window-Eyes lets you move the mouse by units called clips. A clip is defined as one of two things: a graphical icon, such as a toolbar button or icon, or a block of text with the same font or attribute. Use the following commands to move the mouse by Window-Eyes clips: * Previous Clip: Insert-Numpad-Home * Current Clip: Insert-Numpad-Up Arrow * Next Clip: Insert-Numpad-Page Up Moving by clips is a quick way of discovering graphics or even changes in text formatting on the screen. Many programs use icons to both display information and enable users to interact with it. If the program you are working with does not appear to be as usable from the keyboard as you would like, there are many times where moving the mouse around by clips will solve the problem. Synchronizing the Mouse Pointer and Keyboard Cursor Window-Eyes can move your mouse pointer to the same position as your keyboard's cursor, and vice versa. For example, if your cursor is inside an edit box, you can route the pointer to the cursor and use your mouse movement keys to then see what items are around the cursor. To do this, press the Mouse to Focus command, which is Insert-Numpad-Plus by default. If, on the other hand, your mouse is on a window or an area of text to which you want to move your cursor, press the Focus to Mouse hot key, which is Numpad-Plus by default. Note that Window-Eyes will attempt to move either the mouse or your keyboard focus as you requested, but there are times when this action will fail. If it does, Window-Eyes will alert you to the fact, and neither the keyboard focus nor mouse pointer will move. Routing to Tooltips Window-Eyes also allows you to route the mouse pointer to a tooltip. This feature is extremely useful when a balloon tool tip pops up in the system tray saying something like, "Click here to perform a task." For example, if you have automatic updates turned on and updates are available, a balloon tool tip may pop up in the system tray saying, "Updates for your computer have been downloaded from Windows Update. Click here to review these updates and install them." When you hear this message, press the Mouse to Focus hot key twice. Window-Eyes will say, "Pointer routed to tool tip," and the pointer will be placed in the center of the tool tip. At that point, you can press the Single Click Left Button, which is Numpad-Slash by default, to perform the click that the balloon refers to. Restricting Pointer Movement The physical mouse pointer is free to roam about the computer screen. Even so, you might want to restrict where the mouse can move. For example, you may want to only explore the items inside the active program, the window that has your keyboard focus, a user window, or indeed the entire screen. The Mouse Boundary hot key, reached by Control-Shift-B by default, will cycle the mouse boundary between four areas: * Active window - The main window of your application. This window typically contains other components, such as a menu bar, toolbar, document area, and status line. The active window is selected as the default mouse boundary. * Focused window - The window that has the keyboard focus. For example, the document area of your program. Unlike the active window, the focused window does not contain any other components. * User window - a user-specified portion of the screen. See KB 1003 for details on how to set up and configure user windows. * Full screen - The entire screen, including any other windows that are visible-- even those that are not part of the active program. In addition to being able to restrict the mouse pointer's position, Window-Eyes provides the following hot keys to quickly move your pointer to the four corners of the active boundary: * Top Left: Numpad-Home * Top Right: Numpad-Page Up * Bottom Left: Numpad-End * Bottom Right: Numpad-Page Down It is often a good idea to move your mouse to one of the boundary's corners if you do not intend to use it. Many programs, especially those that rely heavily on mouse activity, may assume that they should behave in a certain way if your mouse is positioned somewhere in the middle of the screen. Moving the mouse out of the way will reduce the likelihood of unusual application behavior or confusing feedback from Window-Eyes. You can move the mouse to the beginning or end of the line of text containing the mouse pointer by pressing the Mouse Beginning of Line or Mouse End of Line hot keys, which are Alt-Insert-Numpad-Home and Alt-Insert-Numpad-Page Up by default. Movement is limited to the left and right edges of the current Mouse Boundary setting. Note: If you prefer to use the physical mouse rather than the hot keys, the pointer will not be restricted to the selection of the mouse boundary hot key, but will have access to the full screen. Finding Things on the Screen If you know there is a specific piece of text on the screen, you do not have to manually look for it yourself. Instead, use the Mouse Find dialog which is activated with Control-Shift-F. Doing so causes a dialog box to open which prompts you for the text to find. Tab through the rest of the dialog if the text for which you are searching also contains special attributes such as bold, underline, highlight, etc. You can also specify the boundary within which the mouse should confine its search. Finally, activate either the "Forward" or "Reverse" buttons to start searching in the specified direction from the pointer's position. If the text is found, the mouse will be positioned over it. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will inform you that it was unable to find the text, and the mouse will not move. You can also repeat the search by pressing Insert-F. Window-Eyes will continue searching for the text you specified earlier in the same direction. If, for example, you performed a reverse search for the word "Window-Eyes," Insert-F would continue looking for the word going in reverse. Using the Physical Mouse If you do not find the ability to move the mouse pointer by character, word, line, sentence, paragraph, icon, clip, and pixel and the ability to restrict its movement to one of four regions sufficient, you can use the physical mouse. Window-Eyes has several features which enhance its usefulness. In addition, many users with partial sight find a combination of physical mouse and mouse hot keys to be an efficient way to work. If you attempt to move the mouse pointer directly across the screen from left to right, you'll probably notice that it tends to wander upward or downward instead of moving in a straight horizontal line. To eliminate this problem, press the vertical lock hot key, which is undefined by default. Once the key is pressed, the mouse pointer will move only horizontally. To release the lock, press any key. As you might guess, pressing the mouse horizontal lock hot key prevents the pointer from moving horizontally. As with the mouse vertical lock hot key, this command is also undefined by default. In addition, pressing any key releases the lock. Hint: Although you can move the mouse directly across or down in the direction you wish, you may find that the mouse seems to fly across the icons and text and does not give you time to stop when you find what you are looking for. You can slow down its tracking by adjusting the "Pointer Speed" feature in the mouse section of the Windows Control Panels (not the Window-Eyes control panel). Try a number such as zero or one instead of the default of five. The WE Cursor or the Mouse Sometimes you might find that it is not convenient to move the mouse around the screen, or maybe you would like to have two reviewing pointers to keep track of multiple locations. Window-Eyes has the WE cursor to address this problem. To activate the WE cursor press the Numpad-Minus hot key. This key toggles between the mouse pointer and the WE cursor. You can use the mouse movement hot keys to move the WE cursor around the screen. If you want to sync the two pointers press Insert-Numpad-Minus to route the inactive pointer to the active pointer. So, for example, if you are using the WE cursor and you press Insert-Numpad-Minus, you will route the mouse pointer to the WE cursor. On the other hand, if you are using the mouse pointer and you press this hot key you will route the WE cursor to the mouse. Note that unlike the mouse pointer, the WE cursor is invisible, so there is no visual indication of its location. In addition, it cannot be manipulated with the physical mouse. Performing Mouse Button Clicks Once you have located an icon on the screen, you may want to click on it. This simply means that you press one of the mouse buttons. As you are learning how to use your programs, you will also learn which button to use for which function. Once you know which button to use, you could reach over and press the button on the mouse. If you prefer to use the mouse strictly from the keyboard, however, you can press any of the mouse buttons with Window-Eyes hot keys. Your program will not be able to distinguish which method you use to click the mouse buttons. Window-Eyes has three hot keys for the single-click function, one for each of the three mouse buttons. Do not be alarmed if your mouse has only two buttons, however, since the majority of mice are designed this way. Since the left and right buttons are by far the usual ones to use, they are the only ones assigned hot keys by default. To click with the left mouse button, press the Slash key on the numeric keypad. Window-Eyes says "Left" and Windows or your application performs whatever function clicking the left mouse button normally performs. To click the right mouse button, press the Star key on the numeric keypad. Double-clicking can be accomplished three ways. Of course, you can reach over and press the button on the mouse twice in rapid succession. Similarly, you can press the single-click hot key twice in succession. Or you can press the double-click hot key which corresponds to the button you wish to use. Note that the double click hot keys are not assigned by default. Some programs allow you to hold down a Shift or Control key while clicking a mouse button. To perform a Shift-click or a Control-click with the Window-Eyes Mouse-click hot keys, press and release either the Shift or CTRL key; then press the appropriate Mouse-click hot key. Mouse Toggle Hot Keys Instructions for performing tasks in Windows programs often include dragging icons or text with the mouse. What this amounts to is placing the pointer on an item, holding down one of the mouse buttons, moving the pointer to another location while the button is held down, and then releasing it. To lock and unlock the left mouse button, press Insert-Numpad-Slash. To do the same with the right mouse button, press Insert-Numpad-Star. The middle mouse button can also be toggled, but this hot key is undefined by default. Mouse Drag and Drop Window-Eyes provides a straight-forward method to perform a drag and drop operation with the mouse. Follow these steps to drag and drop: 1. Move the mouse pointer to the item you want to move or the start of the text you want to select. 2. Press the Mouse Drag and Drop hot key, which is Insert-Numpad-Delete by default. Window-Eyes will say, "mark." 3. Move the pointer to where you want the item to move or where end of the text you want to select. 4. Press the Mouse Drag and Drop hot key again. 5. A dialog will open. Choose "Drop," and press Enter. Note that for the drag and drop to work successfully, both the start and end locations you choose must remain visible. The operation will fail if part of the area is covered up by another window. Pronunciation Dictionaries So far in this manual, we have shown scores of ways to adjust what Window-Eyes sends to your speech synthesizer, according to what you want to know about what is happening with your computer's screen and keyboard. We have also left room in the Window-Eyes program for you to refine the speech even further by constructing five kinds of pronunciation dictionaries which tell Window-Eyes, "When you see something, call it something else." You can change the pronunciation of whole words, single characters, keys, and graphics-according to how you want them pronounced. Note that to make any changes to Window-Eyes dictionaries, advanced options must be enabled. To do this: 1. Press Control-Backslash to open the Window-Eyes control panel. 2. Press Alt-H to open the Help menu. 3. Down arrow until you reach the "Show Advanced Options" item. 4. If it is not checked, press the Enter key to check it. Otherwise, press the Escape key to exit the menu. Creating a New Dictionary Before the different Window-Eyes dictionaries are described, consider how you want to associate the definitions. By default, all dictionary assignments will be global and thus will apply across all of your programs. If this is what you want, then feel free to skip this section. If, on the other hand, you want to create one or more dictionaries for a specific program, perform the following steps to make a new set file for the program and associate the dictionaries to it: 1. Press Control-Backslash to open the Window-Eyes control panel. 2. Open the Help menu with Alt-H, and press the Down Arrow until you reach "Show Advanced Options." If it is checked, press the Escape key to exit the menu. Otherwise, press Enter to check it. 3. Press Alt-E to navigate to the settings tree. 4. Up or Down Arrow to the Association node, and press the Right Arrow to expand it. 5. Down Arrow to Current Association. 6. Tab to the Set File Name edit box, and enter a name for the new file which will store your program-specific settings. If you are inside Microsoft Outlook, for instance, the set file name may be called "outlook.set." There are no rules for naming set files other than that they must end with .set. However, it is recommended to use short, descriptive names so that you can later identify the set file should you need to make changes in the future or share it with other Window-Eyes users. 7. Tab to the Association combo box, and select how you want Window-Eyes to associate the set file to the active program. 8. Activate the Save Settings button or press Control-S to create both the new set file and the program association. 9. Press Alt-E to return to the settings tree. 10. Up or Down Arrow to the Dictionaries node, and press the Right Arrow to expand it. 11. Down Arrow to Status. 12. Tab to the Include Program Dictionary check boxes for each type of program dictionary you intend to create, and ensure they are checked by pressing the Space Bar. 13. Press Alt-E to return to the settings tree. 14. Down Arrow to any of the dictionary types of interest. 15. Press Alt-P to ensure the program dictionary is active. 16. Tab to the filename edit box, and enter a name for the dictionary you want to create. As with set files, there are no rules for naming dictionaries other than that they must end with the correct extensions; e.g. .chr for character dictionaries, .clr for color dictionaries, .dic for exception dictionaries, .gra for graphic dictionaries, and .key for key label dictionaries. 17. Press Control-S to save and create the new dictionary. 18. Repeat the previous five steps for each dictionary you want to create. 19. Press the Escape key to minimize the Window-Eyes control panel and return to the previously active program. Now that one or more program-specific dictionaries have been created, continue reading to learn what they offer and how to leverage them to customize Window-Eyes speech even further. Dictionary Status Depending on your needs, Window-Eyes dictionaries can be individually turned on and off. By default, Window-Eyes will only display entries for the global dictionaries since, in most cases, that is what users typically edit. You can, however, tell Window-Eyes to display the dictionaries for the active program as well. To set these options: 1. Press the Edit Dictionaries hot key, which is Control-Shift-E by default, to reach the dictionaries settings group in the Window-Eyes control panel. Or, press Control-Backslash, and press "D" until you reach the "Dictionaries" settings group. 2. Press the right arrow to expand the node. 3. Press the down arrow until the Status option is selected. 4. Tab through this section, and set the options as you wish. For more specific information regarding the dictionary status settings, refer to the related section of the Window-Eyes control panel reference later in this guide. The Exception Dictionary Some speech synthesizers make fewer pronunciation errors than others, but none pronounce every word correctly, or at least the way you pronounce certain words in the part of the world in which you live. And it is safe to say that in the foreseeable future, you will not have a system that pronounces every word just the way you want to hear it spoken. If you find a word that your synthesizer is mispronouncing, use the following procedure to correct the speech: 1. Press the Edit Dictionaries hot key, which is Control-Shift-E by default, to reach the dictionaries settings group in the Window-Eyes control panel. Or, press Control-Backslash, and press "D" until you reach the "Dictionaries" settings group. 2. Press the right arrow to expand the node. 3. Press the down arrow until the Exception option is selected. 4. Tab to the "Original" edit box, and enter the word that your synthesizer is pronouncing incorrectly. 5. Tab again to the "Replacement" edit box, and type the word as you want your synthesizer to speak it. Do not worry about correct spelling for the replacement text, as the goal here is to make the word sound, and not necessarily look, right. 6. Tab to the "Update Entry" button, and press the Space Bar to add the word to the exceptions dictionary. Now, any time Window-Eyes encounters the mispronounced word, it will send the correct version to your synthesizer instead of the original text. The word-exception dictionary does not give you the power to change the pronunciation of anything but whole words which are text matches. For example, if you correct the pronunciation of the word psychologist, the word in the plural form is not corrected. You would also have to correct the pronunciation of the word psychologists. Thus, generally speaking, the exceptions dictionary is best for changing words you might not otherwise recognize or those which you find to be pet peeves when mispronounced. It is not a means for you to program the pronunciation of the entire language. Here are the rules for defining Window-Eyes word exceptions: * The original word can only contain alphabet characters (upper or lower case) and the apostrophe. * No spaces, numbers, other punctuation or enhanced Unicode characters are allowed in the word to be changed. When working with abbreviations, do not include periods at the end of the original word. * Spaces and other printable characters are allowed in the replacement string. Putting spaces in the replacement string is a good way to have Window-Eyes spell acronyms, rather than pronounce them as words. You can also Tab to the list of defined exceptions and remove either a single entry, or you can delete all exceptions in the active dictionary at once. See the detailed explanation of the Window-Eyes control panel for additional information about these controls. The Key Label Dictionary The key label dictionary enables you to tell Window-Eyes what to speak whenever you press a key on your keyboard. This feature is useful if Window-Eyes announces keys in a way you do not like or if the program you are using uses special commands to perform different functions. For example, Control-C often copies selected text to the Windows clipboard. To help remind you of this function, you can instruct Window-Eyes to say something like, "copy to clipboard" whenever you press Control-C. To create a new key label definition: 1. Press the Edit Dictionaries hot key, which is Control-Shift-E by default, to reach the dictionaries settings group in the Window-Eyes control panel. Or, press Control-Backslash, and press "D" until you reach the "Dictionaries" settings group. 2. Press the right arrow to expand the node. 3. Press the down arrow until the Key Label option is selected. 4. Tab to the "Capture Key" button, and press the Space Bar to activate it. 5. Press the key you want to define. 6. Your focus will land in the "Original" edit box where you can review the name of the key you just pressed. 7. Tab to the "Replacement" edit box, and enter the text Window-Eyes should speak when the key is pressed. 8. Tab to the "Update Entry" button, and press the Space Bar to add the newly defined key label to the dictionary. You can Tab to the list of defined key labels and remove either a single entry, or you can delete all key labels in the active dictionary at once. See the detailed explanation of the Window-Eyes control panel later in this user's guide for additional information about these controls. The Character Dictionary The character dictionary functions like the exception dictionary. The difference is that Window-Eyes uses the character dictionary to alter its pronunciation of any Unicode character, whether it is surrounded by other characters or is displayed alone on the screen. To add an entry to a Window-Eyes character dictionary: 1. Press the Edit Dictionaries hot key, which is Control-Shift-E by default, to reach the dictionaries settings group in the Window-Eyes control panel. Or, press Control-Backslash, and press "D" until you reach the "Dictionaries" settings group. 2. Press the right arrow to expand the node. 3. Press the down arrow until the Character option is selected. 4. Tab to the "Original" edit box, and type the character whose pronunciation you want to change. If your mouse pointer was on a character when you pressed Control-Shift-E, then this box will already contain it. 5. Tab to the "Replacement" edit box, and enter the text Window-Eyes should speak when it encounters the character. 6. Tab to the "Update Entry" button, and press the Space Bar to add the newly defined character definition to the dictionary. You can Tab to the list of defined characters and remove either a single entry, or you can delete all character entries in the active dictionary at once. See the detailed explanation of the Window-Eyes control panel later in this user's guide for additional information about these controls. If you wish to define a character which cannot be typed from the keyboard, you can use an alternative method. For example, an Unicode 147 is often used as a quote symbol. But this character cannot easily be typed from the keyboard. You can use the following to make an entry for this character: /x147 Simply start the entry with the Slash key followed by the Unicode value of the character you want to define. If the character was automatically placed in the original edit box because you pressed the Edit Dictionaries hot key with the mouse pointer sitting on the character, you will also have the option of associating the font of the character in question with the entry. That is, Window-Eyes will only voice the replacement text for the character if both the character name and font match what is stored in the dictionary. The Graphic Dictionary The graphic dictionary allows you to label graphic symbols which applications (and Windows itself) use to provide visual information. Graphics are commonly used in e-mail programs to denote unread messages, attachments, message priorities, etc. You might also find graphics in your word processor for bold, italic, and underline buttons for manipulating text attributes. If your graphic dictionary settings are set to off, no graphic indication will be announced. If your graphic dictionary settings are set to dictionary only, then only graphics that have been labeled will be announced. Window-Eyes will announce unlabeled graphics with the word "graphic." Regardless of your graphic dictionary settings, you can rely on the Clip and Icon Prior/Next mouse hot keys to always speak a graphic's status, even if the graphic has no label. Using this feature can be useful if you need to hear the presence of a graphic when manually navigating a window, but do not want unlabeled graphics to be read with any other command. The steps for creating a graphic dictionary are similar to those for all the other dictionaries. However, since you cannot type in a graphic and then a description as you can with words and characters, Window-Eyes lets you capture the image and then label it. To add an entry to the graphic dictionary: 1. Place your mouse over the graphic you want to label. 2. Press Control-Shift-E to cause Window-Eyes to open the graphic dictionary section of its control panel. 3. Your focus will land in the "Speech Label" edit box. Type the text, if any, that Window-Eyes should speak when it encounters this graphical symbol. 4. If you have a braille display connected, Tab until you reach the "Braille Label" edit box, and enter the text that Window-Eyes should send to your display when the graphic is encountered. 5. Tab to the "Update Entry" button, and press the Space Bar to add the newly defined graphic definition to the dictionary. Window-Eyes can be instructed to ignore the graphic when you use your arrow keys to move line by line, or it can be told to ignore the graphic altogether. See the detailed explanation of the Window-Eyes control panel for additional information about the graphic dictionary's interface. Windows programs commonly have a feature known as tool tips. A tool tip is a textual label that appears below an icon in the tool bar when the mouse pointer lands on it. Tool tips can be a challenge for the speech-access user, because they disappear as soon as the mouse leaves the icon. The Auto Label Graphics hot key, reached with Insert-G by default, will cause Window-Eyes to examine every graphic on the screen. If the graphic has a tool tip associated to it, Window-Eyes will automatically store its text in the graphic dictionary and speak it when the graphic is encountered later. Note that the auto labeling feature will not change the description of an already labeled graphic. This auto labeling process can take a minute or so to complete. If you wish to stop the process, you can press the Escape key. All entries made before the Escape key was pressed will be defined, but the remaining graphic images will remain unchanged. Finally, note that the Auto Label Graphics hot key only applies to speech labels. The Color Dictionary Windows stores color values by using varying intensities of three primary colors: red, green, and blue. Each color component has a numeric value ranging from 0 to 255. For example, R0,G0,B0 would be absolute black, and R255,G255,B255 is bright white. In all, there are 16,777,216 possible combinations of these primary colors. Merely hearing these numeric combinations often makes it difficult, if not impossible, for someone who cannot see the computer's screen to identify either the foreground or background color. Therefore, Window-Eyes includes a revolutionary color dictionary concept that not only indicates colors by names, but also indicates when an unknown color is close to the shade of a known color. For example, instead of reading r255,g0,b0 for the color red, Window-Eyes will say, "red." Instead of saying, r100,b10,g10, Window-Eyes will say, "shade of red." By default, Window-Eyes contains a comprehensive dictionary which includes several hundred unique colors. Use the following general procedure to edit an existing entry or to add a new one: 1. Press the Edit Dictionaries hot key, which is Control-Shift-E by default, to reach the dictionaries settings group in the Window-Eyes control panel. Or, press Control-Backslash, and press "D" until you reach the "Dictionaries" settings group. 2. Press the right arrow to expand the node. 3. Press the down arrow until the Color option is selected. 4. If your mouse is positioned on a clip when the Color Dictionary opens, choose either the "Foreground" or "Background" buttons to indicate which color you want to add to the dictionary. 5. Tab to the description edit box, and enter the name you want to associate to the color. 6. Tab to the "R," "G," and "B" edit boxes to review or change the respective RGB values for the color. 7. Tab to the "Update Entry" button, and press the Space Bar to add the new color definition to the dictionary. You can Tab to the list of defined colors and remove either a single entry, or you can delete all color definitions in the active dictionary at once. See the detailed explanation of the Window-Eyes control panel for additional information about these controls. Using Braille Although we have focused on speech access up to this point, Window-Eyes also boasts a comprehensive set of features for users of Braille displays. Braille Output Modes Window-Eyes Braille output can be presented in three different modes: Structured, Line, and Speech Box. Use the Display Mode Rotor hot key, which will be specific to the display in use, to cycle between the three modes. Window-Eyes will remember the last mode selected when it closes, and use that mode when restarted. Structured Mode Structured mode displays information in a linear fashion as you navigate around the screen, one line at a time, one control at a time. Control types, field names, control information, and text are all displayed, each entity separated by some designated character, creating a kind of hierarchical representation of data on the screen. Structured mode is the default mode. Line Mode Line Mode displays information based on a single line in the active window by combining controls and text into a complete, tactile representation of the physical layout presented on the screen. Additional, optional data indicators denote the presence of additional information to the left or right of what is currently being displayed. Cursor routing keys can be used to perform specific actions for controls (such as activating a button). Word Mode and Contracted Braille are automatically disabled in Line Mode. Speech Box Mode Speech Box mode provides a virtual Braille buffer for reviewing the last 1000 characters (by default) that were sent to the synthesizer. When Speech Box Mode is enabled, you are placed at the end of the character buffer. You can then scroll left to go further back, or scroll right to move forward. Top of Window will move you to the beginning of the buffer, while Bottom of Window will move you to the end (where you first started). Previous Line behaves like Top of Window, and, in addition, will refresh the text. Next Line also refreshes the text and, like Bottom of Window, places you at the end of the buffer. You can toggle Contracted Braille on and off, as well as toggle 8 and 6 dot Braille, just like any other mode. Other Braille functionality, however, will be ignored. Selecting a Display Before you can review or adjust Window-Eyes Braille settings, you must first select a display with which Window-Eyes will communicate. To do this: 1. Press Control-Backslash to open the Window-Eyes control panel. 2. Press F6 until you are on the settings tree. 3. Press D to focus the "Devices" group. 4. Right arrow to expand the node. 5. Down arrow to "Braille Displays." 6. Tab through the remainder of this section to choose your display, and set any communication parameters it requires. 7. Tab to the "Activate" button, and press the Space Bar to enable the new display. 8. In the resulting dialog that opens, click "Keep Changes" if your display is working correctly. Otherwise, either wait 15 seconds for the change to revert, or click the "Revert" button. The remainder of this section discusses all of the options found in the Braille settings group within the Window-Eyes control panel. To reach this section: 1. Press Control-Backslash to open the Window-Eyes control panel. 2. Press F6 until you are on the settings tree. 3. Press B to focus the "Braille" options group. 4. Press the right arrow to expand the node. Scrolling Options Auto Route Cursor Auto Route Cursor moves the program cursor (rather than the mouse pointer) to new lines automatically, allowing for continuous reading of documents. In other words, as you scroll, the cursor will move with you. Relying on the program cursor means that you have the ability to navigate through an entire document and not just the text that is on the screen (as is the case when tracking with the mouse pointer). The Previous and Next line hot keys, as well as scrolling to the right, will place the cursor at the beginning of a new line. Scrolling to the left will place the cursor at the end of a new line. Applications with no cursor, or disabling this feature, will cause the mouse pointer to be tracked. The Auto Route Cursor option can also be assigned to a Braille hot key. Whole Word Mode When Enable Whole Word Mode is turned on, Window-Eyes will always display whole words, rather than allowing words to be clipped by the end of the Braille display. This feature makes reading through information easier as words will always be displayed in their entirety. Horizontal Scrolling Horizontal Scrolling indicates how Window-Eyes should scroll the display when it needs to be scrolled. For example, when you arrow to the right in a word processor, as the cursor gets to the right of the display you do not want it to simply disappear off the display area. You want the information currently displayed to scroll or shift toward the left so you can see the character under the new cursor position. Choosing to scroll by the display width will cause the display to scroll so the cursor will be at the left most cell position as you scroll off the right. In other words, the display information will scroll the width of your display. A 40 cell display would shift the contents 40 cells when you reached the right side of the display. An 80 cell display would shift the contents 80 cells when you reached the right side of the display, and so on. If you select to scroll by a specific amount, an edit box is enabled which allows you to select how many cells the display should scroll. For example, if you enter 5 in the edit box and you arrow right through a line of text as you arrow off the right of the display, the display would scroll 5 characters to the left and the cursor would be five cells from the right of the display. Indicate Line Change When this option is turned on, scrolling your display to a new line of text on the screen will cause Window-Eyes to emit a ding. Control Information In Windows, as you tab around different controls, Window-Eyes needs to know how you want to represent the control information on the display. Each control can be broken up into three pieces of information: * Field type (check box, edit box, etc.) * Field name (first name, phone number, etc.) * Field data (content of the control such as the person's first name or phone number.) Control Order The Control Order option allows you to select the order in which the three pieces of information will be displayed. There are six options from which you can choose. The default is to show the control type, its name, and any data it contains. Include Name and Include Type Not only can you set the order in which Window-Eyes will display the control information, but you can also control whether the information should be displayed at all. Turn the "Include name" and "Include Type" options on or off to set whether or not those respective pieces of information will be displayed. Include Index The Include Index option allows for the display of index marks in list boxes, list views, tree views, and tab controls. For example, if this option is on, and you tab to a list box, something like "lb separator 1 separator 34 separator Field Name separator Field Data," will be displayed (Note: The steps to defining a separator pattern can be found below). The 1 separator 34 is the index mark. If this option is turned off, however, then Window-Eyes will not display any index marks. Control Types The Control Types list view displays all controls that Window-Eyes knows about. You can select any item and adjust how Window-Eyes represents that particular control. Note that the options you can adjust depend on the control you choose; some control types have more options than others. For example, move down to the button option. As you move through the options, the following controls in this dialog can be adjusted, based on what is relevant to the selected item in the Control Types list view. When you select Button, there are three options enabled for buttons. Press Tab to go to the first option (Control Type). All of the options offer at least this edit box. This allows you to set up what the display should show to represent the selected control. Since you are on button, the default is "bt". If you do not like this simply type in what you do want. Tabbing again will move you to the next option relating to the selected control (Disabled). This is an edit box that allows you to specify what Window-Eyes should add after the control type to signal the button is disabled. The default is "d". So if you accept the default for everything and tabbed to a disabled button you would see "btd" for the control type. Tabbing once more takes you to the third option for buttons (Default). Again this is an edit box allowing you to define what should be added to the control type to signal the button is the default. "e" is the default for this option. So if the display shows "bte" then you know it is a button and is the default button. Display Type If Cursor Detected The Display Type If Cursor Detected check box will only become available when you have selected the Control Type Custom Control. If a custom control does not have a cursor, Window-Eyes will always display the type, assuming the Include Type check box is checked, regardless of this option. If the check box is checked and there is a cursor in the custom control (like the document area of Word), then the type (again assuming the Include Type check box is checked) will be displayed. If the check box is unchecked and there is a cursor in the custom control, the display type (cc by default) will not be displayed. Separator Dot Pattern The Separator Dot Pattern edit box currently defaults to blank (no dots), providing a blank cell for the separator. A separator is placed between pieces of information. You can control what the separator should be by typing in the dot numbers (from one to eight) you wish to use. If you do not specify anything for the dot pattern, then the separator cell will be blank. Speech Box Mode Character Limit The Speech Box Mode Character Limit edit box controls the number of characters that Window-Eyes will retain in the Speech Box Mode buffer. The value (which defaults to 1000) may not exceed 5000. Include Data Indicators When line mode is active, check this option to enable the Left and Right Indicator Dot Pattern edit boxes. These options allow you to control the dot patterns used to indicate additional data to either side of the display. If this check box is unchecked, the Left Indicator and Right Indicator Dot Pattern edit boxes will be disabled. Dot Patterns These options allow you to specify how you want Window-Eyes to represent the different cursors and text attributes on your Braille display. Cursor Pattern This edit box allows you to specify the dot pattern Window-Eyes should use to represent your keyboard cursor. By default, dots 7 and 8 are used. The next set of controls let you decide whether Window-Eyes will keep the dot pattern up or if it should blink. If you opt for the pattern to blink, press the Tab key to move to the blink rate edit box. Here you can set how rapidly, in milliseconds, the dot pattern will blink on your display. The default option is for Window-Eyes to keep the dot pattern up. Mouse/WE Pattern This edit box allows you to specify the dot pattern Window-Eyes will use to represent either the mouse or WE cursor. By default, dots 7 and 8 are used. The next set of controls let you decide whether Window-Eyes will keep the dot pattern up or if it should blink. If you opt for the pattern to blink, press the Tab key to move to the blink rate edit box. Here you can set how rapidly, in milliseconds, the dot pattern will blink on your display. The default option is for Window-Eyes to blink this dot pattern. If the mouse pointer and cursor are defined as dots 7 and 8, and if both cursors occupy the same position, Window-Eyes will keep dot 7 raised, and blink dot 8. Although still a user definable setting, this hybrid raised/blinking set of dots provides you with clear feedback when the mouse and the cursor reside in the same position. Attribute Patterns Following the cursor pattern settings are five edit boxes which allow you to type in the dot pattern you wish to use for each respective attribute. Note that the values in these edit boxes are ignored unless you have the "Display Individual Attribute Rotor" Braille key defined. While reviewing a document, you may encounter a line of text that has each of these types of attributes (bold, highlight, italic, strikeout, underline) within the text. The attributes do not have to be unique for each character or word. For example, some text could be bold, underlined, and italic all at the same time. When you press the Braille key "Display Individual Attribute Rotor," the display will take away the text and show the "bold" symbol set up by the user over the cells that are actually bold. By default, you would only see the letter "b" in the correct cells. All other cells would be blank. The next press shows the next attributed text in the same manner, and so on until you get back to the normal display mode. The attributes and their default dot patterns are as follows: * Bold Pattern - 12 (a Braille b) * Highlight Pattern - 125 (a Braille h) * Italic Pattern - 24 (a Braille i) * Strikeout Pattern - 234 ( a Braille s) * Underline Pattern - 136 (a Braille u) Translation Tables The Translation Tables options allow you to select the translation table that Window-Eyes will use when sending text to your braille display. Active Translation Table The first option is the Active Translation Table list view. This list contains a number of pre-defined tables, and any number of user defined tables (assuming any have been created). If you are comfortable with the factory tables, simply select the desired table and activate the "Save Settings" button. To review the contents of one of the tables, select a table, then select the Open in Notepad button. Notepad will open with a text file containing the dot patterns for the currently defined Unicode values. Each table contains a 6 and 8 dot version. The version opened when selecting the Open in Notepad option will depend on whether you have Window-Eyes configured for 6 or 8 dot Braille. User Defined Translation Table Window-Eyes allows you to set up an unlimited number of user definable tables. You can configure these tables to your individual liking for all defined Unicode values. You cannot edit any entries in the factory tables. If you wish to modify any Unicode value you must use a user table. But what if you only want to make a single change to one Unicode character? Does this mean you have to retype all the other defined characters? Of course not. You can simply select a factory table from which you want to model your user table, Tab again to the Copy to New User Table button and press the Space Bar. Provide a name for the new user table, and press Enter. The new user defined table, containing all of the entries from the selected factory table, will be listed in the Active Translation Table list view. Select the new user table, and activate the Open in Notepad button to edit the entries of the new user table. Unified English Braille Contracted Unified English Braille is available for both the US and British English translation tables. Select the "Use Unified English Braille for Contracted Braille" check box to enable UEB support. Hot Keys Hot keys are quite possibly the most powerful feature of Window-Eyes Braille support. The hot keys section of the Window-Eyes control panel allows you to set up how your Braille keys should interact with Window-Eyes. There are a couple of things that you should note before playing with Braille hot keys. First, if you do not have a physical display selected, all options in this section will be disabled. You must have an active display configured to set up keystrokes. Each display holds its own hot key settings, so switching from one display to another will completely change the layout of the display keys. Keys This list view alphabetically displays all hot keys, and combinations of keys, that are currently defined and allows you to select a key to modify. In addition, the hot key list contains the first action defined for the hot key. If multiple actions exist for a hot key, the first action will be displayed, followed by the phrase, ?multiple actions.? If multiple actions exist for a key, you can use the Key Functions combo box (detailed below) to examine the associated actions. Capture Braille Key Pressing enter on this will cause Window-Eyes to say "Press A Braille Key" and wait. At this point, press the Braille display key you wish to define. This can be any combination of keys offered by your Braille display. After pressing the display key(s) you wish to define, a new entry will be added to the "Keys" list view, and you will be focused on that item. Key Function(s) This lists all the commands the current Braille key will perform. You can simply arrow up and down through all the items. If this is a newly defined braille key, however, the list will be empty by default. Add Hot Key Pressing Enter on this button will pop up a dialog with a list box of all hot keys and all Braille specific hot keys. Braille specific options are those that deal with Braille only and are not offered in the normal hot keys section of the Window-Eyes control panel. Scroll Braille right and scroll Braille left are two examples of Braille specific choices. Arrow to the option you want, and press Enter. That option will be added to the Key Function combo box and will be executed when the Braille key is pressed. Add Keystroke Pressing Enter on this will cause Window-Eyes to say, "Press a keystroke." It is waiting for you to press the key you wish to have sent out when the Braille key is pressed. Any key from the keyboard can be used except for system keystrokes (keystrokes that the operating system acts upon). These can be defined by following the instructions in the next paragraph. You can, however, use any other keystrokes like the Up or Down Arrows. Simply repeat adding hot keys or keystrokes for the individual Braille key press until you are finished. Add Custom Keystroke Pressing Enter on this button will display the Braille Custom Keystroke dialog. Custom Keystrokes allow you to use any system keystroke like Control-Escape or the Windows key (which brings up the Start Menu), Control, Alt, Shift, Key combinations, or any defined shortcut key that launches an application. After checking the check boxes which relate to the modifiers you want to use with your custom keystroke, Tab to the Capture Single Key press button, press your Space Bar, then press the single key that you want to use in conjunction with your modifiers. The Key Function(s) combo box will then display the new custom keystroke:. Clear Entry The Clear Entry button is used to remove a single option from within a keystroke. Simply arrow to the key you wish to modify. Then select the option you wish to clear in the Key Function(s) combo box and then press Enter on the Clear Entry button. That option will be removed, and all other items will remain. Clear Key The Clear Key button will remove all options for the selected Braille key and allow you to start adding commands again from scratch. Delete Key The Delete Key button will remove the entire key from the Keys list box, not just the entries for the key that is selected. This is much like the Clear Key button except that the entire keystroke and its entries are removed. Keys Apply To This set of radio buttons lets you choose whether the selected braille hot key will be available globally or only for the program you were using before you opened the Window-Eyes control panel. Options Translations If the active translation table supports it, this group of radio buttons allows you to turn contracted braille on and off. Indicate Capitalization if this item is checked and you have enabled contracted braille, then Window-Eyes will send the capitalization sign to your display to indicate uppercase text. If this option is unchecked, then Window-Eyes will always send lowercase text to the display. Auto Untranslate At Cursor Auto Untranslate is useful while editing in contracted Braille. While this option is enabled, every time a cursor appears in a word that word will be automatically untranslated out of contracted Braille. Note that this feature will only work if a cursor is present. Translate Symbols A number of symbols exist that are not represented in contracted Braille (+, /, , @, \, ^, [, |, ~, ] -). Note: Only these symbols are affected.). The Translate Symbols option allows you to specify whether these symbols should be spelled out, or left as symbols. For example, with this option checked, the symbol > would be spelled out as greater than. Attribute Marking This option allows you to select what attributes you want represented on the display using dots 7 and 8. The default Attribute Marking is highlight. If you have the attribute selected and it occurs in your text, dots 7 and 8 will come up for that text. 8 Dot Braille This group of radio buttons lets you choose whether you want to use 6 or 8 dot Braille. The attribute markings and the cursor/mouse pointers, however, will still use dots 7 and 8 if you have opted to have Window-Eyes display them. Auto Update Timeout Another powerful feature of Window-Eyes Braille support is Auto Update Timeout. The Auto Update Timeout edit box specifies the time in milliseconds to wait before updating the display with the line under the mouse as it is changing. The range is 250 to 10,000 which is a quarter of a second to 10 seconds. A good example of using the Auto Update Timeout feature would be when you are downloading a file. With the mouse on the status of the download, the display can automatically update the information under the mouse. This would allow you to monitor a download without having to perform any other keystrokes. Quick Message Mode Quick Message Mode is used for messages that are typically only spoken but are not usually on the screen; for example, when you issue the time and date hot key with Insert-T, the caps lock is pressed, or the mouse pointers change. When Window-Eyes speaks any of these types of messages, the message will also be sent to the display in quick message mode. Any text that is currently being displayed will be replaced with that of the quick message. The following settings determine how long the quick message remains on the display: * Disabled - completely ignores these type of messages * On With No Timeout - the quick message will remain on the display until a focus change occurs, the mouse moves, or you hit a hot key to instruct otherwise. * On With Timeout - the quick message will remain on the display for the specified amount of time, in seconds. After the timeout has expired, the text previously on the display will reappear, unless there was a focus change during the quick message, in which case the new focus will be shown. Selecting the On With Timeout option will provide you with a Timeout edit box. The default is 2 seconds. Since a quick message can come at any time, Window-Eyes will take away what was currently displayed and replace it with the quick message. If a new quick message comes through while one is already being displayed, the new message will be added to the beginning of the display and the old message(s) will push to the right with a separator placed between them. Show Simulated Braille Window This group of radio buttons lets you choose whether Window-Eyes will show a simulated braille display on the screen. This feature is handy if a sighted user wants to see the braille output that Window-Eyes is sending to a physical display. This option is turned off by default. Spacing Show Indents For Show Indents to function, the Expand Spacing check box (noted below) must be checked. Show Indents will display the indents on every line based on the left edge of the current window. Expand Spacing When this option is checked, Window-Eyes will show a gap on the display that indicates multiple blank spaces on the screen. When you select this option, the Pixels Per Space edit box will be enabled. This allows you to select how many pixels should represent a single space on the display. You can type anything from 1 pixel to 100 pixels per space. If Expand Spacing is unchecked, Window-Eyes will pack information together and separate it by a single space regardless of how far apart the separated items may be on the screen. Note that Window-Eyes will collapse gaps between items on the screen, such as from the left edge of your active program's window to the first character of text in its document area. However, this option has no effect on physical space characters within actual text. Graphics Verbosity This option tells Window-Eyes exactly what it should do when a graphic is encountered. The available choices are: * None - never display graphic information on the display. * Braille only - Only display the graphic label if the graphic in question has a defined braille label. Otherwise, the graphic will be ignored. * Braille or speech only - use the Braille definition if it exists. If it does not, then use the speech definition. If neither exists, then the graphic will be ignored. * Graphic only - display all graphics using the graphic symbol described below. * Braille or graphic - use the Braille definition if it exists. If it does not, display the graphic using the graphic symbol described below instead. * Braille, speech or graphic - use the Braille definition if it exists. If it does not, then use the speech definition. If neither exists, use the graphic symbol described below. Note that none of these options will have any effect on the type of graphical information Window-Eyes speaks. Graphic Symbol This edit box allows you to define the dot pattern Window-Eyes will use to indicate graphics on your Braille display. The dot pattern is only used if the verbosity option described above is set to include it, the dictionaries are not used, or if there is no entry for the graphic in the dictionaries. The default is a full-cell (dots 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8). Isolate Individual Graphics with Separator If this option is checked, the separator defined in the Control Information section will be used to separate all graphics from one another. If this is unchecked there will be no separator around graphics. Working with the Internet Window-Eyes provides the most intuitive web experience with user definable hot keys, customizable verbosity options, support for dynamic web content, and support for the W3C UA guidelines. These tools provide the user with a very powerful and flexible environment for navigating even the most complicated web pages. This Section of the Window-Eyes manual provides information on browsing web pages with Window-Eyes. What is Browse Mode? Web browsers are designed with sighted users in mind. That is, the designers assume users can review the content of web pages with their eyes and can manipulate the mouse to interact with the page. Consequently, there is no inherent means of accessing the web page's information from the keyboard. Additionally, information is often formatted to be visually pleasing in ways which, if it were read from left to right, top to bottom, would make little sense to speech access users. To remedy this problem, we have created a feature called Browse Mode. Whenever you are in Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, Adobe Reader, Eudora, Lotus Notes, iTunes, Windows Help, or any other application that presents web-style views, Window-Eyes will automatically enable Browse Mode. While you are in Browse Mode, Window-Eyes works with an invisible pointer that allows you to cursor through an internal buffer rather than working with the information actually presented on the screen. You can use the cursor keys to move around the web page much like you would a word processor (character by character, word by word, line by line, etc.) or you can use any of the many Browse Mode navigation keys that Window-Eyes offers for quicker navigation. Note that only some of the more frequently used navigation keys will be described in this section. Refer to the hot key reference later in this manual for a complete listing of the keys you can press while Browse Mode is active. It is important to remember that, in order for Window-Eyes to retrieve information from a web page, it must wait on the browser to finish downloading it. Therefore, it may take several seconds before you hear anything. If you try and issue a command to Window-Eyes while the page is still being downloaded from the Internet, Window-Eyes will beep and say "downloading page" and ignore your keystroke. Basic Navigation The basic movement commands for navigating a web page are much like the basic movement commands of a word processor: * Left and Right arrow keys move character by character. * Control-Left and Control-Right arrow keys move word by word. * Up and Down arrow keys move line by line. * Home - Moves to the beginning of the line and reads the character under the virtual cursor. * End - Moves to the end of the line and reads the character under the virtual cursor. * Control-Home - Moves to the beginning of the document and reads the line under the virtual cursor. * Control-End - Moves to the end of the document and reads the line under the pointer. * Page Up - Reads the previous twenty four lines in the document and moves the virtual cursor back twenty four lines. * Page Down - Reads the next twenty four lines in the document and moves the virtual cursor down twenty four lines. * Tab - Moves your focus to the next link or control on the web page and reads it. * Shift-Tab - Moves your focus to the previous link or control on the web page and reads it. Reading web page information is as easy as using any of the navigation keys mentioned above. Simply pressing arrow keys will cause Window-Eyes to speak. A common practice is to read the entire web page using the Read To End command (Control-Shift-R by default). This command will cause Window-Eyes to begin reading at your current position, and continue to the end of the web page. Interacting with a web page is just as easy. Most of the time, you will interact with a web page by activating links in order to navigate to new information. Once you have focused a link to which you want to navigate, simply press the Enter key. The web browser will load the new information associated with that link (usually a new web page). You can also interact with a web page by filling out forms. See the "Working with Forms" section later in this manual for more information. Moving Among Web Page Elements While Browse Mode is on, you can use your arrow keys to read the contents of the web page. In addition, you can use a series of letters and numbers to jump between many types of web page elements. Some of the more commonly used elements are described below. Links A link is an interactive element that connects one web resource to another. Links usually change the location of a given web page to the page specified in the link source. The actual behavior of a link, however, is determined by the web page developer. Links also have the ability to be designated by the web browser as visited. A visited link is simply a link that you have navigated to before. Use the following hot keys to navigate through links: * L = Next Link * Shift-L = Previous Link * V = Next Visited Link * Shift-V = Previous Visited Link Note that Tab and Shift-Tab can also be used to navigate through links, the only difference being that Tab and Shift-Tab will also place focus on form controls when encountered, whereas L and Shift-L will only focus links. onClicks Web developers are able to create interactive objects that perform functions similar to those of standard links using a JavaScript method called onClick. Window-Eyes provides access to these objects by letting you press Enter on them, just as you would with a standard link. The hot keys to move through links will also move you between any onClicks that may be present on the web page. Lists A list element contains a series of items formatted in a specific way, either numbered, unnumbered, or as definitions. Window-Eyes will correctly identify all types of numbering styles for lists: Numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.), upper/lower alpha characters (a, b, c, etc.), and upper/lower Roman numbers (i, ii, iii, etc.). Window-Eyes will also automatically tell you when a list has lists nested inside it, how many are present, and it will correctly identify the starting value of a numbered list (even if it does not start with the number 1). Use the following commands to navigate among lists: * S = Next List * Shift-S = Previous List * I = Next List Item * Shift-I = Previous List Item * Left Bracket-S = Move to the first list item * Right Bracket-S = Move to the last list item Headings A heading element is much like the headline of a newspaper article, usually offering a brief description of the section that follows it. Headings range from level 1 to level 6, with each level implying a degree of importance. For example, level 1 is usually the most important, level 2 is less important than level 1, level 3 is less important than level 2, etc. Use the following commands to move through headings: * H = Next Heading * Shift-H = Previous Heading * Number followed by H = Next Heading with a level of number (where number is a value between 1 and 6) * Number followed by Shift-H = Previous Heading with a level of number (where number is a value between 1 and 6) If you know the heading level to which you want to move, press the number 1 through 6 followed by the letter H. For example, to reach the first level 2 heading on a web page, you would press 2 followed by the letter H. Consecutive presses of the letter H at this point would continue to move through all headings regardless of their designated level. To move to a specific level again, you would press the number of the heading level, followed by pressing the letter H. Languages A language attribute can indicate a unique language for a given element. If you are using a synthesizer which supports multiple languages, such as Eloquence, Window-Eyes will automatically switch to the specified language and will speak the element in that language. Note that this feature can be disabled in the Browse Mode Verbosity section of the Window-Eyes control panel. Landmarks Not to be confused with Window-Eyes placemarkers (discussed later), landmarks are special elements that authors can add to their web pages to designate different sections of the page. For example, there might be a landmark to specify a banner, content navigation, main content, etc. If landmarks exist, you can use the following commands to navigate among them: * Semicolon = Moves to next landmark * Shift-Semicolon = Moves to previous landmark When a landmark is reached, Window-Eyes will announce the landmark and its type and move your cursor to the landmark's position. Note that the presence and placement of landmarks is at the discression of web authors. Paragraphs Window-Eyes defines a paragraph as an area within the web page that has more than one blank line above and below it. This area can contain any combination of text or web elements such as links and headings. Use the following commands to navigate among paragraphs: * P = Next Paragraph * Shift-P = Previous Paragraph * Left Bracket-P = Beginning of current Paragraph * Right Bracket-P = End of current Paragraph Note that when navigating by this element, Window-Eyes will automatically read the entire contents of the paragraph that gains focus. By default, Window-Eyes also hides multiple blank lines that might separate one paragraph from another. To see these lines, turn "Speak Blank Lines in Smart Paragraph Mode" on inside the Browse Mode section of the Window-Eyes control panel. Quotes and Block Quotes Quotes and block quotes are used for indicating both long and short quotations that do not require paragraph breaks. Block quotes are normally used for long quotations, usually containing paragraph breaks, whereas quotes are usually used for shorter, inline quotes. Use the following keystrokes to move through quotes and block quotes: * Q = Next Block quote * Shift-Q = Previous Block quote * Left Bracket-Q = Beginning of current Block quote * Right Bracket-Q = End of current Block quote Note that when navigating to this element, Window-Eyes will automatically read the contents of the block quote. Tables Tables allow web page authors to arrange elements (i.e. text, graphics, etc.) in a specific format containing rows and columns, much like a spread sheet. Each intersection of a row and column forms a box which is called a cell. Web page authors can implement tables in two different ways: to show data in columns and rows for easier navigation, or to show the information in a visually pleasing form. Use the following commands to move among tables on web pages: * T = Next Table * Shift-T = Previous Table * Left Bracket-T = Beginning of current Table * Right Bracket-T = End of current Table Table Mode Although you can navigate a table simply by arrowing down through the contents, many times, a table will make more sense by entering Window-Eyes table mode. When you come across a table on a web page, Window-Eyes will say table X (indicating the current table number), the title of the table if one is specified, start X rows (indicating the number of rows for that table) Y columns (indicating the number of columns for that table). Once table mode is on, Window-Eyes will treat the current cell as if it were the entire web page. All navigation and movement keys will apply to the cell until you turn table mode off. Control-Plus or Control-Numpad-Plus - turns on table mode. If you encounter a nested table, otherwise known as a table inside of another table, Window-Eyes will automatically enable table mode for that nested table when pressing this hot key. Control-Minus or Control-Numpad-Minus - turns off table mode for the current table. If you are in a nested table, pressing this hot key will return you to its parent table. Control-Shift-Minus or Control-Shift-Numpad-Minus - turns table mode off completely. This will NOT disable table notification but is simply a quick way to get out of table mode when you are inside nested tables. For example, if you are inside a table that exists inside another table (which could even exist inside yet another table), pressing this hot key will take you out of every table, and put you back in the main web page. Note that table mode allows you to move through the table that has focus when you first enable it. If you want to use this mode on another table, you must first turn it off, move to the next table, and turn it on again. Moving Through Table Cells Window-Eyes will treat each cell of a table as its own separate web page, meaning that all navigation keys are relevant only to the current cell while you are in table mode. In other words, in a table cell while in table mode, Control-Home will move you to the top of the cell, rather than the entire web page. The following keys will help you navigate a table: * Insert-Right-Arrow - Moves one cell to the right. * Insert-Left-Arrow - Moves one cell to the left. * Insert-Up-Arrow - Moves one cell up. * Insert-Down-Arrow - Moves one cell down. * Control-Insert-Right-Arrow - Moves to end of row. * Control-Insert-Left-Arrow - Moves to beginning of row. * Control-Insert-Up-Arrow - Moves to top of column. * Control-Insert-Down-Arrow - Moves to bottom of column. Reading Cell Headers Window-Eyes has several options for indicating names of both columns and rows. Control-Shift-H - This hot key will allow you to cycle through the following seven options for row and column announcement: * No title - No cell header information will be announced when moving between cells. * Attribute Only - If a web page author has designated certain cells to act as column and row headers, Window-Eyes will speak their contents as you move between cells. * Column Title - This will cause Window-Eyes to read the contents of the first cell in the current column whenever you move from one column to another. If you move through the same column, Window-Eyes will not read the first cell. * Row Title - This will cause Window-Eyes to read the contents of the first cell in the current row whenever you move from one row to another. If you move through the same row, Window-Eyes will not read the first cell. * Column or Row - This will cause Window-Eyes to read only the new column or row header. If you move to a new row, then the row header will be spoken. If you move to a new column, then the column header will be read. * Column and Row - This will cause Window-Eyes to always read both the column and row headers. If you change rows, then the row header will be spoken first. If you change columns, then the column header will be read first. * R X, C Y - This will cause Window-Eyes to speak the coordinates of table cells as you move to them. For example, "R 1, C 1" would be the first row and column of the table. By default, Window-Eyes is set to read no header cells as you move through tables. This option can be changed in the Browse Mode verbosity section of the Window-Eyes control panel. Working with Forms A form is a section of a web page that contains elements called controls. Controls are items such as check boxes, radio buttons, edit boxes, combo boxes, buttons, etc. We strongly suggest that you review the entire page to get a feel for how the form is laid out before you begin filling out any information. General Form Commands Use the following commands to navigate through form elements: * F = Next Form Control * Shift-F = Previous Form Control * B = Next Button * Shift-B = Previous Button * C = Next Combo Box * Shift-C = Previous Combo Box * E = Next Edit Box * Shift-E = Previous Edit Box * R = Next Radio Button * Shift-R = Previous Radio Button * X = Next Check Box * Shift-X = Previous Check Box Radio buttons, check boxes, and buttons can all be manipulated while either in or out of Browse Mode by using the Space Bar. Note that when using the Space Bar while in Browse Mode, you will remain in Browse Mode, even after the control has been toggled. The space bar cannot be used on other controls like edit boxes, combo boxes, and list boxes as they require Browse Mode to be off. This will be discussed below. Because Browse Mode is a special mode specifically designed for reviewing web pages, it needs to be turned off so that you can interact with some form controls. If you attempt to enter text into a form while Browse Mode is on, the keys will attempt to perform the associated Browse Mode functions. Turning off Browse Mode provides you with a dedicated environment for safely interacting with various form elements. By default, Window-Eyes will turn Browse Mode on and off for you when you use the Tab and Shift-Tab hot keys to move through forms so that you need not worry about doing so yourself. You can toggle Browse Mode four different ways: * Using Browse Mode hot key (Control-Shift-A by default) * Pressing Enter on any control * Physically clicking the mouse inside a form control * Selecting the Browse Mode option in the General/Other settings group in the Window-Eyes control panel. You can use the Browse Mode hot key to toggle Browse Mode on or off at any point on the web page. When Browse Mode is off, you can also press the Escape key to turn it back on. When you press Enter on any control, Window-Eyes will automatically turn off Browse Mode and give the control focus. Pressing Enter on an edit box will provide you with a blinking cursor, which indicates you can begin typing in it. Pressing Enter on a check box will toggle its state between checked or unchecked. Pressing Enter on a button will cause that button to be activated. Note that when Browse Mode is off, you can still press the Tab and Shift-Tab keys to navigate through the web page, but the next and prior form controls (F and Shift-F by default) in addition to the individual element navigation keys will not work until Browse Mode is turned back on either with a hot key or by Tabbing to a link.. If you prefer to use the mouse, you may issue a left-click inside a form element (such as an edit box, check box, etc.) to turn Browse Mode off and begin interacting with the control immediately. Turning Browse Mode off directly from the Window-Eyes control panel, while possible, tends to interrupt the flow of working with forms. We recommend using either of the previous three options for the best possible form experience. Out of Browse Mode, Window-Eyes will attempt to find and speak the field names for controls as you move among them. Window-Eyes will analyze the form and make its best attempt at speaking the proper field name for each element as you reach it. However, if the form is written poorly, Window-Eyes may not read the field name correctly or at all. If you are not sure where you are on the form, turn on Browse Mode by pressing Control-Shift-A or Escape. After the page has been loaded you can use your up and down arrows to get some context. Then simply press Enter on the necessary control to continue filling out the form. Automatic Form Interaction As mentioned above, Window-Eyes will automatically turn Browse Mode off for you when you Tab to a form element that cannot be altered while the mode is active (such as a combo box or edit box), and it will turn Browse Mode back on when the Tab key takes you to a link. Navigating through a web page or form by any other means will not change the state of Browse Mode. Thus, if you want to interact with a form in the manner its designers intended, use the Tab key and let Window-Eyes handle the rest. On the other hand, if you only want to interact with specific elements or want to move to only certain controls within the form, you can use the prior and next form control commands without fear that Browse Mode will vanish. This behavior, collectively known as automatic form interaction, is enabled by default. If you want to turn Browse Mode on and off yourself regardless of how you navigate web sites, simply navigate to the Verbosity/Browse Mode/Autoload settings group of the Window-Eyes control panel and change "Allow Automatic Form Interaction" to "No." Alternatively, while Browse Mode is on, press the Automatic Form Interaction key (Control-Slash by default) to change the setting without leaving the web page. Enhanced Control Search Window-Eyes allows you to search for specific controls in a form. For example, you can move between only edit boxes or buttons, move by more than one control at a time, focus checked or unchecked items, etc. To do this requires two steps: * Press Slash or Shift-Slash to enter the next or previous control search mode. * Press the key(s) that represent the item for which you want to search. The following list describes each possible modifier along with its purpose: * C - search for a checked control, which is specified after this key is pressed. This option is only relevant for check boxes and radio buttons. * U - search for an unchecked control, which is specified after this key is pressed. This option is only relevant for check boxes and radio buttons. * D - Search for a disabled control, which is specified after this key is pressed. * Enter - Repeats the last control search. If none was previously performed, this will move to either the next or previous control depending on which direction you specified. After pressing the Next/Prior Control hot key and an optional modifier, use one of the following keys to specify the type of control to which to navigate: * B - Button * E - Edit box * O - Combo box * X - Check box * R - Radio button * L - List box * A - any control For example, pressing Slash,X will find the next checkbox. Pressing Slash,U,X will find the next unchecked checkbox. Pressing Slash,C,X will find the next checked checkbox. And so on. You can also use the number keys (1-9) prior to pressing the Specified Control Next/Prior hot keys to jump from your current location to the number specified for the particular control. For example, pressing 5,Slash,U,X would move you to the fifth unchecked check box from your current position. Place Markers Window-Eyes Place markers easily outperform place marker features found in other screen readers by offering the ability to search for specific text rather than just hard coding a place marker to a line number. In today's dynamic web environment, Window-Eyes Place markers give you quick and easy access to common web page areas. To set a place marker, navigate to the line in the Browse Mode buffer to which you want to add the place marker, and press the Place Marker Dialog hot key, which is Control-Shift-K by default. The place marker dialog allows you to set a new place marker, edit existing place markers, or even jump to an existing place marker. The description of the dialog is as follows: E = Name - Edit box - This is the name of the place marker. This will default to the name of the item you are on in the Browse Mode buffer. For example, if you are on a link called "Window-Eyes" when you bring up the place marker dialog, the place marker name will default to "Window-Eyes." You can change the place marker name to be anything you want. H = Hot Key Number - Combo box - Window-Eyes will automatically assign a hot key to the place marker so that you can quickly jump to it. There are 9 slots available. Y = Temporary - Check box - If this is checked, the place marker you are adding will be stored in memory until you exit Window-Eyes. If, on the other hand, this option is unchecked, the place marker you are adding will be stored to disc, and it will be available even after Window-Eyes restarts. L = Auto Read Lines - Edit box - The Auto Read Lines edit box allows you to specify how many lines of text will be automatically read when you navigate to a place marker. Each place marker may have a different number of lines associated with it. The default number of lines is 5. S = Applies to: * Webpage - Radio button - If the apply to webpage radio button is selected, the place marker you are adding will only work on the current web page. For example, a place marker saved for the web page www.gwmicro.com/support will only work on that web page. * Domain - Radio button - If the apply to domain radio button is selected, the place marker you are adding will work on any web page containing the same domain name. For example, a place marker saved for the domain gwmicro.com will work on any page on the gwmicro.com website. T = Place marker Text - Edit box - By default, place markers will be associated to the line that you are on in Browse Mode when you open the place marker dialog. Because web pages are so dynamic, it is very possible that the next time you visit the page, the line to which you wanted the place marker associated will have changed. The place marker text edit box allows you to define the text that Window-Eyes will search for if the lines do not match when trying to locate a place marker. This is used with the second and third radio buttons described next. P = Position Relative To: * Line Number Only - Radio button - When selected, Window-Eyes will only match line numbers. If the line moves because the page changes, the line numbers will no longer match, and the place marker will not be found. * Line Number and Text - Radio button - When selected, Window-Eyes will only match line numbers with specific text (see the place marker text edit box above). This is useful if you have text on a page that is constant followed by text that changes. For example, say there is a news page that always begins its main headline with "updated on..." followed by the current date. Using the place marker text, you can instruct Window-Eyes to look on a specific line for the text "updated on" and omit the date. * Line Number and Text Search - Radio Button - When selected, Window-Eyes will scan the entire page and look for the text supplied in the place marker text edit box. As this is the most reliable option (especially when working with dynamic web sites), we recommend its useage unless there is sufficient reason to choose one of the other options. A = Add Entry - Button - Adds a place marker. Pressing Enter will also add an entry if you are modifying the properties of an existing place marker. R = Remove Entry - Button - Removes the selected entry in the Names list box. V = Remove All - Button - Removes all the entries in the Names list box. J = Jump To - Button - Jumps to the selected entry in the Names list box. N = Names - List box - Lists the names of place markers based on the following radio buttons. D = Display Names By: * Domain - Radio button - When selected, displays all place markers available for the current domain in the Names list box mentioned previously. * URL & Domain - Radio button - When selected, displays all place markers available for the current web page in the Names list box mentioned previously. URL - Read only edit box - Displays miscellaneous information regarding the selected place marker. Ok - Button - Confirms place marker changes, and closes the dialog. If you are in the process of adding them, OK will add the last entry. If you are in the process of editing an existing one, it will save those and all prior changes. Cancel - Button - Cancel's whatever you are doing, and closes the dialog. If you added or edited any place markers, those changes will be lost. Once you have defined some place markers, you can press the Next Place marker hot key, which is K by default, to jump to the next place marker on the page. Press the Prior Place marker hot key, which is Shift-K by default, to go to the prior place marker. If you assigned a hot key number to a place marker, you can type that number (1 through 9) followed by a press of the Jump to Place marker hot key, which is J by default, to have the text at the place marker read. Pressing the Jump to Place marker hot key again will move the Browse Mode cursor to the place marker line. For example, if you have a place marker assigned to hot key 3, you can press 3J to read the text at the place marker, and press J again to move to the place marker. More Navigation Options The following commands may also prove useful when navigating web pages while Browse Mode is on. * N = Next Text * Shift-N = Previous Text * M = Next Frame * Shift-M = Previous Frame * Left-Bracket-M = Beginning of current frame * Right-Bracket-M = End of current frame * D = Next Different Line * Shift-D = Previous Different Line * A = Next Anchor * Shift-A = Previous Anchor * G = Next Graphic * Shift-G = Previous Graphic The Element Properties Dialog The element properties dialog, reached by pressing Insert-E, displays additional information about the element that is under your Browse Mode cursor. For example, if you would like to know the color of the text on a web page, you would navigate to the text in question and press Insert-E. A dialog box will open which displays the following pieces of information: * Description ? i.e. Link, Picture, Edit Box, etc. * Font ? i.e. Arial, Verdana, Tahoma, etc. * Font Size ? i.e. 10pt, 12px, larger, etc. * Font Style ? i.e. Normal, Bold, Underline, etc. * Foreground ? Color, either named (i.e. Purple) or in RGB (i.e. 255, 255, 0). * Background ? Color, either named (i.e. Purple) or in RGB (i.e. 255, 255, 0). * Alt text if available. * TITLE text if available. * Filename if the element is an image. Controlling Automatic Page Refreshes The refresh rotor hot key, which is reached with Alt-Shift-M by default, allows you to control any refreshes that may take place on the web page. Flash objects or other web page content can cause the page to reload. When this happens, Browse Mode may reactivate, download the updated page, and place you back at the top of the buffer. Since this can hinder productivity, you have the option of controlling when Window-Eyes allows pages to reload. There are three options: Suspend Off, Suspend Flash, and Suspend All. If suspend off is chosen, Window-Eyes will always allow the page to reload. If suspend all is active, Window-Eyes will never allow the web page to reload. If suspend Flash is active, Window-Eyes will only block Flash objects from reloading the web page. By default, Window-Eyes is configured to suspend all page refreshes. Note that this feature works only in Internet Explorer. The Page Navigation Dialog The page navigation dialog, reached with Insert-Tab by default, causes Window-Eyes to display a dialog that lists the Available links, frames, tables, headings, lists, anchors, forms, controls, landmarks, and place markers that happen to be on the current web page. The element you select is displayed inside a standard list box. You can move through the list box by arrowing up and down, press the first letter of the option you want until you get there, or start spelling out the specific name you want until you find it. By default, Window-Eyes displays the links in the order they appear. If you wish you can use the radio button in the dialog to sort the links alphabetically instead. You can view different element types by selecting the appropriate radio button. All items aside from Headings and Links can only be listed in the order they appear on the page. If you are viewing links, you can either activate the link or simply move your Browse Mode cursor to it by selecting the appropriate button. The default button causes the link to be activated. If you push the Focus Link button instead, the cursor will simply move to the link without activating it. This is a great way to get some context around the link. All other items, however, can only be focused; they cannot be activated. Use the following hot keys to quickly set which type of element you want to view: * Alt-L displays links. * Alt-R displays frames. * Alt-T displays tables. * Alt-H displays headings. * Alt-I displays lists. * Alt-N displays anchors. * Alt-O displays forms. * Alt-C displays controls. * Alt-K displays landmarks. * Alt-M displays place markers. * Alt-S activates the list of items. * Alt-P sorts the list in alphabetic order. * Alt-W sorts the list in web page order. * Alt-A will activate the link currently highlighted and close the dialog. * Alt-F will move the Browse Mode cursor to the link, frame, table, heading, list, anchor, form, control, or landmark in the web page and close the dialog. Return to Previous Position If you are on a page that you have previously visited, pressing the Return to Previous Position hot key, which is Insert-R by default, will move your Browse Mode cursor to the line you were on when you last left the page. If you are on a page which you have not previously visited or the page has changed since you last left it, Window-Eyes will say "no previous position," and your Browse Mode cursor will not move. Auto Load By default, Window-Eyes will automatically load Browse Mode whenever a new page is loaded. Browse Mode will automatically be turned on even if you have Browse Mode off when a new page loads. If, however, you want Browse Mode to not load automatically when a new page loads, you can press the Auto Load hot key while in Browse Mode, which is Insert-A by default, to turn this feature on or off. If you want to use Browse Mode when this option is off, you will have to load it manually with the Browse Mode hot key. Obtaining Web Page Details with Speak Summary Pressing the Speak Summary hot key, which is Control-Shift-S by default, will cause Window-Eyes to report all of the various new page information options regardless of whether or not they are enabled (and assuming that they exist on the page). Searching for Text Press the Mouse Find hot key, which is Control-Shift-F, if you want to search for items on the current web page. Note that while Browse Mode is on, Window-Eyes will look for the text you specify inside the Browse Mode buffer. If it is off, Window-Eyes will instead look for the text inside the active mouse boundary. Press the Continue Mouse Search hot key, which is Insert-F by default, to continue the search in the same direction you specified earlier. The search will continue from your current position. Move to Any Line Pressing the Any Line hot key, which is Control-Shift-L by default, will cause Window-Eyes to ask you for the number of the line to which you wish to move. Simply type in the line number and press Enter. If the line number is valid, Window-Eyes will move the Browse Mode cursor to that line and read it. If the line number is not valid, your cursor will not move. Reloading Browse Mode Pressing the Screen Redraw hot key, which is Insert-Backslash by default, will cause Window-Eyes to reload the Browse Mode buffer. If Window-Eyes does not load the entire web page for some reason, or if the web page somehow changes, this hot key will synchronize the Browse Mode buffer with the web page again. Adjusting Browse Mode Verbosity Not only does Window-Eyes allow you to navigate between Browse Mode elements, but you can also adjust how they are announced, or indeed if Window-Eyes should alert you to the presence of the elements at all. You can additionally tell Window-Eyes what information to read when pages load, whether or not it should alert you to popup windows, and much more. To set these values, press Insert-V while in a web page to open the Browse Mode verbosity area of the Window-Eyes control panel. If you press this key while you are focused on a specific element, such as a button or link, then the verbosity option related to that element will automatically gain focus. Note that "Show Advanced Options" must be enabled under the Window-Eyes Help menu before you can adjust any verbosity options. Document Specific Settings Window-Eyes supports the ability to save settings for specific documents using a feature called Document Specific Settings. Place markers saved while in Browse Mode can be imported and exported using this feature. Being able to import and export place markers enables you to easily share any customizations you have made for web sites with other Window-Eyes users. The Document Specific Settings option can be accessed from the General/Document Specific Settings area of the Window-Eyes control panel. Note that "Show Advanced Options" must be enabled under the Window-Eyes Help menu before you will be able to access this feature. Working with Microsoft Word This section of the user's guide describes how Window-Eyes interacts with Microsoft Word. It does not give instructions for using Word itself. For more information on how to operate Word, consult GW Micro for a dedicated tutorial, or look at Microsoft's Office website at http://office.microsoft.com/ for more information. Word Check List Versions Before we begin discussing the tremendous features that Window-Eyes brings to Microsoft Word, it is important that we take a few minutes and talk about what version of Word you need to be running to ensure that you have the best possible experience. To start, you will need to have either Microsoft Office 2000, Microsoft Office XP (sometimes known as Office 2002), Microsoft Office 2003, Microsoft Office 2007, or Microsoft Office 2010. Any version of Office prior to Office 2000 will not support the latest Window-Eyes Office features. Although Window-Eyes will support Word 2000 and Word 2002, we recommend using at least Word 2003 or greater as these versions contain more support for accessibility than previous versions. Service Packs and Updates Once you have a supported version of Word installed, you will need to make sure that you have all available service packs and updates installed and functioning properly. To make sure that you are running the latest updates available, please visit http://office.microsoft.com. Select the "Check for Updates" link for additional information. Security Warning When using the default Word security and add-in settings, Window-Eyes will be able to enable its Microsoft Word support automatically; No user interaction should be required. If, however, you have modified any of the Microsoft Word security or add-in settings, you may be prompted with a security warning when running Word. If you are presented with the security warning dialog referencing GW Micro, Inc. and the Window-Eyes Add-In (WEOffice.dll), simply Tab to the "Always trust macros from this publisher" check box, and press the Space Bar to check it. Then, Tab to the "Enable Macros" button, and press Enter. If you have enabled the "Always trust macros from this publisher" option, you may verify that the Window-Eyes Office features are installed by doing the following For Word 2003 and earlier: 1. In Word, press Alt-T for Tools. 2. Press O for Options. 3. Press Shift-Tab to access the tab controls. 4. Press S until you hear Security. 5. Press Alt-S for Macro Security. 6. Press Right Arrow to the Trusted Publishers control tab. 7. Tab once to the list of Trusted Publishers.. 8. Press G to select GW Micro, Inc. . For Word 2007 and 2010: 1. In Word, press Alt-T, O to open the Word Options dialog. 2. Press T until you hear "Trust Center." 3. Press Alt-T to open the Trust Center Settings dialog. 4. Press T until you hear "Trusted Publishers." 5. Tab once to the list of Trusted Publishers.. 6. Press G to select GW Micro, Inc. . If you have the "trust all installed add-ins and templates" option enabled, Window-Eyes office support will be enabled, but GW Micro will not be listed in the trusted publisher list. If GW Micro, Inc. is not listed as one of your trusted publishers, please review your security settings to make sure that you are not specifically blocking Microsoft Word add-ins. Columns Columns are most popular in newspaper and magazine articles, as well as multi-page layouts. They consist of narrow sections of text placed horizontally across the page. Window-Eyes will restrict reading to the current column, rather than letting text from each column bleed through on a single line when using either the standard arrow keys or the Window-Eyes column navigation hot keys. Use the following hot keys to navigate through columns: * Line Next: Alt-Period * Line Prior: Alt-Comma The difference between using the previous and next line commands versus the arrow keys is that the former allows you to continuously read through a section of text that is divided into multiple columns. If you attempt to move to the previous or next column strictly with the arrow keys, Word will actually move you out of the columns altogether and place your cursor in the section immediately before or after the columns. Fields Fields are textual placeholders used for automatic generation of a specific type of element or page property. They include Author, Date, Time, Page, Hyperlinks, Table of Contents, Index, File Name, File Size, Ask, AutoText, Mail Merge, Expressions, and custom designed fields. Headers, Footers, and Page Numbers Headers and footers provide page information outside the boundary of the main document. Headers appear at the top of a page, and footers appear at the bottom of a page. Headers and footers often include items such as page numbers, chapter titles, dates, and author names. Window-Eyes can indicate headers and footers when arrowing through the pages of a document, as well as when arrowing through the header/footer items while in Header and Footer edit mode (available by pressing Alt-V, H). Window-Eyes will also indicate the page numbering scheme while editing headers and footers. For example, if a document is set up with page numbers alternating on odd and even pages, Window-Eyes will indicate whether you are editing an odd or even header or footer. Pictures and Objects Inline pictures and objects are elements that are positioned directly in the text of a document. Non-inline (or floating) pictures and objects are elements that have a fixed position regardless of the surrounding text or other elements. References References encompass three items: comments, endnotes, and footnotes. Comments are notes or annotations that are added to a document. The comments are usually displayed in balloon windows in the margin of the document area. Footnotes and endnotes are used to provide additional information (for example, further explanation, comments, or references) for specific text in a document. Footnotes and endnotes consist of a reference mark (usually a number or character) in the document text, and the corresponding text in the footnote/endnote area. Footnotes are kept at the end of a page while endnotes are kept at the end of a document. Revisions Revisions, also called markup or "Track Changes," contain changes such as insertions, deletions, and formatting alterations that have been applied to an original document. Use the following commands to navigate among revisions: * Revision Next: Alt-Right Bracket * Revision Prior: Alt Left-Bracket Sections Sections are portions of a document which contain specific formatting options that differ from the rest of the document. For example, a document may begin with text in two columns, and end with text in three columns. Each group of columns would be considered a section. Spelling and Grammar With the Word "Check Spelling as You Type" and "Check Grammar as You Type" options enabled, Word will automatically indicate when spelling or grammar errors occur by placing a red line underneath a spelling error or a green line under a grammar error. When a spelling or grammar error is encountered, pressing Shift-F10 will bring up a context menu with several options for the current error. If automatic spelling and grammar checking are not necessary, these options can be disabled to increase overall performance. Spelling and grammar checking can always be performed manually by pressing F7. If either of the check as you type options are disabled, the corresponding functionality in Window-Eyes will no longer be available. Use the following commands to move between spelling and grammar errors: * Next Spelling/Grammar Error: Alt-Apostrophe * Previous Spelling/Grammar Error: Alt-Semicolon Tables Tables are made up of rows and columns of cells that can be filled with text or other elements (such as pictures or objects). Tables are most often used to organize information, and they are displayed much like a spreadsheet. Window-Eyes will announce uniform tables by indicating the table number, the number of rows, and the number of columns (i.e. "Table 1 10 Rows 5 Columns"). Tables, however, can be designed in a non-uniform way by merging cells. In a non-uniform table, reading keys may not work as expected, and navigation may be confusing. Window-Eyes will indicate whether a table contains non-uniform rows or non-uniform columns by announcing, "Non-Uniform Rows" when non-uniform rows exist, and "Non-Uniform Columns" when non-uniform columns exist (i.e. "Table 1 non-uniform Rows non-uniform Columns"). If a table contains both uniform and non-uniform rows and columns, Window-Eyes will indicate the combination (i.e. "Table 1 5 rows non-uniform Columns"). Use the following keys to navigate through a table: * * Cell Right: Insert-Right-Arrow * Cell Left: Insert-Left-Arrow * Cell Up: Insert-Up-Arrow * Cell Down: Insert-Down-Arrow * To First Cell of Row: Control-Insert-Left-Arrow * To Last Cell of Row: Control-Insert-Right-Arrow * To First Cell of Column: Control-Insert-Up-Arrow * To Last Cell of Column: Control-Insert-Down-Arrow * To Top Left Cell: Insert-Home * To Bottom Right Cell: Insert-End * Read Current Row: Shift-Insert-Down-Arrow * Read from Start of Row: Shift-Insert-Left-Arrow * Read to End of Row: Shift-Insert-Right-Arrow * Read First Row Cell: Shift-Insert-Up-Arrow * Read Entire Column: Alt-Insert-Down-Arrow * Read From Start of Column: Alt-Insert-Left-Arrow * Read to End of Column: Alt-Insert-Right-Arrow * Read First Column Cell: Alt-Insert-Up-Arrow * Read Current Cell: Insert-Numpad-Enter Forms Microsoft Word forms can contain three types of controls: check boxes, edit boxes, and combo boxes. Use the following commands to read the relevant information as you work with forms: * Field Name: Control-Shift-N * Field Data: Control-Shift-D * Speak Summary: Control-Shift-S Protected Sections When a form is protected, the controls in the form can obtain focus from either Tab/Shift-Tab, or the Up/Down Arrow keys. When a control is encountered, Window-Eyes will read the associated status text as the field name for the control. If status text does not exist for the control, Window-Eyes will then read the associated help text as the field name for the control. If neither status nor help text exist for the control, Window-Eyes will attempt to determine what text (either on the screen or via the Word Document Object Model) should be associated with the control. The first two methods are options that the form designer can control, and Window-Eyes will read the correct field names 100% of the time. The third option exists if a form designer did not label controls, but it will not always be 100% accurate. Window-Eyes does, however, have one additional method that will ensure all form controls will read 100% of the time, regardless of how the form was designed. When using the Window-Eyes Field Label hot key, which is Control-Insert-F by default, manual field labels can be applied to any Word form control. This manual method overrides any of the previous methods. The manual field labels are stored on a per document basis. Details regarding the Document Specific Settings feature of Window-Eyes are discussed below. In order to navigate through the text of a protected document, document protection will need to be disabled. You can disable document protection by selecting the Unprotect Document option under the Tools menu in Microsoft Word. If you are prompted for a password to unprotect the document, you may need to contact the document's author for additional assistance. Once the document is unprotected, you will be able to move through it using any of the available navigation keys. To interact with form controls, you will need to re-enable document protection by selecting the Protect Document option under the Tools menu in Microsoft Word. The Element Properties Dialog To display additional information about the properties of the current element, use the Element Properties hot key, which is Insert-E by default. The Element Properties dialog can contain the following information. * Font size (10 point, 14 point, etc.) * Text color (red, green, shade of blue, etc.) * Text attributes (bold, italic, double underline, etc.) * Font name (Verdana, Arial, etc.) * Style (Normal, Heading 2, etc.) * Line spacing (Single, Double, At Least, Exactly, etc.) * Justification (Left, Right, Center, Full) * Borders (Box, Shadow, 3-D, etc.) * Shading (Teal, Orange, Sky Blue, etc.) * Text (Orientation of the text is vertical) The Page Navigation Dialog The Page Navigation dialog, which is available via Insert-Tab, provides the ability to quickly navigate through or review the components of a document. If the current document contains a large number of pages and/or elements, Window-Eyes will announce "Building element list. Please wait," after 5 seconds of processing (all processing for this dialog will stop after 10 seconds). Once complete, the title bar of the dialog will contain the number of selected elements. To switch between the various element groups use the available radio buttons or associated accelerators (listed below). To focus the currently selected item and/or move the cursor to that item, select the Focus Item button, press Alt-I, or simply press Enter. * Comments: Alt-M ? Lists all comments contained in the current document. * Hyperlinks: Alt-H ? Lists all hyperlinks contained in the current document. * Bookmarks: Alt-B ? Lists all bookmarks contained in the current document. * Footnotes: Alt-F ? Lists all footnotes contained in the current document. * Endnotes: Alt-E ? Lists all endnotes contained in the current document. * Objects: Alt-J ? Lists all objects contained in the current document. If Window-Eyes detects that an object is an inline object, the word "inline" will appear in parentheses at the end of the list item. If the word "inline" does not appear on an object list item, then that object is not inline, but rather floating. If the object being focused is a text box or text frame, Window-Eyes will place the cursor on the first line of text in the object, otherwise, the object itself will be selected. * Revisions: Alt-R ? Lists all revisions contained in the current document. * Form Fields: Alt-O ? Lists all form fields (limited to check boxes, edit boxes, and combo boxes) contained in the current document. * Spelling Errors: Alt-L ? Lists all spelling errors contained in the current document. If the title bar of the Page Navigation dialog contains the phrase "near cursor" the spelling error list has been restricted to a specific region in order to maintain responsive performance. Although the tracking of spelling errors is 100% accurate, the number of spelling errors may change (when the element list is restricted) with each press of Insert-Tab depending on the location of the cursor. * Grammatical Errors: Alt-G ? Lists all grammatical errors contained in the current document. If the title bar of the Page Navigation dialog contains the phrase "near cursor" the grammar error list has been restricted to a specific region in order to maintain responsive performance. Although the tracking of grammar errors is 100% accurate, the number of grammar errors may change (when the element list is restricted) with each press of Insert-Tab depending on the location of the cursor. Speak Summary Enhancements The Speak Summary hot key, which is reached by Control-Shift-S by default, has been enhanced to provide detailed information about the current document. The first press will read the current page number, any footer or header for the current page, column info, view mode (i.e. Print, Normal, Outline, etc.), and the document name. The second press will read the element counts for all elements found in the Page Navigation dialog except for spelling and grammar errors. Cursor Position Information When using the Cursor Position hot key, which is reached with Control-Numpad-Plus by default, Window-Eyes will speak the position in 1/100th of whatever unit Word has been configured to use. For example, if Word has been configured for inches, the Cursor Position hot key might read, "1.83 inches from left, 3.55 inches from top, page 8." If Word has been configured to use millimeters, the Cursor Position hot key might say, "135.50 millimeters from left, 97.22 millimeters from top, page 10." Format Alert When the Format Alert option, which is available in the Screen/Other section of the Window-Eyes control panel or by pressing Insert-5, is enabled, Window-Eyes will automatically indicate offsets from the left margin of the current section. Along with indicating if two or more spaces exist on a line, Window-Eyes will also alert you to tab spacing. For example, if a line contains, "This space is space a space space test," Window-Eyes would announce, "This is a two spaces test." If a line contains, "This tab is space space a tab test," Window-Eyes would announce, "This tab is 2 spaces a tab test." Attribute Changes When the Attribute Changes option, which is available in the Screen/Other section of the Window-Eyes control panel or by pressing WINDOWS-A, is enabled, Window-Eyes will automatically indicate font, size, color and style attribute changes. Word Navigation limitations Although there are several methods to maneuver through a document, some elements can provide challenges when it comes to their navigation. All of the following caveats are due to limitations in Microsoft Word. * Columns- When reaching the end of a column, an additional press of the down arrow will move the cursor to whatever element is beneath the column, rather than directly to the next column. * Tables ? When reading the end of a last row in a table (the bottom right of the table, in other words), an additional press of the Tab key will automatically insert a new row. * Double Page view ? When reaching the end of the left page, an additional press of the down arrow will move the cursor to whatever is beneath the left page, rather than directly to the page on the right. * Objects ? Most objects are not inline and cannot be selected by using the arrow keys (except for some objects that contain text). The only way to select them is by using the mouse pointer. * Next/Prior Line hot keys? Window-Eyes provides a navigation method that will work around the limitations listed above. The Next/Prior Line hot keys will always move to the next line in the layout of the document. Although the Next/Prior Line hot keys tend to be more accurate, they do require more work to be done, and may not be as responsive as the standard up and down arrow keys. If a situation arises where navigation is not working as expected, however, the Next/Prior Line hot keys should be used. Note that Read to End uses the Next/Prior Line hot keys automatically. Adjusting Word Verbosity Not only does Window-Eyes alert you to many Microsoft Word elements, but you can also adjust how they are announced, or indeed if Window-Eyes should alert you to the presence of the elements at all. You can additionally tell Window-Eyes what information to read when new documents load, whether or not certain elements should be ignored during a Read-To-End, and much more. To set these values, press Insert-V while in a document to open the Word verbosity settings group within the Window-Eyes control panel. Note that "Show Advanced Options" must be enabled under the Window-Eyes Help menu before you can adjust any verbosity options. Document Specific Settings Window-Eyes supports the ability to save settings for specific documents using a feature called Document Specific Settings. When you open a document in Word that has specific document settings saved, those settings take effect immediately for that particular document. Currently, only field names and enhanced word support options can be saved per document. Additional settings will be able to be saved per document in future versions of Window-Eyes. The Document Specific Settings options can be accessed from the General section of the Window-Eyes control panel. Note that "Show Advanced Options" must be enabled under the Window-Eyes Help menu before you will be able to access this feature. Word Navigation Mode You can enable a special mode that allows you to move between specific elements similar to the manner in which Browse Mode operates. To turn this mode on and off, press insert-Z. While the mode is active, you can use the following hot keys to jump to the element that interests you: * Next Grammatical Error : A * Previous Grammatical Error : Shift-A * Next Bookmark : B * Previous Bookmark : Shift-B * Next Endnote : D * Previous Endnote : Shift-D * Next Form Field : F * Previous Form Field : Shift-F * Next Edit Box : E * Previous Edit Box : Shift-E * Next Graphic : G * Previous Graphic : Shift-G * Next Heading : H * Previous Heading : Shift-H * Next Specific Heading Levels 1 - 9 : Numbers 1 - 9 * Previous Specific Heading levels 1 - 9 : Shift- 1 - 9 * Next Misspelled Word : M * Previous Misspelled Word : Shift-M * Next Comment : N * Previous Comment : Shift-N * Next Footnote : O * Previous Footnote : Shift-O * Next Paragraph : P * Previous Paragraph : Shift-P * Next Revision : R * Previous Revision : Shift-R * Next Section : S * Previous Section : Shift-S * Next Table : T * Previous Table : Shift-T * Next Word in Word Index List : W * Previous Word in Word Index List : Shift-W * Move Forward Out of a Table or List : Greater-than * Move Backward Out of a Table or List : Less-than * Next Page : Space Bar * Previous Page : Shift-Space Bar Disabling Enhanced Word Support If you encounter a document that does not read correctly with Window-Eyes enhanced Word support, you have the option to revert back to the older method of accessing the document. To turn this feature on or off, open the Verbosity/Office/Word/Miscellaneous area of the Window-Eyes control panel. This is a per document setting, and will not be stored in any set file. If you have a document that you think is not reading correctly, you should first contact support to verify that the document is causing problems. If you find that the document is at fault, you can turn the Window-Eyes enhanced Word support off for that specific document. Working with Microsoft Excel This section of the user's guide describes how Window-Eyes interacts with Microsoft Excel. It does not give instructions for using Excel itself. For more information on how to operate Excel, consult GW Micro for a dedicated tutorial, or look at Microsoft's Office website at http://office.microsoft.com/ for more information. Excel Check List Versions Before we begin discussing the tremendous features that Window-Eyes brings to Microsoft Excel, it is important that we take a few minutes and talk about what version of Excel you need to be running to ensure that you have the best possible experience. To start, you will need to have either Microsoft Office 2000, Microsoft Office XP (sometimes known as Office 2002), Microsoft Office 2003, Microsoft Office 2007, or Microsoft Office 2010. Although Window-Eyes will support Excel 2000 and Excel 2002, we recommend using Excel 2003, Excel 2007, or Excel 2010 as these versions contain more support for accessibility than any previous version. Service Packs and Updates Once you have a supported version of Excel installed, you will need to make sure that you have all available service packs and updates installed and functioning properly. To make sure that you are running the latest updates available, please visit http://office.microsoft.com. Select the "Check for Updates" link for additional information. Security Warning When using the default Excel security and add-in settings, Window-Eyes will be able to implement all of the new Microsoft Excel features automatically; No user interaction should be required. If, however, you have modified any of the Microsoft Excel security or add-in settings, you may be prompted with a security warning when running Excel. If you are presented with the security warning dialog referencing GW Micro, Inc. and the Window-Eyes Add-In (WEOffice.dll), simply Tab to the "Always trust macros from this publisher" check box, and press the Space Bar to check it. Than Tab to the "Enable Macros" button, and press Enter. If you have enabled the "Always trust macros from this publisher" option, you may verify that the Window-Eyes Office features are installed by doing the following For Excel 2003: 1. In Excel, press Alt-T for Tools. 2. Press O for Options. 3. Press S until you hear Security. 4. Press Alt-S for Macro Security. 5. Press Right Arrow to the Trusted Publishers control tab. 6. Tab once to the list of Trusted Publishers.. 7. Press G to select GW Micro, Inc. For Excel 2007 and 2010: 1. In Excel, press Alt-T, O to open the Excel Options dialog. 2. Press T until you hear "Trust Center." 3. Press Alt-T to open the Trust Center Settings dialog. 4. Press T until you hear "Trusted Publishers." 5. Tab once to the list of Trusted Publishers.. 6. Press G to select GW Micro, Inc. . If you have the "trust all installed add-ins and templates" option enabled, Window-Eyes office support will be enabled, but GW Micro will not be listed in the trusted publisher list. If GW Micro, Inc. is not listed as one of your trusted publishers, please review your security settings to make sure that you are not specifically blocking Microsoft Excel add-ins. Cells Cells are the individual elements that make up Excel worksheets, and they contain data (such as names, numbers, dates, formulas, etc.). Cells are combined to make up worksheets, and worksheets are combined to make up workbooks. The most common method of navigating between cells in a worksheet is by using the dedicated arrow keys. * Right Arrow - Move forward one cell * Left Arrow - Move backward one cell * Up Arrow - Move up one cell * Down Arrow - Move down one cell * Tab - Move forward one cell * Shift-Tab - Move backward one cell * Enter - Move down one cell * Shift-Enter - Move up one cell When you navigate through cells in Excel, either with the dedicated arrow keys, with Tab and Shift-Tab, or with Enter and Shift-Enter, you may hear a lot of information (depending on the format and contents of the cell to which you have navigated, as well as cell data, cell position, and possibly additional information). If a cell contains data, by default, Window-Eyes will read it as you move from one cell to another. If a cell does not contain data, Window-Eyes will not read anything for the contents. You can, however, use the Blank Lines option from the Screen/Other section of the Window-Eyes control panel to have Window-Eyes say ?blank? when it encounters a cell with no data. Cell-Related Hot Keys The following hot keys are available to you when working with cells: * Alt-Shift-C = Read Comment ? This hot key will read the comment for the active cell. * Alt-Shift-F = Read Formula ? When pressed once, this hot key will read the formula for the active cell. When pressed twice, this hot key will spell the formula for the active cell. * Alt-Shift-P = Previous Cell ? This hot key will move focus back to the cell that was active before the current cell became active. * F2 ? This is an Excel hot key that allows you to edit the current cell. When pressed, Window-Eyes will speak "edit mode." Press Escape to get out of edit mode and cancel any changes. Press Enter to get out of edit mode and accept any changes. You will also hear Window-Eyes say ?edit mode? if you start typing data into a cell. * Insert-Numpad-Plus = Mouse To Focus ? When pressed, Window-Eyes will route the mouse to the center of the active cell or selected object. * Control-Shift-N = Field Name ? When pressed, Window-Eyes will read the position of the active cell. If a defined header is found, only the defined header will be read. If there is no defined header, the cell position will be read. The second press of this hot key will always read the cell position, along with any defined header. * Control-Shift-D = Field Data ? When pressed, Window-Eyes will read the data of the active cell. The second press will spell the contents. The third press will spell the contents phonetically. * Control Page-Up and Control Page-Down ? Excel hot keys that move backward and forward through the worksheets of the current workbook. By default, the new worksheet name will be read, followed by the active cell. * Control-Shift-S = Speak Summary ? When pressed once, Window-Eyes will speak the cell information using the current verbosity options. When pressed a second time, Speak Summary will speak cell information forcing all verbosity options on for the current worksheet (note that only those elements that exist will be spoken). If a header has been defined for the active cell, speak summary will read the header. If there is no header and the position verbosity check box is checked, then the current cell position will be read. Note that the cell contents will always be read. You can choose to hear info relative to the worksheet or workbook via the verbosity option. * Control-Shift-M = Highlighted Block ? When pressed, Window-Eyes will speak the range of cells that are selected, as well as which cell is currently active. For example, if cells A5 through H11 are selected, and A5 is the active cell, Window-Eyes will say, "Selected A5 to H11, active cell A5." The second press will provide more information about the selection. In the same example above you would hear, ?Selected A5 to H11, A5 blah, H5 blah, A11 blah, H11 blah 7 rows 8 columns, active cell A5,? where ?blah? is the cell?s contents. Note that if a cell is blank, then the cell is not read on the second press. Also, if a defined header is set up for any of the cells being read, the header will be spoken. Charts and Objects Microsoft Excel can use charts to display data (such as comparisons, patterns, and trends) using a visual representation. Window-Eyes provides you with access to all of the chart types that Excel provides, including: * Area Chart (6 variations) * Surface Chart (4 variations) * Bar Chart (6 variations) * Radar Chart (3 variations) * Column Chart (7 variations) * Bubble Chart (2 variations) * Line Chart (7 variations) * (XY) Scatter Chart (5 variations) * Pie Chart (6 variations) * Doughnut Chart (2 variations) * Cylinder (7 variations) * Cone (7 variations) * Pyramid (7 variations) * Stock Chart (4 variations) Objects are multimedia elements (such as images, programs, video clips, other documents, etc.) that can be inserted into a worksheet and are positioned directly over its cells. You can use the Page Navigation dialog reached with Insert-Tab to either review a list of all available charts and objects, or you can use it to focus a specific item. This dialog is discussed in more detail later in this section. When you focus any chart, you can use Excel to navigate its elements by using the Up and Down Arrows to move by major groups, and the left and Right Arrow keys to move within a group. Window-Eyes will automatically read the information as you navigate. You may also obtain much more information about the current chart element by using the Element Properties dialog, which is reached with Insert-E by default. This dialog will provide information relative to the focused element on the chart. If the main chart itself (the chart area) is selected, all information about the chart will be provided. Headers and Totals Often, when using Excel, you will want to know what the row header or column header is for the current cell. For example, if you are using a weekly schedule worksheet, row headers would likely indicate times of the day, and column headers would likely indicate days of the week; this information would be crucial to making sure tasks and appointments are entered in the correct day and time cell. The Headers and Totals dialog, reached with Alt-Shift-H by default, allows you to define which columns and rows should be used for header cells, along with which columns and rows should be used for total cells. Header cells are used to announce the name of a column or row automatically. Total cells are very similar to header cells, but are read manually with a key press. You can even use header and total cells that exist in another worksheet for reading in your current worksheet. You can also set up header and total cells to read for a specific region, the entire worksheet, or even for multiple customized areas. As you Tab through the Headers and Totals dialog, you will discover the following controls: * Header or Total Name Edit Box ? Allows you to enter a description for the currently defined item. This name is only for documentation purposes, and has no impact on the functionality of the item being defined. For example, you might enter the name "headers for yearly sales." This name is useful for determining the function of each header/total definition for the current worksheet. * Region To Use List Box ? Allows you to set the area to be used for your headers and totals definitions. This list box will always start with "current region." Regions are automatically defined by Excel based on blank rows and columns. The region that you were in when you entered the dialog would be used if you select "current region." The next item in the Region To Use list box is "full worksheet." The full worksheet option means that your entire worksheet will be used. Any named regions that exist in the current worksheet will also be listed in the regions list box. Named areas are defined by selecting a group of cells followed by Control-F3 to open the name definition dialog. You can then specify a name for the current selection of cells. When you select a named region, that defined region will be used. The last item in the Region To Use list box will always be "custom." The custom item allows you to manually define an area to be used for headers and/or totals. * Row Header Radio Button (Default: Checked) ? With this option enabled, the defined columns(s) will be used as row headers for the specified region. * Column Header Radio Button (Default: Unchecked) ? With this option enabled, the defined rows(s) will be used as column headers for the specified region. * Row and Column Header Radio Button (Default: Unchecked) ? With this option enabled, the defined row(s) and column(s) will be used as column headers and row headers for the specified region. * Row Total Radio Button (Default: Unchecked) ? With this option enabled, the defined row(s) will be used as column totals for the specified region. * Column Total Radio Button (Default: Unchecked) ? With this option enabled, the defined column(s) will be used as row totals for the specified region. * Row and Column Total Radio Button (Default: Unchecked) ? With this option enabled, the defined row(s) and column(s) will be used as column totals and row totals for the specified region. * Always Read Header (Default: Unchecked) ? When a column header is defined, the header will only be read when navigating horizontally through the specified region. When a row header is defined, the header will only be read when navigating vertically through the specified region. With this option enabled, Window-Eyes will always read the defined header, regardless of how you move through the specified region. Note this option will be disabled if you have not selected a region type of header. * Region Cells Edit Box ? Allows you to define a range of cells for the custom item in the Region To Use list box. If any other region is selected in the Region To Use list box, the range of cells used in that selected region will be displayed in this edit box, and the edit box will be read only. This item can be used in place of setting up a named region in Excel. An Excel named region, however, should be used over a Window-Eyes custom region if the region itself will be changing in size. A Window-Eyes custom region is fixed to the defined size, while an Excel named region automatically adjusts as columns and rows are added or removed. * Add Entry Button ? Saves all current data to the list of Current Headers and Totals for the current worksheet. The dialog will remain open after selecting this button. * Remove Entry Button ? Removes the currently selected item in the Current Headers and Totals list box, and associated data, for the current worksheet. The dialog will remain open after selecting this button. * OK Button ? Automatically saves all current data to the list of Current Headers and Totals for the current worksheet, and closes the dialog. * Cancel Button ? Closes the dialog without saving the current entry. * Current Headers and Totals List Box ? Displays all areas that have been defined using the Headers and Totals dialog for the current worksheet in the current workbook. When the Headers and Totals dialog is accessed for the first time in a new worksheet, this list will be empty. Entries will be displayed using the text entered in the Header or Total Name edit box after an entry is added, and the defined region type will be added to the end of the name. When you select an item in the Current Headers and Totals list box, the data associated with that header or total will be displayed in the respective controls throughout the Headers and Totals dialog, allowing you to either review the settings or adjust them. If you adjust any settings, you will need to re-add the entry. Note that if you change the name of the Header or Total, and you add the entry, the previous entry will not be removed or replaced. The settings will only be updated if you leave the name the same as the previous entry, and then add the entry. * Rows and Columns To Use Edit Box ? Displays the row(s) and/or column(s) that you plan on using as the header or total for the currently selected region in the Region To Use list box. The information in this edit box will default to being the active cell or the selected cells. You can manually change this to use discontinuous rows for headers or totals. For example, you may want to use row 3, then row 5, then row 10 as header information for the currently selected region. You can also specify rows or columns in a different worksheet if desired. * Use Selected Cells Button ? Allows you to reset the Rows and Columns To Use edit box to the active cell or the selected cells. * Alt-Shift-T = Read Total Cell ? This hot key will automatically read the total cell defined in the Headers and Totals dialog. If a total cell is not defined, Window-Eyes will look for all dependent cells of the active cell that have a formula starting with ?=SUM?, and will read them automatically. Monitor Cells Excel spreadsheets have the potential to be quite large. Because of this fact, Window-Eyes can tell you when the information in a cell, or group of cells, changes. You can either read the information manually, or you can have Window-Eyes read it to you automatically. You can even have Window-Eyes display a list of all of the cells you are monitoring, or you can use hot keys to view each one of them no matter where you are in your workbook. For example, if you are in worksheet 1, of a three worksheet workbook, and you have a cell that calculates the sum of several cells across all your worksheets, you would probably want to set up a monitor cell so that you could manually read the total or have Window-Eyes read it when it changed. Press Alt-Shift-M to open the Monitor Cells dialog. This dialog contains the following controls: * Name Edit Box ? Allows you to enter a description of the monitor cells group you are about to define. This name is only for documentation purposes, and has no impact on the functionality of the item being defined. The name can also be spoken when the monitor cell is spoken, and will also be displayed in the Monitor Names list box when the "Any monitor cell" hot key is pressed. * Cells To Monitor Edit Box ? Displays cells to be monitored, and defaults to being either the active cell or range of currently selected cells. You may also enter monitor cells manually, using a single cell position, a collection of cells separated by a comma, or a range of cells separated by a colon. You can also supply the worksheet name. Note that it is important to make sure all punctuation is correct when entering cell collections or cell ranges. If you do not specify the worksheet name, the current worksheet will be used. * Hot Key Combo Box ? Allows you to select an ID (ranging from 1 to 10) to apply to the current group of monitor cells. The ID is only used when you press the associated Monitor Cell hot key (Monitor Cell 1 through Monitor Cell 10, discussed below). If you do not wish to read the defined monitor cells using any of the 10 read monitor cells hot keys, meaning you set it up to read automatically or you will use the any monitor cell hot key, then you can set this to none. Doing so will cause Window-Eyes not to attach this monitor cell to any of the 10 read monitor cell hot keys. * Name Check Box (Default: Unchecked) ? With this option enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the name supplied in the Name edit box before speaking the monitor cell data. * Row Header Check Box (Default: Unchecked) ? With this option enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the row header (if defined) before speaking the monitor cell data. * Column Header Check Box (Default: Unchecked) ? With this option enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the column header (if defined) before speaking the monitor cell data. * Position Check Box (Default: Checked) ? With this option enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the cell position before speaking the monitor cell data. * Auto Speak Check Box (Default: Unchecked) ? With this option enabled, Window-Eyes will automatically speak the monitor cell when its content changes. The monitor cell hot keys will always read regardless of whether or not this option is enabled. If the monitor cell group contains more than one cell, only the cell or cells that change will be read automatically within the group. * Get Dependent Cells From Edit Box ? Defaults to the active cell position or the selected cells. You can type any cell, collection, or range like the Cells To Monitor edit box. This control is useful for the following list box. * Dependencies For List Box ? Displays all cells that are dependencies for the cells listed in the Get Dependent Cells From edit box discussed above. For example, if you have a list of numbers from cell A1 to cell A10 and cell A11 is the sum of cell A1 through cell A10, and cell A5 was the active cell when accessing the monitor cell dialog, cell A5 will be in the Get Dependent Cells From edit box, and cell A11 will be in the Dependencies For list box. You can type any cell, collection, or range like the Cells To Monitor edit box. * Add Selected Dependencies Button ? Allows you to add the selected item in the Dependencies For list box to the Cells To Monitor edit box. If monitor cell information already exists in the Cells To Monitor edit box when pressing this button, the selected item in the Dependencies For list box will be appended to the text in the Cell To Monitor edit box. Note that this button will be disabled if you have not selected any items in the Dependencies list box. * Add Entry Button ? Saves all current data to the list of Monitor Names for the current worksheet. The dialog will remain open after selecting this button. * Remove Entry Button ? Removes the currently selected item in the Monitor Names list box, and associated data, for the current worksheet. The dialog will remain open after selecting this button. * OK Button ? Automatically saves all current data to the list of Monitor Names for the current worksheet, and closes the dialog. * Cancel Button ? Closes the dialog without saving the current entry. * Monitor Names List Box ? Lists all the names of the monitored groups currently defined, and allows you to arrow between them. As you move through them all the other controls will update to their settings. This can be used to review or update settings for existing groups. The Monitor Cells dialog allows you to easily set up a quick monitor cell by automatically setting the name to Quick # (where # is the first unused Read Monitor hot key). If there is no unused hot key, the name will be left blank), the Cells To Monitor will default to the active cell (or current selection), and only the position check box will be checked. This quick feature can be used if you are on a single cell or selection of cells that you wish to monitor. Simply bring up the Monitor Cells dialog, note the default name given, and press enter. The quick monitor group will be saved automatically. The name indicates the number of the Read Monitor Cell hot key to use. This feature provides you with a way to monitor a cell or group of cells quickly, without having to set up a number of options. Hot Keys The following hot keys can be used once you have told Window-Eyes which cells you want to monitor: * Alt-Shift-0 through Alt-Shift-9 = Monitor Cell 1 ? 10 ? Each of these 10 hot keys will read the monitor cell with the respective ID. In other words, Monitor Cell 1 will read the monitor cell whose ID is 1. Monitor Cell 2 will read the monitor cell whose ID is 2, and so on. Note that multiple monitor cells can be associated with the same ID. * Alt-Shift-A = Any Monitor Cell ? This hot key activates the Read Monitor Cell dialog, which allows you to select which monitor cell you want to read. The Element Properties Dialog To display additional information about the properties of the current element, use the Element Properties hot key, which is Insert-E by default. The Element Properties dialog can contain the following information. Textual Information: * Contents of the cell * Position of the cell * Font name (Verdana, Arial, etc.) * Font size (10 point, 14 point, etc.) * Text color (red, green, shade of blue, etc.) * Text attributes (bold, italic, double underline, etc.) * Horizontal alignment * Vertical alignment * Number format * Borders * Background color * Cell size * Any of the Cell Information verbosity options such as formula, comment, hyperlink, etc. Chart Information: * Area type (chart, point, legend, etc.) * Chart Title (Sales Performance Chart, My Bar Graph, etc.) * Chart Name (Bar Chart 10, August Pie Chart, etc.) * Chart Type (3D stacked bar, etc.) * Series Elements (Name, Point Count, Axis Group, Series Type, Values, etc.) * Axis Elements (Number, Title, Type, Group, Scale, etc.) * Advanced Information (chart size, obscured cells, border weight, fill type, etc.) * There are two sections of chart information, depending on whether the main chart area has been selected, or an individual chart element. The top part of the chart information relates to just the data of the chart. Further down, you'll find a separator that says, "Advanced Information:" which provides information about the data in the chart, as well as the visual features of the chart. Object Information: * Object Type (Picture, Ole Object, etc.) * Object Text (Bitmap Image, Wave Sound, etc.) The Page Navigation Dialog The Page Navigation dialog, which is reached with Insert-Tab by default, provides the ability to quickly navigate through or review the components of a worksheet or workbook in one comprehensive dialog. When accessed, the title bar of the dialog will contain the number of selected elements along with whether the elements are being examined in the current region, worksheet, or the entire workbook. To switch between the various element groups use the available radio buttons or associated accelerators (listed below). To focus the currently selected item and/or move the selection to that item, select the Focus Item button, press Alt-F, or simply press Enter. * Comments: Alt-C ? Lists all comments contained in the current worksheet or workbook. * Hyperlinks: Alt-H ? Lists all hyperlinks contained in the current worksheet or workbook. * Objects: Alt-J ? Lists all objects contained in the current worksheet or workbook. * Named Areas: Alt-A ? Lists all named areas contained in the current worksheet or workbook. * Cells in Column: Alt-E ? Lists all non-empty cells contained in the current column and their values, constrained either by the current region or worksheet. * Cells in Row: Alt-L ? Lists all non-empty cells contained in the current row and their values, constrained either by the current region or worksheet. * Page Breaks: Alt-P ? Lists individual pages and their corresponding cell ranges for either the current worksheet or workbook. * Monitor Cells: Alt-N ? Lists all monitor cells contained in the current worksheet or workbook. * Worksheets: Alt-O ? Lists all worksheets contained in the current workbook. * Charts: Alt-T ? Lists all charts contained in the current worksheet or workbook. The current specified area is the region that Window-Eyes will examine to find the items that you have selected. You can control the current specified area by pressing Alt-R for region, Alt-W for Worksheet (the default), or Alt-K for Workbook. When you select a specified area, all items (such as comments, hyperlinks, objects, etc.) will be relative to the specified area. Note that certain element types are not available for certain areas. For example, Cells in Column is not available for the entire workbook. You can also access an edit box containing Miscellaneous Information regarding the currently selected element by either tabbing to the Miscellaneous Information edit box or by pressing Alt-I. For example with comments you get the following in the edit box: size, whether the comment is visible or hidden, what cells it obscures when it is visible and if that region is covering any non-blank cells, the cell's contents, and the full comment. With hyperlinks you get the URL. With objects, you get what cells it obscures and whether there are any non-blank cells under that. With monitor cells, you get all the individual cells for that named group along with their data. Charts also give you what cells they cover. The Focus Item button will give the selected element focus or make that element active. For example, if you select a comment and activate the Focus Item button, the cell containing that comment will become the active cell. The Selected Item button is similar to the Focus Item button in that it will give the selected element focus or make that element active. In addition, it will also select all the other cells. For example, if you select Cells in column and have selected a cell from this group, pressing the Focus Item button will cause the selected cell to become the active cell. If you press the Select Item button, the selected cell will become the active cell, and all the other cells in the column will be selected. Note that the Selected Item button is not available for all element types. Adjusting Excel Verbosity Not only does Window-Eyes alert you to many Microsoft Excel elements, but you can also adjust how they are announced, or indeed if Window-Eyes should alert you to the presence of the elements at all. To set these values, press Insert-V while in a document to open the Excel verbosity area of the Window-Eyes control panel. Note that "Show Advanced Options" must be enabled under the Window-Eyes Help menu before you can adjust any verbosity options. Document Specific Settings Window-Eyes supports the ability to save settings for specific documents using a feature called Document Specific Settings. When you open a document in Excel that has specific document settings saved, such as headers and totals or monitor cells preferences, those settings take effect immediately for that particular document. The Document Specific Settings area can be accessed from the General/Document Specific Settings area of the Window-Eyes control panel. Note that "Show Advanced Options" must be enabled under the Window-Eyes Help menu before you will be able to access this feature. Working with Microsoft PowerPoint Microsoft PowerPoint is a presentation software package, which provides visual information through the use of slide shows to enhance oral presentations such as training sessions, classroom lectures, and business seminars. PowerPoint slides contain combinations of text, images, and multimedia effects and are often displayed by connecting a computer to a projection system so the presentation can be visible to a large number of people. PowerPoint presentations can also be distributed electronically and accessed much like other Microsoft Office documents. Window-Eyes supports PowerPoint 2000 and up. General Navigation When you initially launch PowerPoint, you will commonly be presented with four different panes: the Slide pane, Task pane, Notes pane, and Thumbnails pane. The Slide pane is where you can edit the contents of a given slide. Pressing the Tab key will move you between the slide objects, and Window-Eyes will announce the object type (such as "title place holder"), the text content (if any content exists), and object details (such as size, placement, etc.) ? object details are controlled by verbosity options which are discussed below). You can press Enter to edit the selected object. After you are done editing an object, you can press Escape to exit the edit mode and re-select the object. The contents of the Task pane will depend on the situation, and may contain one of several topics, including Getting Started, Help, Search Results, Clip Art, Research, Clipboard, New Presentation, Template Help, Shared Workspace, Document Updates, Slide Layout, Slide Design, Slide Design-color schemes, Slide Design-Animation Schemes, Custom Animation, and Slide Transition. The Notes pane allows you to enter notes regarding the selected slide. Unlike the slide contents, notes are not visible to the audience during a slide show presentation. The Thumbnails pane can be used to navigate through the individual slides of a presentation. The F6 key is used to cycle between all open panes. The Page Navigation Dialog The Page Navigation dialog, which is reached with Insert-Tab by default, provides the ability to quickly navigate through or review the components for the selected area. You can select hyperlinks, objects, comments, or slides for the entire presentation, or hyperlinks, objects, and comments for a selected slide. Selecting the Focus Item button will automatically focus a selected item (hyperlink, object, comment, or slide), making navigation through presentations quick and easy. Use the following hot keys to quickly select the type of PowerPoint element you want to view: * Hyperlinks: Alt-H ? Lists all hyperlinks contained in the specified area. * Objects: Alt-J ? Lists all objects contained in the specified area. * Comments: Alt-M ? Lists all comments contained in the specified area. * Slides: Alt-D ? Lists all slides in the current presentation. * Entire Presentation ? Sets the specified area to the entire presentation. * Selected Slides ? Sets the specified area to the selected slide. PowerPoint Tables All of the table hot keys that exist for Microsoft Word function the same in Microsoft PowerPoint, including Cell Right, Cell Left, Cell Up, Cell Down, To First Cell of Row, To Last Cell of Row, To First Cell of Column, To Last Cell of Column, To Top Left Cell, To Bottom Right Cell, Row, From Row Start, Row To End, First Row Cell, Column, From Column Start, Column To End, First Column Cell, and current Cell. The table hot keys will only work while you are editing a cell?s contents in the slide pane within a true table. Refer to the "Tables" portion of the "Working with Microsoft Word" section for more information. The Element Properties Dialog If no object is selected in the Slide pane when you open the Element Properties Dialog with Insert-E, Window-Eyes will display all information about the slide. When an object is selected, the information presented in the Element Properties dialog will be relative to the selected object. Playback/Slide-Show PowerPoint presentations are displayed using a feature called Slide Show, wherein the slides are displayed full screen with no other portion of the Windows desktop visible. In Slide Show mode, Window-Eyes will present each slide in the Browse Mode buffer. Basic navigation keys such as arrow keys, page up/down, home, etc. can be used to navigate the information in the slide. You can also press the letter I to move to the next list item, and H to access any slide notes. Pressing the space bar will cause the presentation to move forward one slide. Pressing backspace will cause the presentation to move backward one slide. When a new slide is displayed, Window-Eyes will refresh the Browse mode buffer with the new slide information. Window-Eyes can also announce diagrams (and sub objects of diagrams) and animations within a slide. If a slide contains animated content, Window-Eyes will announce the number of effects when the slide loads, and additionally indicate the effect at the beginning of the line containing the animation by announcing, ?E X on/off/other,? where E stands for Effect, X is the number of the effect on the slide, and on/off/other indicates the behavior of the animation (on means that the effect will add information to the slide, off means the effect will remove information from the slide, and other means the effect will animate without adding or removing information from the slide). Pressing the space bar will run the animations in the order they are listed on the slide without affecting Browse mode. Window-Eyes gives you the power to review slide animations before they happen, giving you total control over your presentation, and providing you with accurate information, especially in cases where animations do not run top to bottom. Adjusting PowerPoint Verbosity Not only does Window-Eyes alert you to many Microsoft PowerPoint elements, but you can also adjust how they are announced, or indeed if Window-Eyes should alert you to the presence of the elements at all. To set these values, press Insert-V while in a document to open the PowerPoint verbosity area of the Window-Eyes control panel. Note that "Show Advanced Options" must be enabled under the Window-Eyes Help menu before you can adjust any verbosity options. Working with Microsoft Outlook, Outlook Express, Windows Mail, and Windows Live Mail Microsoft Outlook is a comprehensive personal information manager which provides access to email, calendar, address books, and much more. The Window-Eyes Outlook Calendar support gives you complete access to all your calendar needs. Outlook Express (also known as Windows Mail) is a popular email application which is often installed with the Windows operating system. Note that Windows 7 does not include either Outlook Express or Windows Mail. However, most new computers include Windows Live Mail, which serves the same function as Outlook Express and Windows Mail. The Microsoft Outlook Calendar Window-Eyes boasts a revolutionary new way to access the Calendar feature of Microsoft Outlook. Rather than attempting to retrofit the existing, inaccessible Outlook Calendar interface, Window-Eyes provides all appointments and dates in a concise and simple to use Window-Eyes Outlook Calendar dialog. The Window-Eyes Outlook Calendar supports both local and remote calendars (such as those used with Exchange servers), and can be accessed from anywhere (assuming that Outlook is running). Press Insert-C to invoke the Window-Eyes Outlook Calendar dialog. The Window-Eyes Outlook Calendar will stay open until you close it. This way, you can Alt-Tab between the Window-Eyes Outlook Calendar dialog and other open applications. Window-Eyes Outlook Calendar supports Microsoft Outlook 2000 and greater. We recommend Outlook 2003, Outlook 2007, or Outlook 2010 for the best in Outlook Calendar accessibility. The Window-Eyes Outlook Calendar dialog consists of the following controls: * P = Appointments - List View: This list view contains day (i.e. Monday), date (i.e. 6/11/2011), Start Time (i.e. 12:00pm), Subject (i.e. Lunch with Bill), and location. The Appointments list view is populated based on the selected Time span (see below). * L = Details - Read Only Edit Box: This read only edit box contains all of the available information about the appointment selected in the Appointments list view. If no appointment is selected, the details read only edit box will be disabled. * Timespan - Group Box: The Timespan group box contains the following controls: * o D = Day - Radio Button: The day radio button populates the Appointments list view with all appointments for the selected day. By default, day starts with today?s date. o K = Work Week - Radio Button: The work week radio button populates the Appointments list view with all appointments for the selected work week. Work Week includes the days defined in the Outlook Calendar options, as well as which day the work week begins. By default, work week contains Monday through Friday, and begins with the Monday prior to today?s date. o W = Week - Radio Button: The week radio button populates the Appointments list view with all appointments for the selected week. Week includes all seven days of the week. By default, week starts with the Sunday prior to today?s date (or with the beginning week day you selected in Outlook options). o M = Month - Radio Button: The month radio button populates the Appointments list view with all appointments for the selected month. o Y = Year - Radio Button: The year radio button populates the Appointments list view with all appointments for the selected year. o S = Custom - Radio Button: The custom radio button populates the Appointments list view with all appointments between the user defined start and end dates, specified in the Start Date and End Date edit boxes. * Custom Range - Group Box: The Custom Range group box contains the following controls if the Custom timespan is selected: * o Start - Edit Box: The Start Date edit box allows you to enter the beginning date for the custom date range. If you enter a start date without specifying an end date, then only the date entered in the start date edit box will be displayed. You can enter the date in just about any format you want using numbers. o End - Edit Box: The End Date edit box allows you to enter the ending date for the custom date range. * Display - Group Box: The Display group box contains the following controls: * o A = Show Appointments - Check Box: The Show Appointments check box causes all appointments for the selected timespan to be displayed in the Appointments list view. o T = Show Available Times - Check Box: The Show Available Times check box causes available time periods (specified in the Outlook Calendar options) for the selected timespan to be displayed in the Appointments list view. o C = Compact - Check Box: The Compact check box causes all items pertaining to a specific day in the Appointments list view to be collapsed into a single entry. * V = Previous - Button: The Previous button causes the Appointments list view to populate with the previous unit of the selected timespan. * R = Current - Button: The Current button causes the Appointments list view to populate with the current unit of the selected timespan. * X = Next - Button: The Next button causes the Appointments list view to populate with the next unit of the selected timespan. * N = New - Button: The New button causes Outlook to open a New Appointment dialog for the day selected in the Appointments list view. If the Day timespan is selected, pressing the New button will cause the New Appointment dialog to open for the selected day. If any timespan other than Day is selected, and an appointment is selected in the Appointments list view, pressing the New button will cause the New Appointment dialog to open for the selected day, with the start time set to 8:00am. If any timespan other than Day is selected, and no appointment is selected in the Appointments list view, pressing the New button will cause the New Appointment dialog to open for the current day, with the start time set to the specified Outlook day start time (by default, 8:00am). In addition to the date information, if a unit of available time is selected in the Appointment list view, pressing the New button will cause the New Appointment dialog to set the start time to the corresponding available time. * O = Open - Button: The Open button causes Outlook to open the Appointment dialog for the appointment selected in the Appointments list view. * E = Delete - Button: The Delete button causes Outlook to delete the selected appointment in the Appointments list view. You may also press the Delete key to cause Outlook to delete the selected appointment. A confirmation dialog will be presented in both cases. * Close - Button: The Close button closes the Window-Eyes Outlook Calendar dialog. You can also close the dialog using the standard methods of pressing Escape, or Alt-F4. If you open a recurring appointment using the Window-Eyes Outlook Calendar dialog, you will be asked if you would like to open the entire series. If you say yes, you will be able to edit the properties to affect all associated appointments. If you say no, you will be able to edit the properties to affect only the selected appointment. If you delete a recurring appointment using the Window-Eyes Outlook Calendar dialog, you will be asked if you would like to delete the entire series. If you say yes, you will delete all appointments in the series. If you say no, you will delete only the selected appointment. This feature is only available in Outlook 2003 and up. If you close Outlook with the Window-Eyes Outlook Calendar dialog open, the dialog will close automatically. When the Window-Eyes Outlook Calendar dialog closes, all settings used in the dialog will be retained and used the next time the dialog is opened. The Window-Eyes Outlook Calendar supports multiple calendars. You can choose which calendars to use in the Calendar section of Microsoft Outlook. For example, to access the list of available calendars in Microsoft Outlook 2003, do the following: 1. Press Control-2 to open the Microsoft Outlook calendar view. 2. Press F6 to focus the list of available calendars. 3. Press the Up or Down arrow to maneuver through the list of available calendars. 4. Press the Space bar to check or uncheck the selected calendar. When new calendars are selected, the Window-Eyes Outlook Calendar dialog will automatically refresh to include the new information. Working with Email Window-Eyes offers easy and intuitive access to Microsoft Outlook, Outlook Express, Windows Mail, and Windows Live email information. When you are viewing a message, access to status information such as From, Date, To, CC, BCC, Subject, and Attachment fields is available via the following hot keys: * Alt-1: From * Alt-2: Date/Sent * Alt-3: To * Alt-4: CC * Alt-5: BCC * Alt-6: Subject * Alt-7: Attachments * Alt-8: Status The first press of any of the previous keys will cause the information to be read. If the field does not exist, Window-Eyes will announce the field type followed by, ?Not found.? You can press any of the previous keys a second time to move focus to the appropriate field so that you can interact with the control, assuming that it can be manipulated with the keyboard. Navigating Email Headers Both Outlook and Outlook Express will often reformat text in the To, From, CC, and BCC fields once focus has moved away from the control or once auto-complete engages, making it difficult to review email addresses. When using the arrow keys to move through text objects in these fields, Window-Eyes will automatically read all the text in the object next to the cursor. Window-Eyes also gives you the power to read these text objects by pressing the Word hot key, which is Control-Numpad-Right Arrow by default. Pressing the Word hot key twice will spell the text. Pressing the Word hot key a third time will spell the text phonetically. You can use the Character hot key, which is Control-Numpad-Left Arrow by default, in the same manner as the Word hot key. Accessing Attachments Thanks to the Window-Eyes Attachment hot key, accessing the attachments list in Microsoft's email programs is quick and easy. Outlook Express, Windows Mail, and Windows Live Mail Once you have focus in the attachment list (by pressing Alt-7 twice), you can select an attachment and press Enter to open it, or you can press Shift-F10 to bring up a context menu of additional options (including opening, printing, and saving). Outlook After pressing Alt-7 twice to access the attachment list, you will need to arrow left and right to hear the attachment filenames. When you press the arrow keys, the highlight indicating which attachment is selected will move from name to name instead of reading letter by letter as one might expect. Once you have selected the attachment of interest, press Shift-F10 (or the context menu key) to bring up the attachment context menu, where you can choose the action you want to perform on the attachment (open, save, print, etc.) Additional Outlook Features Window-Eyes includes an app called Outlook Enhance which enables you to further customize how Window-Eyes speaks email headers, review and edit contact information, a customized method for accessing email attachments, and more. For more details regarding these features, see the "Outlook Enhance" section discussed later in this guide. Additional Thunderbird Features Window-Eyes includes an app called TB Enhance which enables you to review column header information with the Alt-1 through Alt-7 keys, access the Thunderbird account options menu, hear when an email address is being autocompleted, and more. For more details regarding these features, see the "TB Enhance" section discussed later in this guide. Remote Access Window-Eyes works with many popular remote access solutions, including Citrix Xenworks, Microsoft Remote Desktop, and Microsoft Remote Assistance, at no additional charge. Furthermore, a Window-Eyes user can connect to the computer of a fellow Window-Eyes customer to provide remote assistance or troubleshoot his or her computer. As these remote access solutions are regularly updated, the steps required to configure Window-Eyes to work with them may change over time. Therefore, consult KB 1042 in the GW Micro Knowledge Base at http://www.gwmicro.com/kb/ for the most up-to-date instructions regarding third-party remote access. The remainder of this section describes Window-Eyes' own remote assistance feature. Window-Eyes Remote Assistance Window-Eyes includes the ability to allow two parties to work with each other's computers remotely over the internet. To do this, one user must ask for help, and the other must offer it. Window-Eyes includes two choices under the "Remote Assistance" section of its Help menu (discussed next) that enable this type of remote collaboration. Note that the versions of Window-Eyes used during a remote assistance session must be 7.5.2 or newer. Older versions of Window-Eyes can connect with their equal versions, but not with later versions. Asking for Help When you select Ask for Help from the Remote Assistance Help menu pulldown, you will be presented with a dialog containing the following controls: * S = Send Help Request - When you are ready to have someone connect to your computer, select this button. You will be presented with a dialog containing an 8-digit password which you will need to provide to the person connecting to your machine. Once a successful connection is made, you will be prompted to allow the person connecting to control your desktop. * A = Alternate Help Request - If you are unable to connect using the standard help request method mentioned previously, select this button to receive your connection password. Provide this password to the person connecting to your machine, and when they tell you to, select the connect button. * L = Local Network - By default, Window-Eyes Remote Assistance will connect using your external, public IP address. If you are using Window-Eyes Remote Assistance on a local network, or intranet, you will need to check this check box prior to selecting either of the Help Request buttons to ensure that your private IP is used instead of your public IP. If both machines are using Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows 8 and they are running Window-Eyes 8.0 or newer, you do not need to worry about this option as Window-Eyes will automatically select the correct network type for you. If either machine is using Windows XP or is running a version of Window-Eyes less than 8.0, you will need to manually select the correct network type. * E = Use Legacy Helper - If you are using Windows Vista or Windows 7, this checkbox will be available which allows you to select either the older (legacy) remote assistance client or the modern helper. The legacy version is included to allow you to connect to a helper who might be running Windows XP and/or Window-Eyes 7.5.2, 7.5.3, 7.5.4, or 7.5.4.1. The modern implementation acts just like the legacy client but takes advantage of features available under Windows Vista and newer to provide new features and significant performance improvements. It however, is only functional on Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows 8 and can connect only to other Window-Eyes 8.0 users. Take note, too, that due to restrictions in Windows 8, there is presently no way to establish a remote assistance session with a Windows XP user. If this sounds confusing, just keep in mind that the modern client will not work under Windows XP, and Windows XP and Windows 8 remote assistance connections are not possible. In addition, Window-Eyes will automatically choose the appropriate version of remote assistance based on the versions of Windows on both ends of the connection. For instance, if you are running Windows 7 and help someone on Windows XP, the legacy client will be used. Or, if you help someone on Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows 8, the modern client will be used instead. * Cancel - Selecting this button closes the Ask for Help dialog. Offering Help When you select Offer Help from the Remote Assistance Help menu pulldown, you will be presented with a dialog containing an edit box for your name along with another edit box for a password. The name you enter will be presented to the person to whom you are providing assistance when a connection is made to his or her machine. The password you enter must be the same 8-digit password given to you by the person requesting assistance. The Connection After a password has been generated, shared, and a successful connection has been made, the connecting session will expand full screen, and all keystrokes issued from the machine providing help will be sent through the remote assistance session to the machine requiring help. You can press Control-Alt-Break at any time to restore the connection to a normal sized window; this allows the person providing assistance to get back to his or her own system without terminating the connection. Control-Alt-Break can be pressed any time the connection dialog is active to toggle between full screen and a normal size window. Regardless of whether the connection window is full screen, or normal sized, if it has activation, keystrokes will be sent to the remote side. You can alt-tab to a local window, such as the local disconnect dialog, to have access to your local resources. The connection will terminate when either party closes the connection dialog box (by selecting the Disconnect button, for example) or when one of the machines loses internet connectivity. It is also important to note that the person at the computer receiving help will not be logged out of his or her Windows session, and he or she will still be able to control the machine. Even so, take care to only allow connections from those you trust. Copying Text to the Clipboard When using the modern Remote Assistance client, it is possible to copy and paste text to and from the clipboard of the person receiving help. To do this, simply use the cut, copy and paste commands that you already know. If, for example, you copy something to the clipboard from within the Remote Assistance client, you then press Control-Alt-Break to restore the connection to windowed mode, and you paste the text into another application, the content you copied from the other person's computer will appear. Conversely, if you copy something from Notepad on your machine, you re-enable full-screen mode within the Remote Assistance client, and paste the clipboard's contents, the text from your computer will appear on the other machine. Remember that clipboard sharing is possible only if both computers are running the modern Remote Assistance client. Sending and Receiving Files If the modern Remote Assistance client is running, it is possible to transfer files between the connected machines. To transfer a file from the machine receiving help to the helper, bring up the Remote Assistance window, open the "Send File" option from the File menu, select the file to be downloaded, and click the "Open" button. Similarly, to send a file from the helper's machine to the person receiving help, bring up the Remote Assistance window, open the Helper menu and select "Send File." As above, select the file to upload click "Open." At this point, a dialog will open on the receiver's machine asking if he wants to accept the transfer and, if so, where to save the file. Once the transfer is accepted, dialogs will appear on each machine displaying the transfer's progress. You will be told when the transfer completes, and the dialogs will close. Since all file transfers are handled on the machine receiving help, simply use its client to initiate transfers in either direction. You do not need to exit the session to transfer files. Note that only one file can be transferred at a time. Smart Sizing If the modern client is in use and the person offering help is sighted, the smart sizing option may prove useful if the person receiving help has more than one monitor connected to his computer. To activate this mode, first bring up the Remote Assistance window, and click the "Smart Sizing" option under the Helper menu. When active, this mode will allow the person providing assistance to view the entire contents of the remote computer's desktop. When smart sizing is disabled, only the contents of the primary monitor will be visible. This feature will only benefit sighted users; it will not impact the performance of remote assistance in any other way. A Note about Routers A secure router will, by default, block all incoming connections, including those from Window-Eyes Remote Assistance. If your machine resides behind a router, and you are capable of administering your router's interface, you can port forward TCP traffic on the three ports that Window-Eyes uses (46825, 46826, and 46827) to create a successful Remote Assistance connection. If you are unable to configure your router, you may want to use the Alternate Help Request discussed previously. Doing so will place the responsibility of port configuration on the person from whom you are requesting assistance. A Note about Firewalls Like routers, a good firewall will also, by default, block all incoming connections that are not recognized or that have not been explicitly allowed. Be aware that you may need to configure your firewall (or even your anti-virus software) to allow the Window-Eyes Remote Assistance process appropriate internet/intranet access. The Window-Eyes Remote Assistance process is called gwassist.exe, and is located in the Window-Eyes program directory. Additional Features Provided by Window-Eyes Apps Window-Eyes is a feature-rich screen reader that can perform many tasks to make access to your computer quick and efficient. Window-Eyes also boasts a robust and powerful environment to run customized programs called apps. Unlike traditional Windows programs, Window-Eyes apps are written to work in conjunction with Window-Eyes itself. Apps can improve access to one of your programs, add new features to Window-Eyes, or do virtually anything else. Your copy of Window-Eyes includes several apps written by GW Micro that do both, and each one is briefly described below. Our App Central website includes hundreds of additional apps that expand Window-Eyes into an entirely new realm of usefulness. If you are interested in a new Window-Eyes feature or require specialized access to a program or service, there is a good chance that a Window-Eyes app developer has already written, or can write, something that will meet your needs. The App Get feature, which is described below, will allow you to search for and download apps directly from within Window-Eyes. For more information on managing apps and keeping your installed apps up to date, see the related section in the Window-Eyes user interface reference. App Get App Get allows you to browse for, and install, any Window-Eyes app available from the GW Micro App Central website (www.gwmicro.com/app_central). You can open App Get from anywhere by pressing Windows-G. All apps are listed in a tree view, organized by category. When you select an app in the tree view, you can then tab to a description of the app (which also includes the author, release date, last update date, rating, short description, and list of recent changes), as well as any comments that registered App Central users have provided. To Install an App, press Alt-I, or select the Install button. To visit the app's page on App Central, press Alt-W, or select the Website button. You can reload the list of available apps at any time using F5, Alt-R, or by selecting the Refresh Apps button. You can also use the View menu to show all apps, only those apps you have already installed, apps that you do not have installed, or outdated apps. You can use the sort menu to sort the apps in their respective categories alphabetically, by the date the apps were added to the App Central website, by the date the apps were last updated, or by the apps' ratings. To learn more about App Get, see its page on App Central at www.gwmicro.com/apps/App_Get . Auto Complete AutoComplete provides announcement of inline autocompleted text and suggestion list items in supported combo edit boxes, such as those in the Start Menu's Run dialog, standard file save and open dialogs, and many other areas. The auto complete text updates as you type, and you can arrow through each suggestion to have Windows automatically write the text for you. For example, if you start typing in a combo edit box that supports auto completion, Window-Eyes will read the first item being suggested followed by the number of available choices, such as, "C, 79 suggestions." You can either keep typing at this point or arrow to the suggestion you want. Keep doing this until you have finished entering text. You can adjust how Auto Complete reads by opening the Auto Complete options dialog from the Window-Eyes "Apps" menu. To disable the speaking of inline autocompleted text, select the "Do Not Speak" radio button. To speak only the text that autocompleted, select the "Speak Completed Text" radio button. To speak the entire line (i.e. what has been typed plus the text that autocompleted), select the "Speak Entire Line" radio button. To hear an index of the number of suggestions provided in the suggestion popup list, check the "Speak Suggestion Index" check box. To hear the first item in the suggestion list spoken, check the "Speak First Suggestion" check box." If toggling the "Enable Inline Autocomplete" check box does not work, you can always verify this setting manually by toggling the "Use inline AutoComplete" check box under the Advanced tab of the Internet Options control panel. Note that the suggestion popup list does not have anything selected by default. To select the first item (the same item spoken if the "Speak First Suggestion" option is enabled), press the Down Arrow. More information regarding Auto Complete is available at www.gwmicro.com/apps/autocomplete . Duxbury This app provides enhancements to various portions of the Duxbury/DBT program, including the following: * Maximizes both main and child windows automatically. * Reads styles and codes when navigating through both translated and untranslated text. * Reads literal text when navigating by line through translated text. * Reads correct translations when navigating by character and word in translated text. * Reads misspelled words automatically in the spell checker. * Provides a hot key (Insert-R) to re-read misspelled words in the spell checker. For more details or to download the Duxbury app, visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/Duxbury . Eloquence Fix If you use the Eloquence or IBM ViaVoice synthesizers, this app safeguards them against certain text that can cause them to become unstable. Despite these known instabilities, the owners of Eloquence, which is a newer version of ViaVoice, do not plan to develop the synthesizer beyond the version that ships with your copy of Window-Eyes. We therefore wrote the Eloquence Fix app to address these shortcomings. We strongly recommend that you keep this app installed and up-to-date. It is set to automatically check for updates when you start Window-Eyes. Note that if you use a synthesizer other than Eloquence, this app will remain dormant; there is no need to remove it. More information regarding Eloquence Fix is available at www.gwmicro.com/apps/Eloquence_Fix . GW Toolkit The GW Toolkit is a collection of shared objects that many app developers use to give their apps features such as hot key registration, update checking, and much more. This app does nothing on its own, but nearly every other app you install, including the others that ship with Window-Eyes, require it to work properly. The GW Toolkit can be downloaded from www.gwmicro.com/apps/GW_Toolkit . Hotspot Hotspot allows you to create custom commands (including moving the mouse, searching for text, speaking a string, executing hot keys, and more) for a specific window or a specific type of window. Hotspot provides two main hot keys for creating and accessing Hotspots: * Hotspot Manager - Control-Alt-Shift-P - Displays a dialog containing all defined Hotspots. Using this dialog, Hotspots can be performed, removed, edited, imported, and exported. * Add Hotspot - Control-Alt-P - Displays the Add Hotspot dialog for defining a Hotspot and its actions. This tool is very flexible and powerful. Refer to the Hotspot readme found under the Aps menu in the Window-Eyes control panel for full details on its use. The Hot Spot app, including its documentation, is available from www.gwmicro.com/apps/hotspot . IE Enhance This app provides enhancements to Internet Explorer, including: * Automatic announcement of the Internet Explorer 9 Notification bar (re-read with Insert-N). It also improves the reading of tabs as you switch among them in IE8 and IE 9. Control-Q can also be used to display a list box of open tabs, and you can open the desired tab by choosing its option in the list box. If you are visiting www.audible.com , you can press Control-Insert-A to cause Window-Eyes to load a list of the samples that are present, arrow to them, and play them. You can also select text and preserve its formatting. To do this, first locate the section of the web page you want to select in Browse Mode and press Control-Shift-C. Next, move to the end of the desired area and press Control-Shift-C a second time. A dialog will then open asking you whether you want to copy only text or also text with images. Once you have made your choice, the selection will be copied to the Windows clipboard. More information is available at www.gwmicro.com/apps/IE_Enhance . Insert Key Layout The Insert key layout provides a familiar set of keyboard commands for persons accustomed to hot keys found in other adaptive products. While its purpose is to help minimize the learning curve to Window-Eyes newcomers, anyone is welcome to run it if they prefer an alternative command structure. One of the app's strengths is the ability to use a single set of commands to move both the keyboard focus and/or mouse pointer. When focus mode is active, then the main Arrow keys as well as those on your numeric keypad will move the keyboard focus. Similarly, the same navigation commands will move the mouse or WE cursor when either is active. You can set whether the app is enabled as well as specify which set of commands to use by opening the Window-Eyes control panel, navigating to the Apps menu, opening the Insert Key Layout pull-down, and adjusting the appropriate options. The following list comprises the commands defined by the Insert Key Layout. Desktop Commands Key to Press Action Numpad-Plus Activate focus cursor Numpad-Dash Activate Mouse Cursor. Press twice to activate the WE cursor. Insert-Numpad-Dash Route mouse to focus Insert-Numpad-Plus Route focus to mouse Alt-Numpad-Delete or Alt-Delete Speaks the active cursor mode Alt-Shift-Numpad-Up Arrow or Alt-Shift-Up Arrow Move mouse up Alt-Shift-Numpad-Down Arrow or Alt-Shift-Down Arrow Move mouse down Alt-Shift-Numpad-Left Arrow or Alt-Shift-Left Arrow Move mouse left. Alt-Shift-Numpad-Right Arrow or Alt-Shift-Right Arrow Move mouse right Numpad-Slash Left mouse click Numpad-Star Right mouse click Insert-Numpad-Slash Lock/unlock the left mouse button Insert-Numpad-Star Lock/unlock the right mouse button Numpad-Left Arrow or Left Arrow Prior character Numpad-Center Current character. Press twice quickly to hear its phonetic. Numpad-Right Arrow or Right Arrow Next character Insert-Numpad-Left Arrow or Insert-Left Arrow Prior word Insert-Numpad-Center Current word. Press twice quickly to spell. Insert-Numpad-Right Arrow or Insert-Right Arrow Next word. Numpad-Up Arrow or Up Arrow Prior line. Insert-Numpad-Up Arrow or Insert-Up Arrow Current line. Press twice quickly to spell. Numpad-Down Arrow or Down Arrow Next line. Alt-Numpad-Up Arrow or Alt-Up Arrow Prior sentence. This does not work in Browse Mode. Alt-Numpad-Center Current sentence. This does not work in Browse Mode. Alt-Numpad-Down Arrow or Alt-Down Arrow Next sentence. This does not work in Browse Mode. Control-Numpad-Up Arrow or Control-Up Arrow Prior paragraph. This does not work in Browse Mode. Control-Numpad-Center Current paragraph. This does not work in Browse Mode. Control-Numpad-Down Arrow or Control-Down Arrow Next paragraph. This does not work in Browse Mode. Insert-Numpad-Home or Insert-Home Say from beginning of line to cursor. Press twice to spell. Insert-Numpad-Page Up or Insert-Page Up Say from cursor to end of line. Press twice quickly to spell. Insert-Numpad-Down Arrow or Insert-Down Arrow Read to End. Insert-5 Say color under the cursor. Press twice quickly to hear the color's RGB value. Insert-F Say font under the cursor (if available). Press twice quickly to cause it to appear in a dialog. Insert-F12 Say time. Press twice quickly to hear the date. Insert-T Say window title. Insert-Numpad-End or Insert-End Say top line of window. Insert-Numpad-Page Down or Insert-Page Down Say bottom line of window. Insert-Shift-Numpad-Down Arrow or Insert-Shift-Down Arrow Speaks the highlighted block of text. Press twice quickly to have the block spelled. Insert-F11 Open the system tray dialog. Insert-F10 Opens the window selection dialog. Insert-E Speaks the default button in a dialog. Insert-B Speaks the contents of the active window. Shift-Insert-B Announces battery status. Insert-Tab Speaks the window prompt. Control-Insert-Tab Opens the Window-Eyes field label dialog. Insert-C Speaks the word in context if you are inside the Word, Excel, Powerpoint, or Outlook spell checkers. Insert-F1 Open context-sensitive help for the focused control. Insert-F4 Closes Window-Eyes. Alt-Control-Page Down Decrease voice rate. Alt-Control-Page Up Increase voice rate. Insert-Escape Refreshes the screen. Insert-3 Bypass key. Insert-J or Insert-W Open the WE control panel. Insert-F Mouse find. Opens the Browse Mode find dialog when Browse Mode is active. Insert-F3 Continue mouse search. Continues the Browse Mode search if Browse Mode is active. Control-Insert-V Speaks the version number of the active application. Insert-R Cycles through available mouse boundary restrictions. Control-Insert-Numpad-Dash Toggle the track mouse with focus setting. Control-Insert-Numpad-Slash Drag and Drop. Control-Shift-Insert-C Speak mouse pointer description. Shift-Numpad-Center Speak the shortcut key of the focused control. Insert-Q Speak the name of the active Set file. Insert-S Toggles the speak all setting. Control-Insert-C Activates the Window-Eyes Outlook Calendar dialog if Outlook is running. Shift-Insert-C Causes Window-Eyes to detect the cursor inside the active window. Insert-D Opens the Window-Eyes dictionaries window. Control-Insert-1 through Control-Insert-0 Speaks the listview column headers 1 through 10 respectively. Note: the LVNav app must be installed. Alt-Insert-W Opens the virtual view window. Note: the Virtual View app must be installed. Control-Shift-S Opens the Page Navigation dialog when inside Microsoft Word, Excel, or PowerPoint. Control-Alt-0 Enables or disables the Insert Key Layout.. This is configurable via the "Hot key Manager" button. Laptop Commands Key to Press Action Capslock-Semicolon Activate focus cursor. Capslock-P Activate Mouse Cursor. Press twice to activate the WE cursor. Capslock-Left Bracket Route mouse to focus. Capslock-Apostrophe Route focus to mouse. Alt-Delete Speaks the active cursor mode. Alt-Shift-Up Arrow Move mouse up. Alt-Shift-Down Arrow Move mouse down. Alt-Shift-Left Arrow Move mouse left. Alt-Shift-Right Arrow Move mouse right. Capslock-8 Left mouse click. Capslock-9 Right mouse click. Control-Windows-8 Lock/unlock the left mouse button. Control-Windows-9 Lock/unlock the right mouse button. Capslock-M or Left Arrow Prior character. Capslock-Comma Current character. Press twice quickly to hear its phonetic. Capslock-Period or Right Arrow Next character. Capslock-J or Capslock-Left Arrow Prior word. Capslock-K Current word. Press twice quickly to spell. Capslock-L or Capslock-Right Arrow Next word. Capslock-U or Up Arrow Prior line. Capslock-I Current line. Press twice quickly to spell. Capslock-O or Down Arrow Next line. Capslock-Y or Alt-Up Arrow Prior sentence. This does not work in Browse Mode. Capslock-H Current sentence. This does not work in Browse Mode. Capslock-N or Alt-Down Arrow Next sentence. This does not work in Browse Mode. Control-Capslock-U or Control-Up Arrow Prior paragraph. This does not work in Browse Mode. Control-Capslock-I Current paragraph. This does not work in Browse Mode. Control-Capslock-O or Control-Down Arrow Next paragraph. This does not work in Browse Mode. Shift-Capslock-J or Capslock-Home Say from beginning of line to cursor. Press twice to spell. Shift-Capslock-L or Capslock-Page Up Say from cursor to end of line. Press twice quickly to spell. Capslock-A or Capslock-Down Arrow Read to End. Capslock-5 Say color under the cursor. Press twice quickly to hear the color's RGB value. Capslock-F Say font under the cursor (if available). Press twice quickly to cause it to appear in a dialog. Capslock-F12 Say time. Press twice quickly to hear the date. Capslock-T Say window title. Capslock-End Say top line of window. Capslock-Page Down Say bottom line of window. Capslock-Shift-Down Arrow Speaks the highlighted block of text. Press twice quickly to have the block spelled. Capslock-F11 Open the system tray dialog. Capslock-F10 Opens the window selection dialog. Capslock-E Speaks the default button in a dialog. Capslock-B Speaks the contents of the active window. Shift-Capslock-B Announces battery status. Capslock-Tab Speaks the window prompt. Control-Capslock-Tab Opens the Window-Eyes field label dialog. Capslock-C Speaks the word in context if you are inside the Word, Excel, Powerpoint, or Outlook spell checkers. Capslock-F1 Open context-sensitive help for the focused control. Capslock-F4 Closes Window-Eyes. Alt-Control-Page Down Decrease voice rate. Alt-Control-Page Up Increase voice rate. Capslock-Escape Refreshes the screen. Capslock-3 Bypass key. Capslock-W Open the WE control panel. Capslock-F Mouse find. Opens the Browse Mode find dialog when Browse Mode is active. Capslock-F3 Continue mouse search. Continues the Browse Mode search if Browse Mode is active. Control-Capslock-V Speaks the version number of the active application. Capslock-R Cycles through available mouse boundary restrictions. Control-Capslock-Dash Toggle the track mouse with focus setting. Control-Capslock-8 Drag and Drop. Control-Shift-Capslock-C Speak mouse pointer description. Shift-Capslock-Comma Speak the shortcut key of the focused control. Capslock-Q Speak the name of the active Set file. Capslock-S Toggles the speak all setting. Control-Capslock-C Activates the Window-Eyes Outlook Calendar dialog if Outlook is running. Shift-Capslock-C Causes Window-Eyes to detect the cursor inside the active window. Capslock-D Opens the Window-Eyes dictionaries window. Control-Capslock-1 through Control-Capslock-0 Speaks the listview column headers 1 through 10 respectively. Note: the LVNav app must be installed. Shift-Capslock-W Opens the virtual view window. Note: the Virtual View app must be installed. Control-Shift-S Opens the Page Navigation dialog when inside Microsoft Word, Excel, or PowerPoint. Control-Alt-0 Enables or disables the Insert Key Layout.. This is configurable via the "Hot key Manager" button. Browse Mode Commands Note: The following commands are implemented only for Internet Explorer. Key to Press Action Insert-Z or Capslock-Z Toggle Browse Mode. 1 Moves to the next heading level 1. Shift-1 Moves to the prior heading level 1. 2 Moves to the next heading level 2. Shift-2 Moves to the prior heading level 2. 3 Moves to the next heading level 3. Shift-3 Moves to the prior heading level 3. 4 Moves to the next heading level 4. Shift-4 Moves to the prior heading level 4. 5 Moves to the next heading level 5. Shift-5 Moves to the prior heading level 5. 6 Moves to the next heading level 6. Shift-6 Moves to the prior heading level 6. F Moves to the next form control. Shift-F Moves to the prior form control. B Moves to the next button. Shift-B Moves to the prior button. C Moves to the next combo box. Shift-C Moves to the prior combo box. E Moves to the next edit box. Shift-E Moves to the prior edit box. J Jump to specified line number. Shift-J Move to prior position. L Moves to the next list. Shift-L Moves to the prior list. N Moves to the next block of text. Shift-N Moves to the prior block of text. R Moves to the next radio button. Shift-R Moves to the prior radio button. X Moves to the next checkbox. Shift-X Moves to the prior checkbox. Insert-F6 or Insert-F7 Opens the page navigation dialog since Window-Eyes has no separate interface for links list, page elements, etc. Outlook Commands Key to Press Action Alt-M Opens the contact details window. Note: the Outlook Enhance app must be installed. Insert-A Open the attachments dialog when a message is open. Note: the Outlook Enhance app must be installed. For more information, visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/Insert_Key_Layout . iTunes The iTunes app adds a few minor enhancements to improve the performance of the iTunes program for managing iPods, iPhones, and similar devices from Apple. Along with improvements to focus changes as you move from pane to pane, the app frees the Control-Alt-Left Arrow and Control-Alt-Right Arrow hot keys to make it possible for you to move back and forth through music and video files when they are playing. For more information regarding this app, visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/itunes . JAWS Quick Key If you are familiar with, or are transitioning from, JAWS For Windows, this app will help you learn how to use Window-Eyes based on the concepts and keystrokes you already know. Press Insert-J to activate the JAWS Quick Key mode. While this mode is active, you can press a JAWS keystroke to hear its Window-Eyes equivalent. Please note that there may not be an exact match for every Jaws command. In addition, Window-Eyes presents some information differently than JAWS. Press the Escape key to exit this mode. For more information regarding this app, visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/JAWS_Quick_Key . LV Nav The lvnav app is designed to allow you to virtually navigate a list view, similar to how you would move through a spreadsheet. You can use the Insert-arrows to virtually move through the rows and columns in the list view. Insert-Home and Insert-End move to the beginning and end of a row while Control-Insert-Home and Control-Insert-End move to the top and bottom of a column. You can also use Alt-1 through Alt-0 to read columns 1 through 10. Press Insert-Enter to set your keyboard focus to the virtual item you are viewing. If you want to set focus to the virtual item and add it to the current selection use Control-Insert-Enter. You can use the LV Nav hot keys from within any list view. For more information, visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/lvnav . MS Access The MS Access app provides additional accessibility support to Microsoft Access. The app will do nothing if you either do not have Microsoft Access or if it is not running. For more information, visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/MS_Access . Office Enhance Office Enhance improves access to the Microsoft Office spell checker. When the spelling/grammar dialog is displayed, you will hear the error type, the error itself (spelling errors spelled out), the selected suggestion (if one is available -- spelling error suggestions are spelled out), and the context of the error. By default, the following hot keys are available to re-read the error information: * Alt-R - Reads the selected suggestion. A second press spells the suggestion phonetically if the error is spelling related. * Alt-W - Reads the error. A second press spells the error phonetically if the error is spelling related. * Alt-S - Reads the context of the error. For more information, please visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/Office_Enhance . Outlook Enhance The Outlook Enhance app provides several enhancements for Microsoft Outlook as described below. Mailbox Header Editor Beginning with Outlook 2010, the mailbox view (such as the inbox, task lists, contact lists, etc.) contains a very rich set of column names and item descriptions. For each column, Microsoft defined specific names for all of the potential states of a selected list item. In the inbox, for example, a column called icon contains (aptly enough) icons to visually represent the state of a message (read, unread, forwarded, replied to, etc.). While Microsoft is to be commended for going through each of these columns and items and giving them meaningful names, many tend to be more verbose than necessary (such as "message forwarded read" instead of just "forwarded"). The Outlook Enhance app provides an easy way to edit what you hear when a particular combination of column and list item is encountered. The Mailbox Header Editor dialog (Control-Alt-H by default - Outlook 2010 only) contains the following controls: * Columns (C) -- List Box -- Contains many of the available list view columns use to separate the information about a mailbox item (such as subject, from, date, etc.). * Values for (V) -- List Box -- Contains many of the possible values for the selected column (such as yes and no in the attachment column to indicate the presence or absence of an attachment). * Column Header Name (N) -- Combo Box -- Contains three choices: o Original - Speak the original name that Microsoft defined for the column header (such as "Icon" for the column that indicates the status of a message). o None - Do not speak anything for the column header name. o Custom - Speak a custom string instead of the original name (such as "Status" for the column that indicates the status of a message). * Column Value (V) -- Combo Box -- Contains three choices: o Original - Speak the original name that Microsoft defined for the list item value (such as "yes" for the "Attachment" column when the selected list item contains an attachment). o None - Do not speak anything as the value for the selected column when a list item is selected. o Custom - Speak a custom string instead of the original name (such as "attachment" for the "Attachment" column when the selected list item contains an attachment). * Save (S) -- Button -- Saves any changes made to the mailbox headers. * Cancel -- Button -- Closes the dialog without saving changes. Using Microsoft's definitions, when you select a message that you've forwarded to a friend or colleague, amongst other information you would hear, "Icon, Message Forwarded Read." To change that information to something more pleasant to hear, do the following: 1. From the columns list view, select the icon column. 2. From the values for list view, select "message forwarded read." 3. Tab to the column name combo box, and select none, meaning that no column name will be spoken for the "icon" column in the mailbox list view. 4. Tab again to the column value combo box, and select custom. 5. Tab once to the custom value edit box, and type in "forwarded." "Forwarded" is the value that you'll hear when you encounter a mailbox list item whose icon column status matches Microsoft's label of "message forwarded read." Now, when you select a message that you've forwarded to a friend or colleague, instead of hearing, "Icon, Message Forwarded Read," you'll instead hear, "Forwarded." GW Micro has taken the time to modify many of the default labels for both columns, and potential values. You can use the Mailbox Header Editor to further refine Outlook column information. If you decided that you did want to hear the Icon column name along with your own custom value, you could set it to original (and hear "Icon, forwarded"). Alternatively, you could set column name to to custom, and change the value to something like "status" to hear "status forwarded". If you wanted to hear, "ye old status, forward ho," every time you encountered a forwarded message, you could do it with the Mailbox Header Editor. Contact Details When reviewing the details of a contact, you can open the Contact Details dialog (Control-Alt-C by default) to get a quicker way to review and modify contact information. The Contact Details dialog contains a details list view (presenting all available fields, whether empty, or containing data), along with four buttons: * Check XYZ (C) - Activates the Outlook contact window's "Check" feature, which allows you to modify information relevant to the selected field. The value of this button will change depending on the name of the selected detail. For example, when Full Name is selected in the Details list view, the button label will be Check Full Name. * Select Label (S) - Activates the Outlook contact window's label selection menu for the selected field. You can use this feature to change, for example, "Business" to "Mobile" for a phone entry. This button will only be enabled for those fields who have labels that can be modified. * Edit Value (E) - Puts focus on the selected field, providing a quick way to edit field data without having to spend an unnecessary amount of time tabbing around the original contact window. * Close - Closes the contact details dialog. Message Attachments When reviewing an open message containing attachments, you can quickly access attachment details by pressing the Outlook Enhance Attachments dialog with Control-Alt-A (by default). The attachments dialog contains a list of all available attachments, including their size (if available). You can choose to open an attachment simply by selecting it from the attachments list, and pressing enter, or by selecting it from the attachments list, and tabbing to and selecting the Open button. You can save an attachment using the Save As button, and delete an attachment using the Delete button. While Window-Eyes provides access to attachments using Alt-7 twice, the Outlook Enhance attachment dialog provides a more accessible method than Outlook's default attachment control. Additional Features * When in Business Card or Card view in Contacts, you can type the first letter of a contact name, and the first selected item will be spoken automatically. * Opened messages written in HTML format can be launched in Internet Explorer using Alt-0 (available in Outlook 2007 and Outlook 2010 only). * The rules list view in the Rules and Alerts dialog reads automatically (available in Outlook 2007 and Outlook 2010 only). Message Virtualization In Office 2007 and newer, Microsoft removed the option to select an HTML viewer to read email. Instead, Outlook always uses Word (which can often format HTML mail poorly for screen readers). If you enable the message virtualization option (located in the Outlook Enhance pulldown of the Window-Eyes Apps menu), HTML messages will open as they did before, but Window-Eyes will display them in a Browse Mode buffer. For more information about this app, visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/Outlook_Enhance . Progress Indicator This app is designed to give you immediate feedback on the status of progress bars in the active window. Feedback can be given either through a series of spoken messages or audible tones. There are two types of progress bars. The typical progress bar displays a percentage from 0 to 100. Marquee bars are similar but they do not give a percentage. Instead, they simply indicate that progress is being made without any specifics as to the total percentage. Both types of progress bars can be monitored independently with this app. With some programs, a progress bar may be used for other purposes and cause Window-Eyes to speak the progress status over and over. If this happens, you can press the toggle all progress bars hot key, which is Control-Shift-Windows-P by default, to toggle all progress bars for the current window off or on. Once you toggle them off then all progress bars for the currently active window will be ignored. You can block as many windows as you wish. To unblock a window simply press the hot key again while the window is active or use the app's options dialog. The options dialog, which is available via the Apps menu inside the Window-Eyes control panel, allows you to also adjust how progress bars are spoken. For more information, visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/progressindicator . Quick Start Wizard The Quick Start Wizard is an app which asks you a series of questions that allows you to set up your speech, braille, and keyboard preferences without having to manually do so. This app will run the very first time you launch Window-Eyes, but you can invoke it again through the Apps menu in the Window-Eyes control panel. For more information regarding this app, visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/quickstart . Read to Me The Read to me app lets you tell Window-Eyes to use a specific voice whenever you initiate a Read-To-End. For example, if you use DECTalk Access 32 or Eloquence as your primary voice, but you want to use a more human-sounding synthesizer when you read along passage of text, this app will let you do just that. You can additionally specify the rate at which the voice will read if the default speed is either too fast or too slow. All of the options for Read to Me can be set from the Apps menu of the Window-Eyes control panel. More information regarding this app is available from www.gwmicro.com/apps/Read_To_Me . TB Enhance TB Enhance improves accessibility to the Mozilla Thunderbird email client. Enhancements include: automatic maximizing of Thunderbird windows, access to mailbox column headers (Control-Alt-C by default), email auto-completion support, and support for using the default tabbed message view. Additional assistance for using Thunderbird is available by pressing the Program Help hot key, which is Control-Shift-Question Mark by default. For more information regarding this app, visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/tb_enhance . Virtual View The Virtual View app displays a text representation of any window. This feature can be especially useful if your currently active or focused window does not provide much keyboard access, or if you want to manipulate the text with your keyboard instead of the mouse. To invoke Virtual View, press Control-Alt-V. Window-Eyes will then ask you if you want to virtualize the focused window, that is, the window that has your immediate keyboard focus, or the active window, which includes all of the text in your active program window. Once you choose the window you want to virtualize, a dialog will open that contains the window's text in a read-only edit box which you can review with your standard reading keys. Just like any edit box, you can also select and copy text out of the window and paste it elsewhere. Virtual View also offers several quick keys for accessing the dialog where the text originated. For example, if a button called Close exists in the dialog from where you obtained the virtual view, you can place your cursor on the word close, and press the letter L to close the Virtual View dialog, and click the close button -- all in one key stroke. In addition to L for Single Left Click, other commands are: R for Single Right Click, D for Double Left Click, M for Middle Click, P for Route Mouse, and F for Focus Control. You can also use Control-F to search for text in the Virtual View edit box, as well as F3 to find the next occurrence of the last string for which you searched. For more information regarding this app, visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/VirtualView . Voice Rotor The Voice Rotor app lets you create a list of your favorite synthesizers or SAPI voices and switch to them with the press of a single hot key. The Voice Rotor options dialog, which can be reached from the Apps menu of the Window-Eyes control panel, allows you to configure the rotor to your liking. Once done, you can press Windows-F2 to move forward through your voices or Shift-Windows-F2 to go in the opposite direction. The list of voices you choose acts like a circle. That is, if you are at one end of the list and try to move beyond it, your position within the rotor will wrap around to the opposite end. This app makes it extremely easy to switch among synthesizers such as DECTalk Access 32, Eloquence, SAPI voices, or hardware synthesizers. For more information regarding this app, visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/Voice_Rotor . Window-Eyes Diagnostics Window-Eyes Diagnostics provides an easy way to submit technical information about your system to a GW Micro technical support specialist. Diagnostic information includes a screen shot, a Window-Eyes process dump, a dump of the Window-Eyes Off-Screen Model (OSM), and a detailed system report. Diagnostic information is confidential, and transmitted to GW Micro through a secure channel. The default hot key for creating a diagnostic report is Control-Alt-Q. In addition, if you're using Windows 7 or greater, the Window-Eyes Diagnostics app allows you to record steps to duplicate problems using the Microsoft Problem Steps Recorder. The default hot key to begin recording is Alt-F9. The default hot key to stop recording is Alt-F10. Note: please use this utility only when instructed to do so by a GW Micro technical support specialist. For more information about this app, visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/WEDiag . WE Update The WE Update app checks for any updates that might be available for Window-Eyes when it is launched. If a newer version of Window-Eyes is available, you will be alerted to its presence, and you will be given the opportunity to visit the GW Micro website for more information. If no update is found, the app will quietly exit. WE Update has no configuration options. For more information about this app, visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/WEUpdate . Windows Enhanced This app provides enhancements to Microsoft Windows, including: Start Menu Enhanced Navigation (Windows 8 Only) * Insert Left/Right - Move forward and backward between groups. * Insert Up/Down - Move up and down through the items in a group logically. * Insert Home/End - Move to the first and last items in a group respectively. * * Insert-Tab - Displays a dialog containing all of the start menu items in a tree view. Toasts and Balloon Tips Toast window messages (such as those from installing apps, or inserting media that causes autoplay to run) are announced automatically. In addition, both toasts and balloon tip messages are saved so that you can review them at any time, using the Toast and Balloon Tip History option in the Windows Enhanced app menu. You also have the option to route the mouse to toasts and balloon tips automatically so all you have to do is a single left click to perform the default action. Audio Support and Mute options Windows Enhanced also provide you with the ability to enable audio support in safe mode. When enabled, your audio device will be enabled so that Window-Eyes can speak if you boot into Safe Mode (note: some audio hardware does not support this feature). You can also use Control-Windows-M (by default) to toggle the master volume's mute property on and off. For more information about this app, please visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/Windows_Enhanced . Windows Live Mail The Windows Live Mail app enhances the accessibility of the Windows Live Mail client. The app has no options to configure and will not run unless Windows Live Mail is open. For more information regarding this app, visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/Windows_Live_Mail . Word Navigation The Word Navigation app allows you to traverse Microsoft Word documents much like you would a web page in Browse Mode. This app is described fully in the "Word Navigation" portion of the "Using Microsoft Word" section of this manual. For more information regarding this app, visit www.gwmicro.com/apps/WordNav . The GW Micro Knowledge Base The GW Micro knowledge base includes helpful articles, solutions, and tips relating to Window-Eyes and other commonly used software. For example, many of the more legacy and obscure capabilities of Window-Eyes, such as user, hyperactive, and float windows, along with Window-Eyes's command-line startup parameters, still exist. However, they are not described in the user manual. Instead, the information now exists in the knowledge base for anyone who wishes to learn more about them. In addition, the knowledge base is updated regularly with new information as issues arise and solutions are found. To read through the knowledge base, visit http://www.gwmicro.com/kb/. The Window-Eyes Control Panel How it Works Window-Eyes is a program which turns the information presented on your computer screen into meaningful text that is spoken aloud via a speech synthesizer or sent to a refreshable braille display for reading. Window-Eyes is also smart enough to track your position and give you the kind of feedback you need depending on what you are doing. For example, if you are in a word processor, it will read the text under the cursor as you type. If you are inside a dialog box, Window-Eyes will announce each control as you press the Tab key to move among the dialog?s controls. Window-Eyes also provides hot keys for manipulating the mouse, navigating websites, working with Microsoft Office, and much more. Window-Eyes has been designed to require little to no customization to work for most users, but do not be fooled; all of Window-Eyes? features can be set exactly the way you want them in an easy-to-use interface called the Window-Eyes control panel. This section of the manual describes the items you will find in Window-Eyes, their purpose, and how to adjust them to suit your needs. Assuming Window-Eyes is already running, press Control-Backslash from anywhere to open its control panel. Running across the top of the control panel is a menu bar which allows you to perform tasks such as opening and saving settings, managing Window-Eyes apps, and getting help. Beneath the menu bar are three sections. The first is a tree view of categories which contain settings you can alter, and the area immediately to the right will change based on the setting you are modifying. Finally, there are two buttons at the bottom right of the window. The ?Save Settings? button will save any changes you have made to disk, and the ?Minimize? button will return you to your previously open program. To move through the control panel, simply press the Tab key. To move in the opposite direction, press Shift-Tab. A Word about Scope Every Window-Eyes setting discussed below can apply globally or to a single program. Global settings will be active regardless of the program you are running, while program-specific settings will only activate when a certain program gains focus. By default, the scope of all settings you adjust will be set to global. If "Show Advanced Options" is enabled from inside the Window-Eyes Help menu, then you will see buttons throughout the control panel which allow you to toggle the scope of the setting between these two states. If "Show Advanced Options" is disabled, then these buttons will not be visible, and any changes you make will be global. The Menus Press the Alt key to move to, and away from, the menu bar. The left and right arrow keys will move you across the menus, and the up and down arrows will take you through individual items within each. As you move across the menu bar, you will hear up to four pieces of information: ? The name of the menu item. ? The menu?s shortcut key. Press the Alt key along with the shortcut you hear to immediately open the menu. ? Whether or not this is a pull-down menu. If Window-Eyes says ?pull-down,? then you can press the Enter key to open an additional menu with more options. Press the left arrow to exit the pull-down. ? The menu accelerator, if any. Unlike menu shortcut keys, accelerators can be pressed from within the Window-Eyes control panel. You do not need to first focus the menu bar. F = File The File menu contains all of the Window-Eyes options related to managing its settings, also known as SET files. The options in the File menu are as follows: O = Open Settings This menu item causes the open settings dialog to appear. Use this option if you want to explicitly load settings for a program that you have previously saved. Typically, Window-Eyes will automatically load the settings you need without requiring any intervention on your part. If, however, it is not, or you want to manually load different settings, open this dialog, browse to the file you want to open, and press Enter. The dialog will close, and the new settings will activate. S = Save Settings Choose this item when you want to permanently save any changes you have made to Window-Eyes. Saving your settings ensures that Window-Eyes will act the way you prefer each time it loads. If you make any changes but do not save them, they will be lost when Window-Eyes closes. When this item is activated, Window-Eyes will say, ?settings saved? to confirm that your changes have been stored. Note that this menu item is identical to the ??Save Settings? button in the bottom right of the Window-Eyes control panel. E = Explore Profile Folder Selecting this item will cause the contents of your active Window-Eyes profile to open inside Windows Explorer. Your profile is where Window-Eyes stores its settings, apps, and other pieces of information that you can change. Take care not to modify any files directly unless you are comfortable doing so and understand the risks. For more information on how Window-Eyes profiles work, see article 1124 in the GW Micro support knowledge base at http://www.gwmicro.com/kb/. R = Reset Settings Choosing this option will cause Window-Eyes to revert to the settings you previously saved to disk. This is especially useful if you make some changes you do not like, or you inadvertently modify a setting that has negative consequences. Note that this option will not reset Window-Eyes to factory defaults; it only loads the settings you last saved to disk. F = Factory Settings This item allows you to install, uninstall, or update various SET file packages. If you upgrade a program, you may be required to install the corresponding SET file. For example if you were using Office 2003 and later upgrade to Office 2010, you will need to install the Office 2010 SET files. The Office 2003 SET files will not work correctly in Office 2010. Or maybe you have been experimenting with a SET file and somehow modified it such that it is no longer usable or a particular feature no longer speaks the way it did prior to your change. If you know what you changed, you can simply reverse it; but in many cases you may not, and it would be simpler to reload the factory SET file. Activating this option from the Window-Eyes File menu causes a dialog to open with the following items: * A = Applications ? List View * This item presents all available set files, along with their installed status, as well as version information. The list view contains four columns used to represent this information -- Name, Status, Factory Version, and Installed Version. The Name column lists the names of the Set File packages that are available for use. Status will be one of the following: 1. Not Installed ? Indicates that the selected set files have not been installed. 2. Installed ? Indicates that the selected set files have been installed. 3. Modified ? Indicates that the selected set files have been installed and have been modified from the original factory version. 4. Out Dated ? Indicates that the selected set files have been installed but are older than the available factory version. 5. Newer ? Indicates that the selected set files have been installed and are newer than the available factory version. The Factory Version column indicates version numbers for the set file packages that are included with Window-Eyes. The Installed Version column indicates version numbers for the set file packages that are currently installed for the active Window-Eyes user. If the Installed Version column contains "n/a", then Window-Eyes is unable to determine the version number for the installed set files. This can happen when upgrading from an older version of Window-Eyes. A new install of Window-Eyes, however, will always have correct version numbers listed. Also, if you choose to reload any factory set file packages, the version number will appear after the set file package installation. The Applications list view allows you to select multiple set file packages for batch installing or uninstalling. In other words, rather than selecting and installing several set file packages individually, you can install multiple set file packages at once. * N = Information ? Read-only Edit Box * This box contains the readme document included with the selected factory set file. This short piece of information describes how to use the set files with the associated application. If more than one set file is selected, the Information read-only edit box will be disabled. * S = Set Files ? Read-only Edit Box * This edit box lists all files contained in the selected set file package, along with the installed status for each individual file. If a set or dictionary file has been installed, the word Installed will appear after the file name. If not, the word Missing will appear after the file name. If they differ from the factory version, the word Modified will appear after the file name. If more than one set file is selected, the Set Files read-only edit box will be disabled. * I = Install ? Button * When selected, this button will cause Window-Eyes to install the set file package (or packages) selected in the Applications list view. If you are installing set files that already exist, you will be prompted to confirm set file replacement. When a dictionary file already exists, you will be prompted with an additional choice to replace your existing dictionary, to leave your existing dictionary, or to merge the contents of your existing dictionary with the contents of the factory dictionary. In other words, if you have modified your exceptions dictionary, for example, and you choose to install newer Window-Eyes default set files, you have the option of retaining your existing exception dictionary entries, while still installing the latest exception dictionary file. The dialog that prompts you to Replace, Leave, or Merge contains three check boxes: o Apply to all dictionaries ? This option will cause the selected action (Replace, Leave, or Merge) to apply to all dictionaries, regardless of type, or application. o Apply to all X dictionaries (where X is a type of dictionary, such as graphic, exception, character, key label, or color) ? This option will cause the selected action (Replace, Leave, or Merge) to apply only to the indicated type of dictionary. o Apply to all Y dictionaries (where Y is the name of an application, such as Adobe Reader, or Internet Explorer) ? This option will cause the selected action (Replace, Leave, or Merge) to apply only to the dictionaries of the indicated application. These Replace, Leave, or Merge check box options can come in handy when installing multiple set file packages at one time. * U = Uninstall ? Button * When selected, this button will cause Window-Eyes to uninstall the set file package (or packages) selected in the Applications list view. * D = Update Outdated ? Button * When selected, this button will cause Window-Eyes to determine which installed set files are out of date and automatically update them to the latest factory version. If there are no sets to update, a message box saying "All installed set groups are currently at the latest factory version. There are no set files to update." will be displayed with an OK button. The Update Outdated option only examines the currently installed versions of set files and compares those to the factory versions. If the installed versions are less than the factory versions, those set files will be updated. If the installed versions are not less than the factory versions, even if the set files are marked as modified, they will not be installed. * C = Close ? Button * When selected, this button will cause the factory settings dialog to close. If you are reloading a SET file, it is a good idea to make sure Window-Eyes does not have that SET file currently loaded. You can make sure by closing down the application the SET file is associated with. This way the new SET file will take effect when you launch the desired application. U = Update Outdated Settings Sometimes, you might install some SET files from other Window-Eyes users. If the SET files were made with an older copy of Window-Eyes, you must first update the files so they will function correctly. Choosing to update your outdated settings will cause Window-Eyes to look for these older files, and if found, update them to the new format. Once this process is complete, a dialog will open informing you of how many SET files were updated. Press Alt-F4 to close this dialog. X = Exit Window-Eyes Choosing this option will cause Window-Eyes to display a dialog asking you if you want to close the program altogether. Press the OK button if you do, or press Cancel to leave Window-Eyes running. Note that closing Window-Eyes will stop all speech and braille output. If you simply want to leave the Window-Eyes control panel, press the Escape key. A = Apps The Apps menu is where you manage and access Window-Eyes apps. Not to be confused with Windows programs, Window-Eyes apps are written specifically for Window-Eyes users. Apps can add features to Window-Eyes, improve the accessibility of specific programs, or they can run as fully-featured programs themselves. Everything you will want to do related to installing, creating, and accessing apps is found in this menu. In addition, app writers can add entries to make it easy for you to access special parts of their apps. As you explore this menu, you will discover that GW Micro has included some apps when Window-Eyes was installed such as Auto Complete, Progress Indicator, and Virtual View. You may see entries for additional apps depending on which ones you have installed. For specific information on how to create apps and distribute them to other Window-Eyes users, see the app developer reference. Because the Apps menu?s length can vary, we will discuss only what is found underneath the first item: A = App Management This menu item contains the following options: A = App Status When it is first installed, Window-Eyes is configured to automatically run apps. This menu item has the following options which let you choose when, and if, apps should be loaded: * Off - Selecting this value immediately stops all running apps, and stops any app from loading until app status is set to something other than off. * On - Selecting this value will cause Window-Eyes to automatically load and run apps. * Manual Start - Selecting this value will enable the Window-Eyes app engine, but apps will not run automatically. Instead, you must manually start each app. D = Add or Remove Apps This option lets you install and uninstall Window-Eyes apps. The Add/Remove dialog which opens contains the following controls: * I = Installed Apps - List box * This list displays all installed apps, their version numbers, and the dates they were installed. * A = Add ? Button * When pressed, this button prompts for the name of a Window-Eyes app file. App files use the .wepm extension, which stands for Window-Eyes Package Management. Select an app name, and press enter to begin its installation. * R = Remove ? Button * Pressing this button removes the selected app along with all of the files that it installed. Note that any files that the app creates, such as your preferences or similar information, will remain. * U = Check for Updates ? Button * Pressing this button causes Window-Eyes to search App Central for new versions of the installed apps. If new versions are found, you will be presented with a dialog containing a list of all apps that are outdated, the current version numbers that are installed, and the latest version numbers that are available. You can then either select individual apps to update and click the Update button, or press the Update All button to update all of your apps at once. Check the Show App Details checkbox if you want to review the details for each app as it is installed. If an app includes a license agreement, you will be prompted to accept it before the app will update. If an app has no license to accept and you have the Show Package Details check box unchecked, the update will happen silently. * Close ? Button * Press this button to close the dialog. Note that you can also install Window-Eyes apps by opening them directly from Windows Explorer, your web browser, or any other similar program. The method you choose to install apps is entirely up to you. Additionally, if it is not already running, Window-Eyes will start when you attempt to install an app. P = App Manager The app manager allows you to start, stop, load, unload, and get help for all running apps. The dialog contains the following controls: * A = Apps - List View * This item contains a list of all running apps based on the Display Apps radio button selection, discussed next. In addition to the name, the Apps list view also contains its version number, its status (i.e. running, stopped, etc.), the app?s filename, whether it is designed to run globally or for a program, the window title (if an app is associated to a program), and the app?s description. * Display Apps o N = All (by Name) - Radio button o When this radio button is selected, all running apps will be displayed sorted by their names. o L = All (by Application) - Radio button o When this radio button is selected, all running apps will be displayed sorted first by the names of the applications to which any apps are associated followed by those that run globally. o G = Global - Radio button o When this radio button is selected, only those apps that run globally will be listed. o P = Application - Radio button o This radio button will contain the name of the application that was active when the app manager was displayed. When this radio button is selected, only those apps that have been associated with the most recently focused application will be listed. * W = Show More Options - Check box * By default, the App Manager dialog only displays the Apps list view, the Display Apps radio button group, the Stop button, the Help and Options button, the Close button, and this check box (which also defaults to unchecked). If this check box is checked, additional options that are not typically used as often are displayed. * A = Load ? Button * If the Show More Options checkbox is checked, selecting this button prompts for the filename of an app to load. If the Application radio button was selected before you pressed the Load button, the app you choose will be associated with that application. If the Global radio button was selected before you activated the Load button, the selected app will be associated globally. The Load button will be disabled if either the All (by Name) or All (by Application) radio buttons are selected. You must first choose whether the app you want to load should run globally or for a specific application. * U = Unload ? Button * If the Show More Options checkbox is checked, pressing this button unloads the app that is selected in the Apps list view. Once it has been unloaded, it will be removed from the Apps list and will no longer run automatically. However, the app will not be removed from the hard drive; it is simply ignored. The Add or Remove Apps dialog should be used to uninstall and remove apps from your computer. * T = Start/Stop ? Button * If the Show More Options checkbox is checked, and if the selected app in the Apps list view has a status of something other than running, this button will be labeled Start. When activated, it will cause the selected app to run. If the selected app has a status of something other than stopped, this button will be labeled Stop, and when activated will cause the selected app to stop running. After an app stops, it will remain in the apps list with a status of stopped. If the app is globally associated, and the Window-Eyes app support is restarted, the stopped app will try to run again. Similarly, if the app is associated to a program, and the application is closed and re-opened, the stopped app will try to run again. If the Window-Eyes app status is set to manual, stopped apps will only run if they are manually started by pressing this button. This button will be disabled if the Window-Eyes app status is set to off. * H = Help and Options ? Button * If this button is enabled, Window-Eyes will display any help information provided by the app?s author. If this button is disabled, then the selected app does not provide any help information. This button will also be disabled if the Window-Eyes app status is set to off. * Close ? Button * Pressing this button closes the App Manager dialog. * E = Enable/Disable ? Button * If the Show More Options checkbox is checked and the selected app in the Apps list view has a status of disabled, this button will be labeled Enabled. If the Window-Eyes app status is set to on and you enable an app, it will continue to run automatically. If the Window-Eyes app status is set to Manual and you enable an app, it will not run automatically. If the selected app in the Apps list view has a status of anything other than disabled, this button will be labeled Disable, and will disable the selected app until you re-enable it. This button will be disabled if the Window-Eyes app status is set to off. * R = Reload - Button ? * If the Show More Options checkbox is checked, pressing this button will restart the selected app in the Apps list view. This button will be disabled if the Window-Eyes app status is set to off. * I = Edit ? Button * If the Show More Options checkbox is checked, pressing this button will cause the selected app in the Apps list view to open in the editor specified in the Advanced options dialog (discussed below). If no default editor is specified, the app will open in Notepad. * Y = Security ? Button * If the Show More Options checkbox is checked, pressing this button will open the App Security dialog. This dialog allows you to control exactly which apps you want to trust and/or run. By default, Window-Eyes is configured to allow all installed apps to run. However, you can also instruct Window-Eyes to run only those apps you have deemed secure. You can choose to trust individual apps, only those apps that have been signed by certain authors such as GW Micro, or a combination of each. Also note that GW Micro takes your security very seriously. Even though the Window-Eyes app writing feature has been designed to be secure from the very beginning, we felt it vital that you should also be able to choose for yourself how much access apps will have to your computer. * V = Advanced ? Button * If the Show More Options checkbox is checked, pressing this button will open the Advanced App Settings dialog. If you develop apps, this dialog allows you to specify an editor in which app source code will be opened when the Edit App button is pressed from the App Manager. By default, Window-Eyes opens apps inside Windows Notepad. You can also set a hot key that will restart the app being edited to save you the trouble of moving between the App Manager and your code editor. C = Package Manager The package manager allows you to package a collection of files together, such as the source code and other files for a Window-Eyes app you are working on. If you are simply consuming apps written by others, then you can ignore the package manager. See the Window-Eyes app developer reference for more details on how to use this dialog. E = Encrypt Apps This dialog allows you to encrypt the source code for Window-Eyes apps into a format that only Window-Eyes will be able to read. This is useful if you write an app, you want others to use it, but you do not want them to be able to look at or change your code. As with the package manager, the Encrypt Apps window is described in more detail in the Window-Eyes app developer reference. H = Help The Help menu contains many resources for getting help with using Window-Eyes. Utilize the items here if you want to read the Window-Eyes documentation, ask for or give remote assistance, reset your braille and speech settings, or check for program updates. The Help menu contains the following items: D = Documentation The documentation section of the Help menu offers three choices: M = Manual Selecting this item opens the Window-Eyes manual you are reading now. Note that there are two versions of the manual, and the one you read depends on whether or not the Show Advanced Options item (discussed below) is checked. A = App Developer Reference Selecting this item opens the Window-Eyes app developer reference. If you are interested in writing apps for Window-Eyes, this guide explains how to create them and details the Window-Eyes object model. If you only intend to use apps and have no interest in writing them, then this document can be ignored. R = Readme Window-Eyes is updated regularly. New features are added and problems that are discovered get fixed. The readme document describes these changes as well as any other late-breaking information that did not make it into the manual. T = Training Resources There are many training options available through GW Micro (including free tutorials, online webinars, guides, videoes, classes, and more). Activating this menu item will open the GW Micro training resources page in your default web browser. R = Remote Assistance This option enables you to offer and accept remote assistance from other Window-Eyes users over the internet. The "Remote Access" section of this user's guide describes Window-Eyes Remote Assistance in more detail. This menu contains the following items: A = Ask for Help... Activating this option causes the "Ask for Help" dialog to open. You will be presented with a 6-digit password which you should supply to the person offering assistance. O = Offer Help... Activating this option will open the "Offer Help" dialog. You will be prompted to enter your name along with the password given to you by someone asking for help. When done, press the "OK" button to initiate the remote connection. S = Speech and Braille Recovery This menu item provides options for recovering Window-Eyes speech and braille if either has stopped working. This pull-down offers the following choices: A = Activate Backup Synthesizer Activate this option to force Window-Eyes to switch to your backup synthesizer. If you have not manually set one, Window-Eyes will attempt to speak using the Eloquence synthesizer. S = Select Synthesizer Choosing this item opens the synthesizer selection group within the main Window-Eyes user interface. Your focus will be placed directly in the list of synthesizers through which Window-Eyes can speak. Navigate to the one you want Window-Eyes to use, and press Enter to activate it. E = Select Braille Display Choosing this option places your focus in the braille display section of the Window-Eyes user interface. Your immediate focus will land in the list of braille displays Window-Eyes supports. Navigate to the one you want to use, Tab through the output port and communication settings (if applicable), and press Enter on the "Activate" button. T = Tip of the Day Selecting this menu item opens the Tip of the Day dialog. Window-Eyes is packed with features, and learning the ins and outs of all of them can take quite a bit of time. The Window-Eyes Tip of the Day feature alleviates the overwhelming fear of having to memorize the entire manual by providing small snippets of information about various Window-Eyes features every time Window-Eyes starts. The Tip of the Day dialog contains a read only edit box that displays the tip information, a Previous button to move to the previous tip, a Next button to move to the next tip, a check box labeled Show Tips at Startup, and a Close button. Several tips also provide a View Help Topic button, which when selected, will open the Window-Eyes manual directly to the section that corresponds to the tip information. If a tip has a web site associated with it, a View Web Site button will be available. When the View Web Site button is selected, the associated page will load in your default web browser. E = Error Reporting Choosing this menu item opens the Window-Eyes Error Reporting dialog. We at GW Micro have always been under the assumption that having to reboot your computer because of an error is far more than just an annoyance; it is unacceptable. Whether you are analyzing data for your employer, organizing recipes, sending e-mail to your family, or playing online poker, you rely on your computer to be as stable as possible. Window-Eyes takes stability one step further by offering the ability for Window-Eyes to report when it has encountered a problem. Error reports are sent through the Internet directly to the GW Micro development team, so you will need to make sure that you are connected to the Internet before attempting to send an error report. You can disable the automatic notification of error reporting, but we strongly encourage you to use it if you have one to report; otherwise, it may go unresolved. If, however, you do decide to disable this feature, you may re-enable it by selecting the Error Reporting option under the help menu at any time. This feature, which has already proved highly effective, allows our developers to solve problems quickly. No private information is sent along with the error report, although you do have the option of including any comments (such as your computer specifications, steps to duplicate the problem, etc.) that you feel may help our developers in resolving it. V = Show Advanced Options Activating this item will show or hide the Window-Eyes advanced options. Window-Eyes is a very powerful program with many ways to customize its behavior. The sheer amount of options can be overwhelming to new users, which is why Window-Eyes allows you to choose whether or not you want to see every possible option or only the ones most users frequently change. By default, advanced options are hidden. You will notice that the main section of the user interface only has seven main sections, and each one has only a few options that can be changed. When Show Advanced Options is checked, the number of sections within the main Window-Eyes user interface jumps to thirteen, and each area has considerably more features that can be adjusted. Additionally, the version of the Window-Eyes user manual you see when you choose to read it from the Documentation section of the Help menu depends on this setting. If Show Advanced Options is unchecked, then a basic version of the manual will open. Like the user interface, the basic manual describes only those features and concepts of interest to most users. If Show Advanced Options is checked, then the advanced version of the user manual will be displayed which details all of the Window-Eyes features, regardless of how often users typically adjust them. C = Check for Updates Choosing this option will cause the Window-Eyes Update dialog to open. This dialog displays the version of Window-Eyes you are running, whether an update is available, information about any software maintenance agreement (SMA) remaining, and contact information for your dealer. Tabbing through the dialog will allow you to download and install the latest update to which you are entitled (if available), visit the GW Micro update web site, open the GW Micro product catalog, and close the dialog. Note that internet access is required for this feature to function properly. G = Get More Voices Choosing this option will open the GW Micro voice catalog page where you can preview and purchase additional speech synthesizers and/or voices for use with Window-Eyes. A = About Window-Eyes Choosing this option causes the About Window-Eyes dialog to open. This window displays information about Window-Eyes, such as the version number, your personalized serial number, dealer information, etc. The Window-Eyes User Interface When you open the Window-Eyes control panel with Control-Backslash, your cursor lands in a tree view of categorized groups of settings. If Window-Eyes says the focused group is closed, press the Right Arrow key to open it. You can then use your Up and Down Arrows to explore the settings found within the focused category. To close the category, press the Left Arrow key until Window-Eyes alerts you that the item is closed. When you reach a group of settings you want to change, repeatedly issue either the Tab or Shift-Tab commands to move through its options. If you continue moving past these dynamic options, you will reach the Save Settings button. Press Enter here to save your settings. Tab again, and you will find the Minimize button. Pressing this causes the Window-Eyes control panel to close, and your focus will return to the previously open program. Tab a final time to return to the main settings tree view. Note that you can also press the F6 key to quickly move between the settings tree and the most recently focused option for the selected setting. When you are inside the options area for whichever setting you want to change, Window-Eyes will announce the name of the option, its scope, the option's value, and the type of control. If you want more information about the item you are changing, press F1 to cause Window-Eyes to display a brief help message that explains the option's purpose, and if necessary, how to set it. The following list briefly describes the types of controls you will find in the Window-Eyes control panel and how to use them. * Buttons * A button is a control which, when activated, causes something to occur. It can toggle a group of settings between one state and another, cause Window-Eyes to immediately perform an action, or open or close a dialog box. Press the Space Bar to activate the button that has focus. * Up-down edit boxes * There are two ways to set the value of an up-down edit box. You can enter a letter or number (depending on the option), or use the up and down arrows to adjust it. You can also press the Page-Up and Page-Down keys to make larger adjustments or the Home and End keys to move to the minimum and maximum values allowed for the setting. * Combo boxes * Unlike an edit box, you cannot type inside a combo box. Instead, press the up and down arrow keys to review the choices presented in the combo box. You can also use the Home and End keys to move to the first and last options respectively. * Check boxes * Unlike the previous two types of controls, check boxes can only have two possible values: checked and unchecked. If a check box is checked, then the selected option is active; if it is unchecked, then the option is not. Press the Space Bar to change the checked state of the selected setting. * Radio buttons * A group of radio buttons is similar to both a combo box and check box. Each radio button can be either checked or unchecked, but only one button can be checked at a time. Press the up and down arrow keys to move among each button in the group and. * List boxes * A list box is similar to a combo box except that visually, more than one option inside the list is visible at a time. Despite the slight difference, the way you interact with a list box is identical to that of a combo box. Press the up and down arrow keys to review the choices presented in the list box. You can also use the Home and End keys to move to the first and last options respectively. * List views * A list view is similar to a list box except that the information in a list view can contain multiple columns of information similar to a table. Standard list views also allow you to select more than one item at a time. The list views you will find in the Window-Eyes control panel, however, permit only one item to be selected at a time. Press the up and down arrow keys to review the choices presented in the list view. You can also use the Home and End keys to move to the first and last options respectively. The remainder of this section of the manual is devoted to explaining the options inside the Window-Eyes control panel. Consult the "Window-Eyes Features" section found earlier in this user's guide for a detailed explanation of all Window-Eyes abilities and concepts. Screen: This group of settings pertains to how Window-Eyes reads information as it changes on your screen. Voice: * Make the Keyboard and Mouse voices match the Screen voice - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not changes you make to the screen voice are also reflected in the keyboard and mouse voices. * Rate Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the screen rate setting between global and program. * Rate - Edit Box * Enter a number between 1 and 100 to set the screen voice rate. The higher the number, the faster the voice. The lower the number, the slower the voice. * Pitch Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the screen pitch setting between global and program. * Pitch - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 9 to set the screen voice pitch. The higher the number, the higher the voice. The lower the number, the lower the voice. * Tone Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the screen tone setting between global and program. * Tone - Edit Box * Enter a letter between A and Z to set the screen voice tone. The result will vary depending on the synthesizer you are using. If you are using DECtalk Access 32 or Eloquence, changing the tone cycles through the different voices that the synthesizer supports. * Volume Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the screen volume setting between global and program. * Volume - Edit Box * Enter a value from 0 to 9 to set the screen voice volume. The higher the number, the louder the voice. The lower the number, the softer the voice. Punctuation: * Math Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the screen math punctuation setting between global and program. * Math - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks math punctuation symbols, such as plus, dash, slash, asterisk, percent, caret, equals, less-than and greater-than, and parenthesis. If this is set to "on," then Window-Eyes speaks all of these punctuation marks. If set to "off," then none of the symbols are announced. If set to "dictionary only," then Window-Eyes will only speak any of the previously described symbols if they exist in the active character dictionary. * Miscellaneous Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the miscellaneous screen punctuation setting between global and program. * Miscellaneous - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks miscellaneous punctuation symbols, such as apostrophe, accent, at, dollar sign, number sign, underline, angle brackets, and braces. If this is set to "on," then Window-Eyes speaks all of these punctuation marks. If set to "off," then none of the symbols are announced. If set to "dictionary only," then Window-Eyes will only speak any of the previously described symbols if they exist in the active character dictionary. * Space Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the screen space punctuation setting between global and program. * Space - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks space punctuation symbols. If this is set to "on," then Window-Eyes speaks all of these punctuation marks. If set to "off," then none of the symbols are announced. If set to "dictionary only," then Window-Eyes will only speak any of the previously described symbols if they exist in the active character dictionary. * Textual Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the screen textual punctuation setting between global and program. * Textual - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks textual punctuation symbols, such as comma, semicolon, colon, period, question mark, and exclamation mark. If this is set to "on," then Window-Eyes speaks all of these punctuation marks. If set to "off," then none of the symbols are announced. If set to "dictionary only," then Window-Eyes will only speak any of the previously described symbols if they exist in the active character dictionary. Other: * Attribute Changes Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the screen attribute changes setting between global and program. * Attribute Changes - Radio Button Group * If enabled, Window-Eyes will announce when text attributes, such as font and spacing, change. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will not speak these changes. * Blank Lines Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the screen blank lines setting between global and program. * Blank Lines - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks blank lines. If blank lines are off, Window-Eyes will never announce them. If blank lines are on, Window-Eyes will say "blank" when one is encountered. If blank lines are off during Read-To-End, Window-Eyes will say "blank" when it encounters a blank line when you use your arrow keys, but it will ignore them if you are reading text with the Read-To-End command. * Capitalization Alert Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the screen capitalization alert setting between global and program. * Capitalization Alert - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks capitalized text. If you select "off," Window-Eyes will not indicate capitalized text. if you choose "Say Cap," Window-Eyes will say "cap" when it encounters a capitalized word, or it will say "cap cap" if all of the text in the word is uppercase. Choosing "pitch" will cause Window-Eyes to raise the pitch of your synthesizer when capitalized text is encountered. * Format Alert Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the screen format alert setting between global and program. * Format Alert - Radio Button Group * If enabled, Window-Eyes will announce format changes, such as line indentation and extra spaces. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will not speak when these items change. * Numbers Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the screen numbers setting between global and program. * Numbers - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes processes numbers. By default, this option is set to On, and Window-Eyes applies its own rules so that regardless of which synthesizer you prefer, numbers will always sound the same. If you set this option to Off, Window-Eyes will speak the individual digits that make up the number. If this option is set to Synthesizer, Window-Eyes will send the numbers directly to the synthesizer for processing. * Read Paragraph Style Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the read paragraph style setting between global and program. * Read Paragraph Style - Combo Box * Choose when Window-Eyes should send individual lines or entire paragraphs of text to the synthesizer. If set to On, Window-Eyes will send longer chunks of text. This has the advantage of smoother sounding speech. For more spacing between information or lines of text, set this to Off or Auto. When this option is Off, one line of text will be sent at a time. If this option is set to Auto, one line of text will be sent except when a Read-To-End is active. * Signal Cursor Position Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the signal cursor position setting between global and program. * Signal Cursor Position - Radio Button Group * If enabled, Window-Eyes will announce the cursor position as you move through text. For example, if your cursor is underneath the first character of a line, Window-Eyes will speak the word "cursor" followed by the text on the line. * Spell Alpha Numeric Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the spell alpha/Numeric setting between global and program. * Spell Alpha Numeric - Radio Button Group * If enabled, Window-Eyes will spell words that contain both letters and numbers, such as ham call signs. * Split Mixed Case Words Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the split mixed case words setting between global and program. * Split Mixed Case Words - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes pronounces words with mixed capitalization. If set to "off," Window-Eyes will treat words with mixed capitalization as a single chunk of text. If set to "on," Window-Eyes will split words with mixed capitalization into separate pieces when it sends them to the synthesizer. if set to "on with achronyms," Window-Eyes will spell words with mixed capitalization. Repeat Filter: * Repeat Filter Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the repeat filter setting between global and program. * Repeat Filter - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks repeating characters. If set to "off," Window-Eyes will not perform any special processing on repeating text. If set to "say repeats," Window-Eyes will announce that the character repeats after it is encountered at least the number of times specified in the next setting. If set to "ignore," Window-Eyes will ignore the repeating character after it is encountered the number of times specified in the next setting. * Repeat Filter Value - Edit Box * Enter a number between 1 and 9 which represents how many times a character should repeat before the filter is applied. Line Filter: * Line Filter Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the line filter setting between global and program. * Line Filter - Combo Box * Choose when Window-Eyes filters lines of text. When set to "off," the Line Filter is nonfunctional; that is, it does not filter any line from being read. When set to "read to end," Window-Eyes applies its Line Filter only when Read-To-End is active. When set to "on," Window-Eyes applies its Line Filter to keys you might use to read one line at a time, such as the arrow keys and Read-To-End. * Line Filter Position - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 4 which represents how many characters to count from the left edge of the screen. * Line Filter Characters - Edit Box * Enter up to 5 characters which begin the type of lines Window-Eyes will filter. Keyboard: This group of settings allows you to adjust what Window-Eyes speaks when keys are pressed on the computer keyboard. Voice: * Voice Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the keyboard voice setting between global and program. * Voice - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks when you type. When set to "off," the keyboard voice will silence the speaking of keys as you type. When set to "On with Characters," individual keystrokes are voiced as they are typed. When set to "On with Words," individual letters you type are held in a queue until you press the Space Bar, Enter key, any digit or a punctuation-mark key. Then, the whole word is voiced. Subsequent key presses will not interrupt the word from being spoken. When the voice is set to "On with Words and Numbers," individual letters and digits you type are held in a queue until you press the Space Bar, Enter key, or a punctuation-mark key. Subsequent key presses will not interrupt the word from being spoken. When set to "On with Characters and Words," individual keystrokes are voiced as they are typed, and whole words are spoken when you press the Space Bar, Enter key, any digit or a punctuation-mark key. When set to "On with Characters, Words, and Numbers," individual keystrokes and digits are voiced as they are typed, and whole words are spoken when you press the Space Bar, Enter key, or a punctuation-mark key. The "On with Words Interrupt" and "On with Words and Numbers Interrupt" choices are identical to the "On with Words" and "On with Words and Numbers" options just described, except that subsequent key presses will interrupt Window-Eyes speech. Note: When word mode is set to "On with Words" or "On With Words and Numbers," Interruptability is disabled for the Shift and Enter keys as well as for letters and numbers. * Make the Screen and Mouse voices match the Keyboard voice - Check Box * This checkbox toggles whether or not changes you make to the keyboard voice are also reflected in the screen and mouse voices. * Rate Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the keyboard rate setting between global and program. * Rate - Edit Box * Enter a number between 1 and 100 to set the keyboard voice rate. The higher the number, the faster the voice. The lower the number, the slower the voice. * Pitch Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the keyboard pitch setting between global and program. * Pitch - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 9 to set the keyboard voice pitch. The higher the number, the higher the voice. The lower the number, the lower the voice. * Tone Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the keyboard tone setting between global and program. * Tone - Edit Box * Enter a letter between A and Z to set the keyboard voice tone. The result will vary depending on the synthesizer you are using. If you are using DECtalk Access 32 or Eloquence, changing the tone cycles through the different voices that the synthesizer supports. * Volume Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the keyboard volume setting between global and program. * Volume - Edit Box * Enter a value from 0 to 9 to set the keyboard voice volume. The higher the number, the louder the voice. The lower the number, the softer the voice. Punctuation: * Math Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the keyboard math punctuation setting between global and program. * Math - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks math punctuation symbols when you type, such as plus, dash, slash, asterisk, percent, caret, equals, less-than and greater-than, and parenthesis. If this is set to "on," then Window-Eyes speaks all of these punctuation marks. If set to "off," then none of the symbols are announced. If set to "dictionary only," then Window-Eyes will only speak any of the previously described symbols if they exist in the active character dictionary. * Miscellaneous Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the keyboard miscellaneous punctuation setting between global and program. * Miscellaneous - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks miscellaneous punctuation symbols when you type, such as apostrophe, accent, at, dollar sign, number sign, underline, angle brackets, and braces. If this is set to "on," then Window-Eyes speaks all of these punctuation marks. If set to "off," then none of the symbols are announced. If set to "dictionary only," then Window-Eyes will only speak any of the previously described symbols if they exist in the active character dictionary. * Space Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the keyboard space punctuation setting between global and program. * Space - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks space punctuation symbols when you type. If this is set to "on," then Window-Eyes speaks all of these punctuation marks. If set to "off," then none of the symbols are announced. If set to "dictionary only," then Window-Eyes will only speak any of the previously described symbols if they exist in the active character dictionary. * Textual Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the keyboard textual punctuation setting between global and program. * Textual - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks textual punctuation symbols when you type, such as comma, semicolon, colon, period, question mark, and exclamation mark. If this is set to "on," then Window-Eyes speaks all of these punctuation marks. If set to "off," then none of the symbols are announced. If set to "dictionary only," then Window-Eyes will only speak any of the previously described symbols if they exist in the active character dictionary. Special Keys: * Cursor Movement Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the keyboard cursor movement setting between global and program. * Cursor Movement - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the names of cursor movement keys, such as the up and down arrows. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will not speak when these keys are pressed. * Enter Key Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the keyboard enter setting between global and program. * Enter Key - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when the Enter key is pressed. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will say nothing when the Enter key is pressed. * Escape Key Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the keyboard escape Key setting between global and program. * Escape Key - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when the Escape key is pressed. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will say nothing when the Escape key is pressed. * Function Keys Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the keyboard function keys setting between global and program. * Function Keys - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when any of the function keys are pressed. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will not speak when the function keys are pressed. * Key Enhancements Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the key enhancements setting between global and program. * Key Enhancements - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when modifiers such as Control, Alt, Shift, Windows, and Application, are pressed. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will not speak when these keys are pressed. * Toggle Keys Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the toggle keys setting between global and program. * Toggle Keys - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when toggle keys, such as the Caps Lock, Scroll Lock, Insert, and Num Lock, are pressed. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will not speak when these keys are pressed. * Enable Both Inserts as Modifiers Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the enable both inserts as modifiers setting between global and program. * Enable Both Inserts as Modifiers - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes makes it possible to use both Insert keys as a command modifier. If this option is enabled and either Insert key is held down, Window-Eyes will allow you to press other keys while it simultaneously blocks the Insert key from being passed through to the active program. if this option is disabled, Window-Eyes will only apply this processing to the Insert key on the numeric keypad. Even if this option is disabled, you can still issue Window-Eyes commands, but Insert will be passed through to the active program if you are using any Insert key other than the one on the numeric keypad. * Allow Caps Lock to act as Insert Key - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will allow you to issue commands that involve the Insert key with the Caps Lock instead. This option is most useful if you are using a keyboard that either has no Insert key or the Insert key is difficult to reach. The laptop layout is designed around this assumption. Other: * Capitalization Alert Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the keyboard capitalization alert setting between global and program. * Capitalization Alert - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks capitalized text when you type. If you select "off," Window-Eyes will not indicate capitalized text. if you choose "Say Cap," Window-Eyes will say "cap" when you type a capital letter. Choosing "pitch" will cause Window-Eyes to raise the pitch of your synthesizer when you type a capital letter. * Interruptibility Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the keyboard interruptability setting between global and program. * Interruptibility - Combo Box * Choose which keys will interrupt Window-Eyes speech. When set to "all keys," any key will interrupt Window-Eyes speech. When set to "cursor keys off," all keys except the four Arrow keys will interrupt speech. When set to "cursor keys only," only the four Arrow keys will interrupt speech. When set to "Control or Alt," only the Control or Alt keys will stop Window-Eyes from speaking. When set to "off," no keys will interrupt Window-Eyes. * Cursor Blink Rate - Edit Box * Enter a number to set how quickly, in milliseconds, Window-Eyes will cause the cursor to blink. Layouts: * Available Layouts - Combo Box * Choose which keyboard layout to use. The default layout assumes you have a full-size keyboard including a dedicated numeric keypad. The laptop layout assumes no numeric keypad exists, and it also uses the Caps Lock as a command modifier. The hot key reference at the end of this user's guide lists the hot keys for each of these layouts. * P = Apply Layout - Button * This button activates the selected layout without permanently saving the change to disk. Mouse: This group of settings allows you to adjust how Window-Eyes speaks when the mouse moves, buttons are clicked, etc. Voice: * Voice Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the mouse voice setting between global and program. * Voice - Combo Box * Choose what Window-Eyes speaks when the mouse moves. The options you can choose from involve combinations of whether Window-Eyes announces text underneath the mouse when it moves, along with whether or not changes in the mouse pointer are voiced. * Make the Screen and Keyboard voices match the Mouse voice - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not changes you make to the mouse voice are also reflected in the screen and keyboard voices. * Rate Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the mouse rate setting between global and program. * Rate - Edit Box * Enter a number between 1 and 100 to set the mouse voice rate. The higher the number, the faster the voice. The lower the number, the slower the voice. * Pitch Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the mouse pitch setting between global and program. * Pitch - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 9 to set the mouse voice pitch. The higher the number, the higher the voice. The lower the number, the lower the voice. * Tone Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the mouse tone setting between global and program. * Tone - Edit Box * Enter a letter between A and Z to set the mouse voice tone. The result will vary depending on the synthesizer you are using. If you are using DECtalk Access 32 or Eloquence, changing the tone cycles through the different voices that the synthesizer supports. * Volume Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the mouse volume setting between global and program. * Volume - Edit Box * Enter a value from 0 to 9 to set the mouse voice volume. The higher the number, the louder the voice. The lower the number, the lower the voice. Other: * Interruptibility Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the mouse interruptability setting between global and program. * Interruptibility - Combo Box * Choose which mouse activities will interrupt Window-Eyes speech. If set to "off," no mouse actions will hault Window-Eyes from speaking. When set to "move," pointer movement interrupts speech. When set to "click buttons," buttons on the physical mouse or the Window-Eyes hot keys that emulate mouse buttons interrupt speech. When set to "move or click buttons," any movement of the mouse pointer or any click of a mouse button interrupts speech. * Boundary Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the mouse boundary setting between global and program. * Boundary - Combo Box * Choose how mouse movement will be restricted when using the Window-Eyes mouse keys. When set to "full screen," the mouse movement keys will allow you to roam freely on the screen. When set to "active window," mouse movement will be restricted to the active program window. If set to "focused window," the mouse will be restricted to the window that has immediate keyboard focus. If set to "user window," mouse movement will be confined to a specified user window. * Track Mouse with Focus Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the track mouse with focus setting between global and program. * Track Mouse with Focus - Radio Button Group * If enabled, Window-Eyes will synchronize the mouse position with the keyboard as you move. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will not synchronize the two positions. Note that even if track mouse with focus is enabled, the two positions will remain separate whenever you are moving through a menu system. Movement Units: * Pixels per Movement Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the mouse pixels per movement setting between global and program. * Up: - Edit Box * Enter a number between 1 and 99 to set how many pixels the mouse moves when the mouse up hot key is pressed. * Down: - Edit Box * Enter a number between 1 and 99 to set how many pixels the mouse moves when the mouse down hot key is pressed. * Left: - Edit Box * Enter a number between 1 and 99 to set how many pixels the mouse moves when the mouse left hot key is pressed. * Right: - Edit Box * Enter a number between 1 and 99 to set how many pixels the mouse moves when the mouse right hot key is pressed. Search Attributes: * Attributes Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the mouse search attributes setting between global and program. * Bold - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not the mouse search looks for bold text when the prior/next attribute hot keys are pressed. * Italic - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not the mouse search looks for italicized text when the prior/next attribute hot keys are pressed. * Highlighted - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not the mouse search looks for highlighted text when the prior/next attribute hot keys are pressed. * Strikeout - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not the mouse search looks for strikeout text when the prior/next attribute hot keys are pressed. * Underlined - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not the mouse search looks for underlined text when the prior/next attribute hot keys are pressed. Hot Keys: This settings group allows you to adjust all of the hot keys Window-Eyes supports. Consult the "Window-Eyes Hot Keys" chapter of the "Window-Eyes Features" section of this user's guide for more details. Cursor: * Cursor Hot Keys - List View * Choose a cursoring hot key to modify. * Cursor Hot Key Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the currently selected cursoring hot key between global and program. * Capture Key - Button * This button allows you to capture the key which will activate the selected cursoring hot key. * Undefine Key - Button * This button undefines the currently selected cursoring hot key. Mouse: * Mouse Hot Keys - List View * Choose a mouse hot key to modify. * Mouse Hot Key Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the currently selected mouse hot key between global and program. * Capture Key - Button * Captures the key which will activate the selected mouse hot key. * Undefine Key - Button * This button undefines the currently selected mouse hot key. Browse Mode: * Browse Mode Hot Keys - List View * Choose a browse mode hot key to modify. * Browse Mode Hot Key Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the currently selected browse mode hot key between global and program. * Capture Key - Button * This button allows you to capture the key which will activate the selected browse mode hot key. * Undefine Key - Button * This button undefines the currently selected browse mode hot key. Miscellaneous: * Miscellaneous Hot Keys - List View * Choose a miscellaneous hot key to modify. * Miscellaneous Hot Key Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the currently selected miscellaneous hot key between global and program. * Capture Key - Button * This button allows you to capture the key which will activate the selected miscellaneous hot key. * Undefine Key - Button * This button undefines the currently selected miscellaneous hot key. Office: * Office Hot Keys - List View * Choose a Microsoft Office hot key to modify. * Office Hot Key Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the currently selected Microsoft Office hot key between global and program. * Capture Key - Button * This button allows you to capture the key which will activate the selected Microsoft Office hot key. * Undefine Key - Button * This button undefines the currently selected Microsoft Office hot key. User Windows: * user Windows Hot Keys - List View * Choose a user windows hot key to modify. * User Windows Hot Key Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the currently selected user windows hot key between global and program. * Capture Key - Button * This button allows you to capture the key which will activate the selected user windows hot key. * Undefine Key - Button * This button undefines the currently selected user window hot key. Cursor Keys: This group of settings allows you to adjust what Window-Eyes does in response to presses of cursor keys. Consult the "Cursor Keys" chapter of the "Window-Eyes Features" section of this user's guide for more details. Keys: * Cursor Keys: - List View * Choose a cursor key to modify. * Show Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the list of cursor keys between global and program. * Capture Key - Button * This button allows you to capture the cursor key that Window-Eyes will speak. * Undefine Key - Button * This button undefines the currently selected cursor key. * First Action: - Combo Box * Choose the first action to perform when the cursor key is pressed. * First Action Info... - Button * This button allows you to provide more detailed information for the first action. * Second Action: - Combo Box * Choose the second action to perform when the cursor key is pressed. * Second Action Info... - Button * This button allows you to provide more detailed information for the second action. * Delay: - Edit Box * Enter a number between 1 and 99 to set how long, in milliseconds, Window-Eyes will wait between performing the first and second actions. Options: * If program cursor key is not found, search global cursor keys. - Radio Button Group * If enabled, Window-Eyes will search the global list of cursor keys if a program cursor key is not found. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will not search the global list of cursor keys if a program cursor key is not found. * Cursor Delay Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the cursor delay setting between global and program. * Cursor Delay - Edit Box * Enter a number between 1 and 99 to set how long, in milliseconds, to wait to speak after a cursor key is pressed. General: This group of settings allows you to adjust general Window-Eyes functions. Core Functions: * Braille - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you turn braille on or off for the current program. * Cursor Keys - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you turn cursor keys on or off for the current program. * Hot Keys - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you turn Window-Eyes hot keys on or off for the current program. * Voice - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you turn the Window-Eyes voice on or off for the current program. Highlight: * Highlight Track - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes tracks and speaks moving highlights. When set to "off," Window-Eyes functions normally when arrow keys are pressed. When set to "on," Window-Eyes reads the highlight when an arrow, Control-Tab, or Control-Shift-Tab is pressed. If no highlight is present in the current user window, Window-Eyes speaks nothing. It is important to note that the cursor key definition for the arrow keys, Control-Tab, and Control-Shift-Tab is overridden when this setting is "on." When set to "auto," which is the default, Window-Eyes attempts to read a highlight when arrow keys, Control-Tab, or Control-Shift-Tab are pressed even if highlight colors have not been set. If no highlight is present when these keys are pressed, Window-Eyes reads as it would normally. If Window-Eyes can find a highlight, it reads one of several known color combinations which Windows uses for menus and icons. * Include Box in Highlight Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the include box in highlight option between global and program. * Include Box in Highlight - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will read the contents of the box containing the highlight when the highlight hot key is pressed. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will read only the highlight and ignore the rest of the text inside the box. * Highlighted Text Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the highlighted text setting between global and program. * Highlighted Text - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will automatically determine the color of highlighted text and speak it when the highlighted block hot key is pressed. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will use a specified color for highlighted text and speak the block when the read highlight hot key is pressed. * Set Mouse Highlight Window... - Button * This button allows you to set the highlight window to be used with the route to specified highlight hot key. User Windows: * Include User Window with Box Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the include user window with box setting between global and program. * Include User Window with Box - Combo Box * If include box with highlight is on, choose a user window to read if a box that is focused has no text. * Allow Speak Windows in Edit Boxes Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the allow speak windows in edit boxes option between global and program. * Allow Speak Windows in Edit Boxes - Radio Button Group * If enabled and if a program writes text in edit boxes, Window-Eyes will speak it. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will not speak when new text appears in edit boxes. This setting does not affect how Window-Eyes reads text that you type. Other: * Trigger Delay Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the trigger delay setting between global and program. * Trigger Delay - Edit Box * Enter a number between 1 and 99 to set how much time, in milliseconds, text should be buffered before it is passed to the synthesizer. * Space Threshold Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the space threshold setting between global and program. * Space Threshold - Edit Box * Enter a number between 1 and 9 to set how many characters the cursor must be from the last non-space character on the line for Window-Eyes to consider the gap between them to be a space. * Speak Tooltips Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak tooltips setting between global and program. * Speak Tooltips - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks tooltips and popup balloons. If set to "off," Window-Eyes will ignore all tooltips and flashing icons on the task bar. When set to "auto," all tooltips will be spoken unless a graphic label exists for the graphic associated with the tooltip. When set to "on," Window-Eyes will always announce when tooltips appear on the screen or when program icons flash on the task bar to get your attention. * Allow Auto Redraw - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will automatically redraw its off-screen model so that it matches what is on the screen. There are rare cases where this can cause problems if a program draws new data too quickly, which is why you can disable this feature. * Browse Mode Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the browse mode setting between global and program. * Browse Mode - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you turn Browse Mode on and off. * Minimum Graphic Size - Edit Box * Enter a number between 2 and 10 to set the minimum size, in pixels, graphics must be before Window-Eyes identifies them. Graphics smaller than this value will be ignored. * Maximum Graphic Size - Edit Box * Enter a number between 100 and 300 to set the maximum size, in pixels, graphics must be before Window-Eyes identifies them. Graphics larger than this value will be ignored. * Display SET Filename in Title Bar - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, the name of the active set file will be displayed in the Window-Eyes title bar. Otherwise, the title bar will only show, "Window-Eyes." * Automatically Load SET Files - Combo Box * Choose if Window-Eyes automatically loads set files as you move between programs. If set to "no," Window-Eyes will not automatically load set files. If set to "yes without notification," which is the default, Window-Eyes will load set files as needed without announcing them. If set to "yes with notification," Window-Eyes will announce when it loads set files into memory. * Enable support for UI Automation? - Radio Button Group * Window-Eyes supports Microsoft's UI Automation technology (which enables screen readers to speak inside applications built with Microsoft's Windows Presentation Foundation controls). However, some older programs will not function correctly or shut down if UI Automation is active. Therefore, you can enable or disable Window-Eyes UIA support by adjusting these radio buttons. Note that Window-Eyes must be restarted for this change to take effect. Note too, that by disabling UIA support, any program which relies on UIA to convey accessibility information (such as Internet Explorer 9/10, Visual Studio 2010/2012, and possibly others) will no longer speak. Startup Options: * Global Startup Options - Edit Box * This edit box summarizes when Window-Eyes automatically starts. * Set Options... - Button * This button allows you to choose when Window-Eyes automatically starts immediately before and after the Windows login screen is displayed. Administrative rights are required. * After logging in, run Window-Eyes - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you set when Window-Eyes will start after you have logged in. If you choose to use the global startup options, then Window-Eyes will load based on whether or not it is set to do so from the Global Startup Options button just described. If you choose Always, then Window-Eyes will always run after you have logged in. If you choose Never, then Window-Eyes will not run after you login. * Show icon in the notification area instead of the task bar - Radio Button Group * If enabled, the Window-Eyes icon will be displayed in the notification area, and Window-Eyes will not appear in the Alt-Tab order. Otherwise, the Window-Eyes icon will be displayed in the taskbar, and Window-Eyes will appear in the Alt-Tab order. * When Window-Eyes starts, speak - Radio Button Group * When set to "Nothing," Window-Eyes will not announce when it starts. if set to "Window-Eyes," Window-Eyes will say, "Window-Eyes" to announce that it has started. If set to "Window-Eyes version x.x.x.x," Window-Eyes will announce, "Window-Eyes version x.x.x.x" when it loads, where x.x.x.x indicates the Window-Eyes version number. * Automatically unmute the master volume? - Radio Button Group * When set to "Yes" (which is the default), Window-Eyes will either unmute your computer if it has been muted when it loads, or if the master volume is less than 50%, it will set the volume to 50%. If this option is set to "No," Window-Eyes will not adjust your master volume when it starts. Document Specific Settings: * Program - List View * Choose a program which supports document-specific settings. * Documents - List View * Choose a document whose specific settings have previously been saved. * Filename - Edit Box * Enter a new name for the currently selected document. * Import - Button * This button allows you to import existing document-specific settings. * Export - Button * This button allows you to export document-specific settings. * Rename - Button * This button allows you to rename the settings file for the currently selected document. * Copy - Button * This button allows you to copy the document specific settings from one document to another. * Delete - Button * This button allows you to delete settings for the currently selected document. Internet Options: If you are using Window-Eyes behind a proxy or firewall, the options in this settings group allow you to set up the proxy's address and any login credentials that are required. * P = Proxy Address - Edit Box * Enter the URL for a required proxy connection. As an example, a valid address might look like "http://192.168.1.1:8080." For more information, please contact your network/system administrator. * R = Proxy configuration requires authentication - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not proxy authentication credentials are required. * O = Proxy Username * Enter the username used to connect to the supplied proxy. This edit box will be available if the check box mentioned above is checked. * X = Proxy Password - Edit Box * Enter the password used to connect to the supplied proxy. This option will be available if the check box mentioned above is checked. Braille: This group of settings allows you to configure how Window-Eyes interacts with a braille display. For more details regarding Window-Eyes braille support, see the "Using Braille" section found earlier in this user's guide. Scrolling Options: * Auto Route Cursor Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the auto route cursor setting between global and program. * Auto Route Cursor - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will automatically move the system focus when the braille display scrolls so that you can keep reading text that is not visible on the screen. Otherwise, scrolling the display will move the mouse, and you will not be able to read past the bottom of what is visible on the screen. * Enable Whole Word Mode Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the enable whole word mode setting between global and program. * Enable Whole Word Mode - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will send only whole words to the display. If a word will not fit, it will not be displayed. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will send as much text to the display as it can show, even if whole words may not fit. * Horizontal Scrolling Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the horizontal scrolling setting between global and program. * Horizontal Scrolling - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will scroll the display by the number of cells it has and keep the cursor at the left most cell position. For instance, if your display has 40 cells, Window-Eyes will scroll 40 characters at a time. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will scroll the display by a specific amount of cells that you specify below when your cursor moves beyond what is displayed. * Horizontal Scrolling - Edit Box * Enter a number between 1 and 80 to set how many cells Window-Eyes will scroll the display. * Indicate Line Change Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the indicate line change setting between global and program. * Indicate Line Change - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will play a ding sound when the braille display moves to a new line. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will not alert you when the braille display moves to a new line. Control Information: * Control Order Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the control order setting between global and program. * Control Order - Combo Box * Choose the order in which Window-Eyes describes information about the focused control in braille. You can arrange this information by the control's name, type, and any data it contains. * Include Name Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the include name setting between global and program. * Include Name - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will display the control's name. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will not display it. * Include Type Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the include type setting between global and program. * Include Type - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will display the control's type. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will not display it. * Include Index Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the include index setting between global and program. * Include Index - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will display index markers to separate items in controls such as list boxes, listviews, tree views, and tab controls. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will not send this extra information to your braille display. * Control Types - List View * Choose a control type to modify. * Type - Edit Box * Enter the text that Window-Eyes will use to represent how the currently selected control type is displayed in braille. * Display Type if Cursor Detected - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes will display the Custom Control indicator if a cursor is detected inside a custom control. * Attribute 1 - Edit Box * Depending on the type of the control that is being modified, it may have several attributes you can set. For instance, edit boxes can be read-only, part of combo boxes, or disabled. Enter a character representation that Window-Eyes will use to display the attribute in question. * Attribute 2 - Edit Box * Enter a character representation that Window-Eyes will use to display the attribute in question. * Attribute 3 - Edit Box * Enter a character representation that Window-Eyes will use to display the attribute in question. * Separator Dot Pattern - Edit Box * Enter the dot pattern, with numbers 1 to 8, that Window-Eyes displays to separate information in list boxes, list views, tree views, and tab controls. * Speech Box Mode Character Limit - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 5000 to set the maximum number of characters to hold in the speech box buffer when speech box mode is on. * Line Mode Data Indicators Include - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not left and right indicators are displayed when line mode is on. * Left Indicator Dot Pattern: - Edit Box * Enter the dot pattern, with numbers 1 to 8, that Window-Eyes shows to indicate when additional information to the left of the displayed text is available. * Right Indicator Dot Pattern: - Edit Box * Enter the dot pattern, with numbers 1 to 8, that Window-Eyes shows to indicate when additional information to the right of the displayed text is available. Dot Patterns: * Cursor Pattern - Edit Box * Enter the dot pattern, with numbers 1 to 8, that Window-Eyes displays to indicate the cursor. * Cursor Pattern - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you set how Window-Eyes displays the cursor in braille when one is on the screen. If set to Always Up, Window-Eyes will keep the cursor dot pattern up all the time. If set to Blink, Window-Eyes will blink the cursor dot pattern. * Cursor Pattern Blink Rate: - Edit Box * Enter a number between 250 and 1000 to set how rapidly, in milliseconds, the cursor dot pattern blinks. * Mouse/WE Pattern - Edit Box * Enter the dot pattern, with numbers 1 to 8, that Window-Eyes displays to indicate the mouse and WE cursor. * Mouse/WE Pattern - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you set how Window-Eyes displays the mouse or WE cursor in braille. When set to Always Up, Window-Eyes will keep the mouse/WE dot pattern up. When set to Blink, Window-Eyes will blink the mouse/WE dot pattern. * Mouse/WE Pattern Blink Rate: - Edit Box * Enter a number between 250 and 1000 to set how rapidly, in milliseconds, the mouse/WE dot pattern blinks. * Bold - Edit Box * Enter the dot pattern, with numbers 1 to 8, that Window-Eyes displays to indicate bold text. * Highlight - Edit Box * Enter the dot pattern, with numbers 1 to 8, that Window-Eyes displays to indicate highlighted text. * Italic - Edit Box * Enter the dot pattern, with numbers 1 to 8, that Window-Eyes displays to indicate italicized text. * Strikeout - Edit Box * Enter the dot pattern, with numbers 1 to 8, that Window-Eyes displays to indicate strikeout text. * Underline - Edit Box * Enter the dot pattern, with numbers 1 to 8, that Window-Eyes displays to indicate underlined text. Translation Tables * Active Translation Table - List View * Choose which braille translation table Window-Eyes will use. * Use Unified English Braille for Contracted Braille - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not to use the unified English braille table when contracted braille is active. * Open in Notepad - Button * This button opens the active braille translation table in Notepad for viewing or editing. * Copy to New User Table - Button * This button allows you to copy the active braille translation table to a new user table. * Delete User Table - Button * This button allows you to delete the currently selected user table. Hot Keys: * Keys: - List View * Choose a braille hot key to modify. * Capture Braille Key - Button * This button allows you to capture the braille display key that will activate the selected hot key. * Key Function(s): - Combo Box * This combo box lists the actions assigned to the currently selected braille hot key. * Add hot key... - Button * This button allows you to add a Window-Eyes or braille-specific command to the list of actions for the currently selected braille hot key. * Add Keystroke - Button * This button allows you to add a single keystroke from the computer keyboard to the list of actions for the currently selected braille hot key. * Add Custom Keystroke... - Button * This button allows you to add a special keystroke that uses command modifiers to the list of actions for the currently selected braille hot key. * Clear Entry - Button * This button clears the selected action for the currently selected braille hot key. * Clear Key - Button * This button clears all actions for the currently selected braille hot key. * Delete Key - Button * This button deletes the currently selected braille hot key. * Keys Apply To: - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you choose when the braille hot key will be available. When Global is selected, it will be available everywhere. The second radio button will show the name of the most recently focused program. If selected, then the braille hot key will only work when that program is running and has focus. Options: * Translations Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the braille translations setting between global and program. * Translations - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you choose whether or not Window-Eyes will display text in contracted or computer braille. * Auto Untranslate at Cursor Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the auto untranslate at cursor setting between global and program. * Auto Untranslate at Cursor - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled and if contracted braille is active, Window-Eyes will automatically untranslate the word under the cursor. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will leave the word under the cursor contracted. * Translate Symbols Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the translate symbols setting between global and program. * Translate Symbols - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will spell the names of punctuation symbols that do not have contracted braille equivalents. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will show the computer braille equivalents. * Attribute Marking Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the attribute marking setting between global and program. * Attribute Marking - Combo Box * Choose which text attributes Window-Eyes indicates with dots 7 and 8. * Indicate Capitalization - Check Box * When this option is checked, Window-Eyes will send capitalization symbols to the braille display when contracted braille is enabled. Otherwise, no capitalization symbols will be displayed. * 8 Dot Braille Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the 8 dot braille setting between global and program. * 8 Dot Braille - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you turn 8 dot braille on and off. * Auto Update Timeout Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the auto update timeout setting between global and program. * Auto Update Timeout - Edit Box * Enter a number between 250 and 10000 to set the amount of time, in milliseconds, to wait before Window-Eyes updates the display with the line under the mouse as it changes. * Quick Message Mode Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the quick message mode setting between global and program. * Quick Message Mode - Combo Box * Choose how messages that Window-Eyes speak, but which do not appear on the screen, are displayed in braille. * Quick Message Mode Timeout - Edit Box * Enter a number between 1 and 60 to set how long, in seconds, the quick message is displayed before it disappears. * Show Simulated Braille Window: - Radio Button Group * If enabled, Window-Eyes will show a simulation of a braille display on the screen. Otherwise, this visual representation of your braille display will not appear on the screen. Spacing: * Indents Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the braille indents setting between global and program. * Show Indents - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes displays indents between the edge of the active window and the start of the focused window in braille. * Spacing Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the braille spacing setting between global and program. * Expand - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes will show gaps between items on the screen in braille. This setting will not effect physical space characters. * Pixels Per Space - Edit Box * Enter a number between 1 and 100 to set how many pixels will represent a single space character on the display. Graphics: * Verbosity Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the braille graphics verbosity setting between global and program. * Verbosity - Combo Box * Choose the types of graphic symbols that Window-Eyes will represent in braille. * Graphic Symbol Dot Pattern Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the braille graphic dot pattern setting between global and program. * Graphic Symbol Dot Pattern - Edit Box * Enter the dot pattern, with numbers 1 to 8, that Window-Eyes displays to represent a graphic in braille. * Isolate Individual Graphics with Separator - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes will surround individual graphics with the control separator dot pattern. Verbosity: This group of settings allows you to configure how Window-Eyes presents Windows, browse mode, and Microsoft Office information. Common: Activated: * Speak the word "activated" Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak the word activated setting between global and program. * Speak the word "activated" - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak activated when a new window appears on the screen. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will not speak this phrase. * Speak window types Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak window types setting between global and program. * Speak window types - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes should speak the window type when a new window appears on the screen. Simply speaking, the window type describes the type of element that gains focused (such as "button," "edit box," "list view," etc). Thus, this option allows you to specify when the window is described (first, last, or never). * Speak window titles Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak window titles setting between global and program. * Speak window titles - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the title bar of a window when it appears on the screen. Otherwise, it will not. * Read entire message boxes Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the read entire message boxes setting between global and program. * Read entire message boxes - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will automatically read the contents of a message box when it appears on the screen. Otherwise, you must manually read the box when it appears. * Read entire dialogs Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the read entire dialogs setting between global and program. * Read entire dialogs - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will automatically read the contents of a dialog box when it appears on the screen. Otherwise, you must manually read the dialog. Attribute Changes: * Indicate color changes Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the indicate color changes setting between global and program. * Indicate color changes - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when the foreground or background color under the cursor or mouse changes. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will ignore color changes. * Indicate font changes Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the indicate font changes setting between global and program. * Indicate font changes - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when the font of the text under the cursor or mouse changes. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will ignore font changes. * Indicate size changes Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the indicate size changes setting between global and program. * Indicate size changes - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when the size of the text under the cursor or mouse changes. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will ignore size changes. * Indicate style changes Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the indicate style changes setting between global and program. * Indicate style changes - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when the style of the text under the cursor or mouse changes. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will ignore style changes. Focused: * Speak the word "focused" Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak the word focused setting between global and program. * Speak the word "focused" - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the word focused when the cursor moves to a control. * Speak "link" Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak link setting between global and program. * Speak "link" - Combo Box * Choose when Window-Eyes says the word link when the cursor moves to a control. The available choices are "Never," "Before Name," and "After Name" (which is the default selection. This setting affects all links (regardless of whether they are found in web browsers or stand-alone programs). * Speak window types Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak window types setting between global and program. * Speak window types - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks the window type when the cursor moves to a control. * Speak field names Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak field names setting between global and program. * Speak field names - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the field name when the cursor moves to a control. * Speak field data Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak field data setting between global and program. * Speak field data - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the field data when the cursor moves to a control. * Speak the phrase "custom control" for unknown window types Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak the phrase 'custom control' for unknown window types setting between global and program. * Speak the phrase "custom control" for unknown window types - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the words custom control when the cursor moves to a control that Window-Eyes does not recognize. * Prefix MSAA controls with the letter "m" Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the prefix MSAA controls with the letter M setting between global and program. * Prefix MSAA controls with the letter "m" - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will add the letter M to the beginning of an MSAA control when the cursor moves to one. Menu: * Speak when menus open Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak when menus open setting between global and program. * Speak when menus open - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will say menu opened when a pull-down menu opens. * Speak when menus close Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak when menus close setting between global and program. * Speak when menus close - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will say menu closed when a pull-down menu closes. * Speak items Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak items setting between global and program. * Speak items - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the names of menu items as the cursor moves to them. * Speak shortcuts Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak shortcuts setting between global and program. * Speak shortcuts - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks shortcut keys for menu items. * Speak accelerators Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak accelerators setting between global and program. * Speak accelerators - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak menu item accelerator hot keys. * Speak descriptions Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak descriptions setting between global and program. * Speak descriptions - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will describe menu items as the cursor moves to them. Miscellaneous: * Speak shortcuts Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak shortcuts setting between global and program. * Speak shortcuts - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks shortcut keys for Windows controls. * Speak top/bottom indexes Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak top/bottom indexes setting between global and program. * Speak top/bottom indexes - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when the top or bottom of a list box or list view has been reached. * Speak current index Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak current index setting between global and program. * Speak current index - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the position of the cursor each time it moves inside a combo box, list box, list view, group of radio buttons, tab control, or tree view. * Speak list view headers Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak list view headers setting between global and program. * Speak list view headers - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks column headers inside list views. * Speak the word "star" in password edit boxes Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak the word star in password edit boxes setting between global and program. * Speak the word "star" in password edit boxes - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled and if the keyboard voice is on, Window-Eyes will speak the word star when characters are typed in password edit boxes. Otherwise, Window-Eyes will speak the names of the characters as they are typed. Mouse: * Speak when mouse enters a window Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak when mouse enters a window setting between global and program. * Speak when mouse enters a window - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when the mouse moves into a window, and the type of window will be described. * Speak when mouse exits a window Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak when mouse exits a window setting between global and program. * Speak when mouse exits a window - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when the mouse leaves a window, and the type of window will be described. * Ding when mouse changes lines Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the ding when mouse changes lines setting between global and program. * Ding when mouse changes lines - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will sound a ding when the mouse moves to a new line when the mouse line up and down hot keys are not pressed. * Ding when mouse changes clips Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the ding when mouse changes clips setting between global and program. * Ding when mouse changes clips - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will sound a ding when the mouse moves between clips when the previous and next clip hot keys are not pressed. * Ding when mouse changes windows Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the ding when mouse changes windows setting between global and program. * Ding when mouse changes windows - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will sound a ding when the mouse moves between windows. * Up/Down Speak Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the mouse up/down speak setting between global and program. * Up/Down Speak - Combo Box * Choose what is spoken when the mouse Line Up and Line Down hot keys are pressed. When set to "character," the character under the mouse pointer is spoken. When this option is set to "word," the word under the mouse pointer is spoken. When set to "line," the line under the mouse pointer is spoken. When it is set to "beginning of line to mouse," the beginning of the line up to the mouse pointer will be spoken. When this item is set to "from mouse to end of line," the word under the mouse pointer to the end of the line will be spoken. * Buttons Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the mouse buttons setting between global and program. * Buttons - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when the mouse buttons are clicked. Browse Mode: Access Keys: * Speak shortcuts Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak shortcuts setting between global and program. * Speak shortcuts - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the access key shortcuts for links and buttons when browse mode is on. * Speak shortcuts during Read to End Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak shortcuts during read to end setting between global and program. * Speak shortcuts during Read to End - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the access key shortcuts for links and buttons when browse mode is on during read to end. Abbreviations: * Speak abbreviations Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak abbreviations setting between global and program. * Speak abbreviations - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks abbreviations when browse mode is on. * Speak abbreviations during Read to End Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak abbreviations during read to end setting between global and program. * Speak abbreviations during Read to End - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak abbreviations when browse mode is on during read to end. Autoload * Automatically load Browse Mode buffer Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the automatically load browse mode buffer setting between global and program. * Automatically load Browse Mode buffer - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will automatically load the virtual browse mode buffer when a web page refreshes. * Allow automatic form interaction when Browse Mode is Enabled Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the allow automatic form interaction when Browse Mode is Enabled setting between global and program. * Allow automatic form interaction when Browse Mode is Enabled - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will turn Browse Mode off if pressing Tab takes you to an element that is not a link. Conversely, Browse Mode will be automatically re-enabled if Tab takes you to a link. If this option is disabled, Window-Eyes will not turn Browse Mode on or off as you Tab. * Use Escape to re-enable Browse Mode Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the Use Escape to re-enable Browse Mode setting between global and program. * Use Escape to re-enable Browse Mode - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, pressing Escape will re-enable Browse Mode if it was previously turned off. If the option is disabled, the Escape key will never re-enable Browse Mode. * Allow automatic form interaction when Browse Mode is Enabled - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will turn Browse Mode off if pressing Tab takes you to an element that is not a link. Conversely, Browse Mode will be automatically re-enabled if Tab takes you to a link. If this option is disabled, Window-Eyes will not turn Browse Mode on or off as you Tab. * When Browse Mode is toggled on or off Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the When Browse Mode is toggled on or off setting between global and program. * When Browse Mode is toggled on or off - Combo Box * This setting allows you to adjust what happens when Browse Mode is turned on or off. If set to "do not indicate," Window-Eyes will not indicate when Browse Mode changes. If you select "indicate with speech," Window-Eyes will say "Browse on" or "Browse off" when appropriate. If you choose "Indicate with tones" (which is the default choice), a high-pitched set of tones will sound when Browse Mode is turned off, and Window-Eyes will play a lower-pitched set of tones when it is turned back on. If you decide to use "indicate with speech and tones," both the voice prompts and sound effects will be heard when Browse Mode is turned on and off. Flash: * Speak Flash objects Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak Flash objects setting between global and program. * Speak Flash objects - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when Flash objects are reached when browse mode is on. * Speak Flash objects during Read to End Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak Flash objects during read to end setting between global and program. * Speak Flash objects during Read to End - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when Flash objects are reached when browse mode is on during read to end. Forms: * Speak forms Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak forms setting between global and program. * Speak forms - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when forms are reached when browse mode is on. * Speak forms during Read to End Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak forms during read to end setting between global and program. * Speak forms during Read to End - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when forms are reached when browse mode is on during read to end. * Speak fieldsets Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak fieldsets setting between global and program. * Speak fieldsets - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when fieldsets are reached when browse mode is on. * Speak fieldsets during Read to End Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak fieldsets during read to end setting between global and program. * Speak fieldsets during Read to End - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when fieldsets are reached when browse mode is on during read to end. Headings: * Speak level numbers Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak level numbers setting between global and program. * Speak level numbers - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak heading level numbers when browse mode is on. * Speak level numbers during Read to End Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak level numbers during read to end setting between global and program. * Speak level numbers during Read to End - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak heading level numbers during read to end. Languages: * Speak language changes Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak language changes setting between global and program. * Speak language changes - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak language changes when browse mode is on. * Speak language changes during Read to End Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak language changes setting during read to end between global and program. * Speak language changes during Read to End - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak language changes when browse mode is on during read to end. * Switch synthesizer languages automatically Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the switch synthesizer languages automatically setting between global and program. * Switch synthesizer languages automatically - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will automatically change the synthesizer language when browse mode is on. Some synthesizers do not support this feature. Links: * Speak same page links Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak same links setting between global and program. * Speak same page links - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will distinguish links that go to the same page from links that do not when browse mode is on. * Speak visited links Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak visited links setting between global and program. * Speak visited links - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will distinguish links that have already been visited from links that have not when browse mode is on. * Speak during Read to End Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak links during read to end setting between global and program. * Speak during Read to End - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will announce links when browse mode is on during read to end. Lists: * Speak lists Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak lists setting between global and program. * Speak lists - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when lists are reached when browse mode is on. * Speak lists during Read to End Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak lists during read to end setting between global and program. * Speak lists during Read to End - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when lists are reached when browse mode is on during read to end. * Speak bullets Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak bullets setting between global and program. * Speak bullets - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will describe the type of bullets inside lists when browse mode is on. * Speak bullets during Read to End Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak bullets during read to end setting between global and program. * Speak bullets during Read to End - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will describe the type of bullets inside lists when browse mode is on during read to end. Long Descriptions: * Speak long descriptions Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak long descriptions setting between global and program. * Speak long descriptions - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when images have long descriptions when browse mode is on. * Speak long descriptions during Read to End Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak long descriptions during read to end setting between global and program. * Speak long descriptions during Read to End - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when images have long descriptions when browse mode is on during read to end. Miscellaneous: * Speak graphics with no alternative text Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak graphics with no alternative text setting between global and program. * Speak graphics with no alternative text - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak graphics with no alternative text or descriptions when browse mode is on. * Play sound for popup windows Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the play sound for popup windows setting between global and program. * Play sound for popup windows - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will play a sound when popup windows appear when browse mode is on. * Suspend page refreshes Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the suspend page refreshes setting between global and program. * Suspend page refreshes - Combo Box * Choose when Window-Eyes should stop web pages from refreshing. This setting only applies to Internet Explorer. * Verbosity hot key opens options for specific elements Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the verbosity hot key opens options for specific elements setting between global and program. * Verbosity hot key opens options for specific elements - Radio Button Group * When this setting is enabled, Window-Eyes will open the options for the browse mode element that has focus when the verbosity hot key is pressed. * Minimum line length for Text Next/Prior hot keys Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the minimum line length for Text Next/Prior hot keys setting between global and program. * Minimum line length for Text Next/Prior hot keys - Edit Box * Enter a number between 1 and 255 to set the minimum line length to move to when the next and prior text hot keys are pressed. * Number of consecutive lines for Text Next/Prior hot keys Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the number of consecutive lines for Text Next/Prior hot keys setting between global and program. * Number of consecutive lines for Text Next/Prior hot keys - Edit Box * Enter a number between 1 and 255 to set the number of consecutive lines to search for when the previous and next block of text hot keys are pressed. New Page Information 1: * Automatically Read Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the automatically read new page setting between global and program. * Automatically Read - Combo Box * Choose what Window-Eyes reads when a new page loads. * Speak number of access keys Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak number of access keys setting between global and program. * Speak number of access keys - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the number of access keys on the new page when it loads. * Speak number of acronyms/abbreviations Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak number of acronyms/abbreviations setting between global and program. * Speak number of acronyms/abbreviations - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the number of acronyms and abbreviations on the new page when it loads. * Speak number of anchors Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak number of anchors setting between global and program. * Speak number of anchors - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the number of anchors on the new page when it loads. * Speak number of block quotes Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak number of block quotes setting between global and program. * Speak number of block quotes - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the number of block quotes on the new page when it loads. * Speak number of flash objects Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak number of Flash objects setting between global and program. * Speak number of flash objects - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the number of Flash objects on the new page when it loads. * Speak number of forms Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak number of forms setting between global and program. * Speak number of forms - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the number of forms on the new page when it loads. * Speak number of frames Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak number of frames setting between global and program. * Speak number of frames - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the number of frames on the new page when it loads. * Speak number of headings Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak number of headings setting between global and program. * Speak number of headings - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the number of headings on the new page when it loads. * Speak number of languages Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak number of languages setting between global and program. * Speak number of languages - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the number of languages on the new page when it loads. New Page Information 2: * Speak number of lines Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak number of lines setting between global and program. * Speak number of lines - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the number of lines on the new page when it loads. * Speak number of links Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak number of links setting between global and program. * Speak number of links - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the number of links on the new page when it loads. * Speak number of lists Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak number of lists setting between global and program. * Speak number of lists - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the number of lists on the new page when it loads. * Speak number of long descriptions Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak number of long descriptions setting between global and program. * Speak number of long descriptions - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the number of long descriptions on the new page when it loads. * Speak status messages Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak status messages setting between global and program. * Speak status messages - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak status messages as the new page loads. * Speak number of paragraphs Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak number of paragraphs setting between global and program. * Speak number of paragraphs - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the number of paragraphs on the new page when it loads. * Speak number of objects Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak number of objects setting between global and program. * Speak number of objects - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the number of objects on the new page when it loads. * Speak refresh rate Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak refresh rate setting between global and program. * Speak refresh rate - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the refresh rate of the new page when it loads. * Speak number of tables Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak number of tables setting between global and program. * Speak number of tables - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the number of tables on the new page when it loads. * Speak number of landmarks Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak number of landmarks setting between global and program. * Speak number of landmarks - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the number of landmarks on the new page when it loads. Objects: * Speak type Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak type setting between global and program. * Speak type - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the object type when it is reached when browse mode is on. * Speak alternate text Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak alternate text setting between global and program. * Speak alternate text - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the object's alternate text if any exists when browse mode is on. * Speak during Read To End Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak during read to end setting between global and program. * Speak during Read To End - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when objects are reached when browse mode is on during read to end. Paragraphs: * Use smart paragraph mode Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the use smart paragraph setting between global and program. * Use smart paragraph mode - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will consider collections of elements with at least one line of read-only text to be paragraphs. * Speak blank lines in smart paragraph mode Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak blank lines in smart paragraph mode setting between global and program. * Speak blank lines in smart paragraph mode - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when blank lines are reached inside smart paragraphs when browse mode is on. * Speak paragraphs Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak paragraphs setting between global and program. * Speak paragraphs - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when paragraphs are reached when browse mode is on. * Speak paragraphs during Read to End Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak paragraphs during read to end setting between global and program. * Speak paragraphs during Read to End - Radio Button Group * When this option is reached, Window-Eyes will speak when paragraphs are reached when browse mode is on during read to end. Quotes: * Speak quotes Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak quotes setting between global and program. * Speak quotes - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when quotes are reached when browse mode is on. * Speak quotes during Read to End Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak quotes during read to end setting between global and program. * Speak quotes during Read to End - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when block quotes are reached when browse mode is on during read to end. Tables: * Speak tables Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak tables setting between global and program. * Speak tables - Combo Box * Choose when Window-Eyes announces tables when browse mode is on. * Speak table summary Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak table summary setting between global and program. * Speak table summary - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the summary at the beginning of the table when browse mode is on. * Speak table size Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak table size setting between global and program. * Speak table size - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak the size at the beginning of the table when browse mode is on. * Speak row grouping Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak row grouping setting between global and program. * Speak row grouping - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak row groups as they are reached inside tables when browse mode is on. * Speak merged cells Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak merged cells setting between global and program. * Speak merged cells - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak merged cells as they are reached inside tables when browse mode is on. * Override header attribute Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the override header attribute setting between global and program. * Override header attribute - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will read only the header attribute for a given cell instead of the actual table header when browse mode is on. * Default header Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the default header setting between global and program. * Default header - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes reads table headers when browse mode is on. * Speak tables during Read to End Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak tables during read to end setting between global and program. * Speak tables during Read to End - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will speak when tables are reached when browse mode is on during read to end. Excel: Cell Information: * Speak position - Combo Box * Choose when Window-Eyes speaks the position in Excel spreadsheets. * Affects cells - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks information about changes that affect other cells. * Auto filter - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks auto filter information. * Border - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks border information. * Clipped - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks information about clipped text. * Comment - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks comments. * Conditional formatting - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks conditional formatting information. * Contents - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the contents of the focused cell. * Formula - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks information about formulas. * Hyperlink - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks information about hyperlinks. * Input message - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks input messages. * Merged - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks information about merged cells. * Number format - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks number formatting information. * Orientation - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks information about text orientation. * Overlaps - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks information about overlapping cells. * Shrunk - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks information about shrunk text. * Speak position before contents - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the position before the cell contents. * Wrapped - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks information about wrapped text. Miscellaneous: * When a worksheet gets focused, speak the worksheet name - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the name of the worksheet when it gains focus. * When a worksheet gets focused, speak the workbook name - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the name of the workbook when it gains focus. * Measurement - Combo Box * Choose which measurement units Window-Eyes will use when it speaks the position in Excel spreadsheets. * Automatically dock toolbars - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes will automatically dock the Excel toolbars. This option only applies to Microsoft Office 2003 and earlier. Selection: * When cells are selected, speak both new corners - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks both corner cells when cells are selected. * When cells are selected, speak numbers of rows and columns - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the number of rows and columns when cells are selected. Summary: * Speak Summary Items Should Include Workbook name - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the workbook name when the speak summary hot key is pressed. * Speak Summary Items Should Include Worksheet name - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the worksheet name when the speak summary hot key is pressed. * Speak Summary Items Should Include Worksheet count - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the worksheet count when the speak summary hot key is pressed. * Speak Summary Items Should Include Comment count - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the comment count when the speak summary hot key is pressed. * Speak Summary Items Should Include Hyperlink count - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the hyperlink count when the speak summary hot key is pressed. * Speak Summary Items Should Include Object count - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the object count when the speak summary hot key is pressed. * Speak Summary Items Should Include Chart count - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the chart count when the speak summary hot key is pressed. * Speak Summary Items Should Include Position - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the position in the worksheet when the speak summary hot key is pressed. * Item Counts are Relative To - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you set if the item counts Window-Eyes reports will be relative to the current worksheet or the entire workbook. Power Point: Playback: * When Playing a Slide Show Start at the previous position - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes will start at the previously saved position of the slide in the browse mode buffer when playing a slide show. * When Playing a Slide Show Include slide notes - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes will add any slide notes to the bottom of the browse mode buffer when playing a slide show. * Speak Effects - Combo Box * Choose when Window-Eyes will speak slide effects. Slide Pane: * Speak Object size - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes will speak the width and height of the focused object. * Speak Overlapping objects - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes will speak when objects overlap one another. * Speak Object position - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the object's position relative to the top and left sides of the slide. * Speak Text overflow within object - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when the amount of text inside an object will not fit. * Speak Object overflow within slide - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when the number of objects in a slide will not fit. * Measurement - Combo Box * Choose which measurement units Window-Eyes will use when it speaks the position in PowerPoint slides. Word: Columns: * Speak columns - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when columns are reached in Word documents. * Speak columns during Read to End - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when columns are reached in Word documents during read to end. Fields: * Speak fields - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when fields are reached in Word documents. * Speak field count - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the number of fields on the current line in Word documents. * Speak field count during Read to End - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the number of fields on the current line in Word documents during read to end. Headers Footers: * Speak headers - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when headers are reached in Word documents. * Speak headers during Read to End - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when headers are reached in Word documents during read to end. * Speak footers - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when footers are reached in Word documents. * Speak footers during Read to End - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when footers are reached in Word documents during read to end. * Speak Page Numbers - Combo Box * Choose how Window-Eyes speaks page numbers in Word documents. * Speak page numbers during Read to End - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks page numbers in Word documents during read to end. Miscellaneous: * Speak auto correct - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when text has been automatically corrected in Word documents. * Speak borders and shading - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when text with borders and shading is reached in Word documents. * Speak smart tags - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when smart tags are reached in Word documents. * Speak styles - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when text styles change in Word documents. * Automatically dock toolbars - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes will automatically dock the Word toolbars. This option only applies to Office 2003 and earlier. * Enable Enhanced Support for Current Document - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes uses its enhanced reading support for the current Word document. Pictures Objects: * Speak pictures/objects - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when pictures and objects are reached in Word documents. * Speak pictures/objects during Read to End - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when pictures and objects are reached in Word documents during read to end. References: * Speak references - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when references are reached in Word documents. * Speak reference count - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the number of references on the current line in Word documents. * Speak reference count during Read to End - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the number of references on the current line in Word documents during read to end. Revisions: * Speak revisions - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when revisions are reached in Word documents. * Speak author - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the revisions' authors when revisions are reached in Word documents. * Speak date - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the revisions' dates when revisions are reached in Word documents. * Speak revision count - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the number of revisions on the current line in Word documents. * Speak revision count during Read to End - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the number of revisions on the current line in Word documents during read to end. Sections: * Speak sections - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when sections are reached in Word documents. * Speak sections during Read to End - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when sections are reached in Word documents during read to end. Spelling Grammar: * Speak spelling errors - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when spelling errors are reached in Word documents. * Speak spelling error count - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the number of spelling errors on the current line in Word documents. * Speak spelling error count during Read to End - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the number of spelling errors on the current line in Word documents during read to end. * Speak grammar errors - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when grammar errors are reached in Word documents. * Speak grammar error count - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the number of grammatical errors on the current line in Word documents. * Speak grammar error count during Read to End - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the number of grammatical errors on the current line in Word documents during read to end. Tables: * Speak tables - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when tables are reached in Word documents. * Speak tables during Read to End - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks when tables are reached in Word documents during read to end. * Speak table cells - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes speaks the coordinates and text orientation of table cells in Word documents. Dictionaries This group of settings allows you to manipulate each of the Window-Eyes exception dictionaries. For a detailed explanation about working with Window-Eyes dictionaries, consult the "Pronunciation Dictionaries" section found earlier in this user's guide. Status: * Character Dictionaries - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you turn the Window-Eyes character dictionaries on and off. * Include Program Dictionary - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not to include the character dictionary for the currently focused program in the character dictionaries list view. * Character Dictionary List - List View * This list displays all of the character dictionaries that can be modified. * Color Dictionaries - Combo Box * Choose which colors Window-Eyes speaks. if set to "off," colors in the dictionary will be ignored. If set to "exact only," Window-Eyes will only voice colors if they completely match color entries in the dictionary. If set to "exact or closest," which is the default, Window-Eyes will use the color that most closely matches a dictionary entry; E.G. "shade of red," when voicing colors. * Include Program Dictionary - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not to include the color dictionary for the currently focused program in the color dictionaries list view. * Color Dictionary List: * - List View * This list displays all of the color dictionaries that can be modified. * Exception Dictionaries - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you turn the Window-Eyes exception dictionaries on and off. * Include Program Dictionary - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not to include the exception dictionary for the currently focused program in the exception dictionaries list view. * Exception Dictionary List: * - List View * This list displays the exception dictionaries that can be modified. * Graphic Dictionaries - Combo Box * Choose which graphics Window-Eyes speaks. if set to "off," all graphics are ignored. If set to "dictionary only," which is the default, Window-Eyes will only speak when it encounters graphics for which associated graphic labels exist. When set to "on," all graphics will be announced when encountered; graphics with associated labels be spoken, and all others will be announced as "graphic." When set to "graphic only," all graphics will be announced as "graphic" when encountered, even if graphic labels have been associated. * Include Program Dictionary - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not to include the graphic dictionary for the currently focused program in the graphic dictionaries list view. * Graphic Dictionary List: * - List View * This list displays all of the graphic dictionaries that can be modified. * Key Label Dictionaries - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you turn the Window-Eyes key label dictionaries on and off. * Include Program Dictionary - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not to include the key label dictionary for the currently focused program in the key label dictionaries list view. * Key Label Dictionary List: * - List View * This list displays all of the key label dictionaries that can be modified. Character: * Original - Edit Box * Enter the character whose pronunciation you want to change. * Replacement - Edit Box * Enter the text Window-Eyes will speak instead of the original character name. * Font - Edit Box * This edit box describes the font, if any, of the character being defined. * Include Font - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not this character definition only applies when the font is also present. * Dictionary Contents - List View * Choose an existing character entry to modify. * Update Entry - Button * This button updates the currently selected character entry. * Remove Entry - Button * This button removes the currently selected character entry. * Remove All Entries - Button * This button removes all of the entries in the selected character dictionary. * Show Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the active character dictionary between global and program. * Dictionary - Edit Box * Enter the name of the character dictionary. * Browse... - Button * This button allows you to browse for an existing character dictionary. Color: * Original Background - Button * This button tells Window-Eyes to use the background color that was underneath the mouse before the Window-Eyes dialog was opened. * Current Background - Button * This button tells Window-Eyes to use the background color that is currently underneath the mouse. * Original Foreground - Button * This button tells Window-Eyes to use the foreground color that was underneath the mouse before the Window-Eyes dialog was opened. * Current Foreground - Button * This button tells Window-Eyes to use the foreground color that is currently underneath the mouse. * Description - Edit Box * Enter a description for the color. * R - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 255 to set the intensity of red to use for this color entry. * G - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 255 to set the intensity of green to use for this color entry. * B - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 255 to set the intensity of blue to use for this color entry. * Dictionary Contents - List View * Choose an existing color entry to modify. * Update Entry - Button * This button updates the currently selected color entry. * Remove Entry - Button * This button removes the currently selected color entry. * Remove All Entries - Button * This button removes all of the color entries from the active color dictionary. * Show Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the active color dictionary between global and program. * Dictionary - Edit Box * Enter a name for the color dictionary. * Browse... - Button * This button allows you to browse for an existing color dictionary. Exception: * Original - Edit Box * Enter the word whose pronunciation you want to change. * Replacement - Edit Box * Enter the word's correct pronunciation. * Dictionary Contents - List View * Choose an existing exception entry to modify. * Update Entry - Button * Updates the currently selected exception entry. * Remove Entry - Button * This button removes the currently selected exception entry. * Remove All Entries - Button * This button removes all of the exception entries from the active dictionary. * Show Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the active exception dictionary between global and program. * Dictionary - Edit Box * Enter a name for the exception dictionary. * Browse... - Button * This button allows you to browse for an existing exception dictionary. Graphic: * Speech Label - Edit Box * Enter the text that Window-Eyes will speak when this graphic is encountered. * Silence Graphic - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes will completely ignore this graphic from speaking. * Exclude from Lines - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes will speak this graphic when navigating by line with the keyboard. * Braille Label - Edit Box * Enter the text that Window-Eyes will send to the braille display when this graphic is encountered. * Silence Graphic - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes will completely ignore this graphic from being brailed. * Dictionary Contents - List View * Choose a graphic entry to modify. * Update Entry - Button * This button updates the currently selected graphic entry. * Remove Entry - Button * This button removes the currently selected graphic entry. * Remove All Entries - Button * This button removes all of the graphic entries from the active graphic dictionary. * Show Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the active graphic dictionary between global and program. * Dictionary - Edit Box * Enter a name for the graphic dictionary. * Browse... - Button * This button allows you to browse for an existing graphic dictionary. Key Label: * Capture Key - Button * This button allows you to capture the key to be relabeled. * Original: - Edit Box * This edit box describes the key to be labeled. * Replacement: - Edit Box * Enter the text Window-Eyes speaks when the key is pressed. * Dictionary Contents - List View * Choose an existing key label entry to modify. * Update Entry - Button * This button updates the currently selected key label entry. * Remove Entry - Button * This button removes the currently selected key label entry. * Remove All Entries - Button * This button removes all of the key label entries. * Show Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the active key label dictionary between global and program. * Dictionary - Edit Box * Enter a name for the key label dictionary. * Browse... - Button * This button allows you to browse for an existing key label dictionary. User Windows: This group of settings allows you to set up user, hyperactive, and float windows. For more information about these features, see KB 1003 in the GW Micro support knowledge base at http://www.gwmicro.com/kb/. Standard: Status: * Windows: - List View * Choose a standard user window to modify. * Show Properties - Button * This button displays the properties for the selected user window. Properties: * Current Window - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 49 to set the ID of the user window you want to configure. * Status - Combo Box * Choose the speaking status of the user window. * Comment - Edit Box * Enter a comment describing the purpose of the currently selected user window. * Match Any Foreground Color - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not the currently selected user window speaks for any foreground color. * Match Any Background Color - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not the currently selected user window speaks for any background color. * Enter Window Attributes... - Button * Choose the foreground and background colors which will cause the currently selected user window to speak. * Auto Determine Highlight Color - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes automatically determines the highlight color for the currently selected user window. * Enter Highlight Attributes... - Button * Choose the highlight attributes for the currently selected user window. * Window to Chain Read: - Combo Box * Choose a user window that Window-Eyes will read after it speaks the one that is currently selected. * Highlight Status - Combo Box * Choose how the currently selected user window tracks and speaks moving highlights. * Speak and Spell - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes will spell the contents of the currently selected user window after it has been spoken. * Copy Settings from Window... - Button * This button allows you to copy the settings from another user window into the one which is currently selected. Coordinates: * Current Window - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 49 to set the user window whose coordinates you want to modify. * Left Float Position - Combo Box * When the active user window's status is set to Float, choose how its left edge behaves. * Left Value - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 2000 to set the left boundary, in pixels, from the edge of the active window that is specified by the Left Offset radio buttons for the user window. * Left String - Edit Box * Enter a string of text to watch for when the active user window's status is set to Float and the window is configured to watch for a string. * Left Offset From - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you set whether the number of pixels you specify above for the left boundary of the user window will be offset from the left or right edge of the active window. * Top Float Position - Combo Box * When the active user window's status is set to Float, choose how its top edge behaves. * Top Value - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 2000 to set the top boundary, in pixels, from the edge of the active window that is specified by the Top Offset radio buttons for the user window. * Top String - Edit Box * Enter a string of text to watch for when the active user window's status is set to Float and the window is configured to watch for a string. * Top Offset From - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you set whether the number of pixels you specify above for the top boundary of the user window will be offset from the top or bottom edge of the active window. * Right Float Position - Combo Box * When the active user window's status is set to Float, choose how its right edge behaves. * Right Value - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 2000 to set the right boundary, in pixels, from the edge of the active window that is specified by the Right Offset radio buttons for the user window. * Right String - Edit Box * Enter a string of text to watch for when the active user window's status is set to Float and the window is configured to watch for a string. * Right Offset From - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you set whether the number of pixels you specify above for the right boundary of the user window will be offset from the right or left edge of the active window. * Bottom Float Position - Combo Box * When the active user window's status is set to Float, choose how its bottom edge behaves. * Bottom Value - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 2000 to set the bottom boundary, in pixels, from the edge of the active window that is specified by the Bottom Offset radio buttons for the user window. * Bottom String - Edit Box * Enter a string of text to watch for when the active user window's status is set to Float and the window is configured to watch for a string. * Bottom Offset From - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you set whether the number of pixels you specify above for the bottom boundary of the user window will be offset from the bottom or top edge of the active window. * Copy Settings from Window... - Button * This button allows you to copy the coordinate settings from another user window into the one which is currently selected. Hyperactive: Status: * Windows - List View * Choose a hyperactive window to modify. * Show Properties - Button * This button displays the properties for the currently selected hyperactive window. * Status Messages - Combo Box * Set the status of hyperactive windows. When this option is set to "off," hyperactive windows will be disabled. If set to "messages off," hyperactive windows will be active, but Window-Eyes will not announce when they are triggered. If set to "messages on," hyperactive windows will be active, and Window-Eyes will announce when they are triggered. Properties: * Current Window - Edit Box * Enter a letter between A and Z to set the hyperactive window whose properties you want to modify. * Hyperactive - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not the currently selected hyperactive window is enabled. * Speech Interrupt - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not activity within the hyperactive window interrupts speech. * Comment - Edit Box * Enter a comment to describe the purpose of the currently selected hyperactive window. * Trigger - Combo Box * Choose the type of activity that will trigger the currently selected hyperactive window. * Trigger - Button * This button allows you to provide more specific information for the hyperactive window's trigger. * First Command - Combo Box * Choose the first action Window-Eyes will perform when the hyperactive window is triggered. * First Command Information - Button * This button allows you to provide additional information for the first command. * Second Command - Combo Box * Choose the second action Window-Eyes will perform when the hyperactive window is triggered. * Second Command Information - Button * This button allows you to provide additional information for the second command. * Third Command - Combo Box * Choose the third action Window-Eyes will perform when the hyperactive window is triggered. * Third Command Information - Button * This button allows you to provide additional information for the third command. * Copy Definition from Window... - Button * This button allows you to copy an existing hyperactive window definition into the one which is currently selected. Coordinates: * Current Window - Edit Box * Enter a letter between A and Z to set the hyperactive window whose coordinates you want to adjust. * Left - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 2000 to set the left boundary, in pixels, from the edge of the active window that is specified by the Left Offset radio buttons for the hyperactive window. * Left Offset From - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you set whether the number of pixels you specify above for the left boundary of the hyperactive window will be offset from the left or right edge of the active window. * Top - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 2000 to set the top boundary, in pixels, from the edge of the active window that is specified by the Top Offset radio buttons for the hyperactive window. * Top Offset From - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you set whether the number of pixels you specify above for the top boundary of the hyperactive window will be offset from the top or bottom edge of the active window. * Right - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 2000 to set the right boundary, in pixels, from the edge of the active window that is specified by the Right Offset radio buttons for the hyperactive window. * Right Offset From - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you set whether the number of pixels you specify above for the right boundary of the hyperactive window will be offset from the right or left edge of the active window. * Bottom - Edit Box * Enter a number between 0 and 2000 to set the bottom boundary, in pixels, from the edge of the active window that is specified by the Bottom Offset radio buttons for the hyperactive window. * Bottom Offset From - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you set whether the number of pixels you specify above for the bottom boundary of the hyperactive window will be offset from the bottom or top edge of the active window. * Copy Coordinates from Window... - Button * This button allows you to copy the coordinate settings from another hyperactive window into the one which is currently selected. Miscellaneous: * Speak Windows Toggle Scope Global/Program - Button * This button toggles the speak windows setting between global and program. * Speak Windows - Radio Button Group * This group of radio buttons lets you turn speak windows on and off. Even if speak windows are off, Window-Eyes will still speak when cursor keys and hot keys are pressed. * Use Clip Boundaries with Mouse - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled and if the mouse is in the middle of a clip when setting user window boundaries, Window-Eyes will use the top-left edge of the clip instead of the mouse's exact position. Otherwise, if the mouse is in the middle of a clip when setting user window boundaries, Window-Eyes will use the mouse's exact position instead of the top-left edge of the clip. * Show User Window Outline - Radio Button Group * When this option is enabled, Window-Eyes will display the area making up the boundaries of user and hyperactive windows in an inverse color on the screen whenever they are activated. Association: This group of settings allows you to view, create, and remove set file associations. Current Association: * Set File - Edit Box * Enter the name for the active set file. * Association - Combo Box * This combo box lets you determine how the Set file should be associated to the current program. If you choose Title, the Set file will load when the text in the program's title bar matches what is present when you configure this association. If you choose by Class, then Window-Eyes will load the Set file when the window class of the program to which you are associating gains focus. If you choose None, Window-Eyes will not automatically associate the Set file to the active program. * Save and Associate - Button * This button causes Window-Eyes to create the set file specified above if it does not already exist along with the type of program association, if any. Program Information: * Associations - List View * This list view displays all of the set file associations for the program which was active before the Window-Eyes control panel was opened. * Remove - Button * This button removes the selected set file association from the program which was active before the Window-Eyes control panel was opened. * Remove All - Button * This button removes all set file associations for the program which was active before the Window-Eyes control panel was opened. * Executable Name - Edit Box * This edit box contains the executable filename of the program which was active before the Window-Eyes control panel was opened. * Module Name - Edit Box * This edit box contains the module name for the active window of the program which was active before the Window-Eyes control panel was opened. * Window Title - Edit Box * This edit box contains the title of the program which was active before the Window-Eyes control panel was opened. * Class - Edit Box * This edit box displays the class name for the active window of the program which was active before the Window-Eyes control panel was opened. Devices: This group of settings lets you configure the synthesizer and/or Braille display to which Window-Eyes will send its output. Synthesizers: * Synthesizers: - List View * Choose a synthesizer to activate from this list, and press Enter to accept the change. Window-Eyes will then open a dialog which prompts you to either keep or revert the change you just made. If you press the "Keep" button, the new selection will remain. If you click "Revert," the synthesizer will change back to its previous value. If you do nothing for fifteen seconds, Window-Eyes will automatically revert the change back to the synthesizer you were using before, and the dialog will close. The automatic synthesizer reversion is useful if your new synthesizer is not installed or connected properly and ensures you still have usable speech. * Ports - List View * if the synthesizer requires it, choose the communication port to which the synthesizer is connected. * Baud Rate - Combo Box * if the synthesizer requires it, choose the baud rate to use. * Data Bits - Combo Box * if the synthesizer requires it, choose the number of data bits to use. * Stop Bits - Combo Box * if the synthesizer requires it, choose the number of stop bits to use. * Parity - Combo Box * if the synthesizer requires it, choose the type of parity to use. * Flow Control - Combo Box * if the synthesizer requires it, choose the flow control, sometimes referred to as handshaking, to use. * Voices - List View * if the synthesizer requires it, choose a voice to activate for the selected synthesizer. * Sound Card: - Combo Box * If a software synthesizer is selected, choose a sound card through which Window-Eyes will speak. * Remember the speech settings for this synthesizer when switching. - Check Box * This check box toggles whether or not Window-Eyes will remember specific settings, such as pitch, tone, rate, and volume, for the selected synthesizer. * Use this synthesizer as the backup synthesizer. - Check Box * Window-Eyes will use the selected synthesizer as a backup if the primary one stops speaking. * C = Activate - Button * This button activates the synthesizer changes. * Command Line Startup - Edit Box * This edit box contains the command line parameter to send Window-Eyes to force it to load the selected synthesizer when it starts. Braille Displays: * Displays - List View * Choose a braille display to activate from this list, and press Enter to accept the change. Window-Eyes will then open a dialog which prompts you to either keep or revert the change you just made. Press the "Keep" button to accept the new selection. Click "Revert" to cause Window-Eyes to activate the Braille display which was previously active. If you do nothing for fifteen seconds, Window-Eyes will automatically revert back to the display you were using before. The automatic Braille display reversion is useful if your new display is not installed or connected properly and ensures that you still have usable braille. * Ports - List View * Choose the communication port to which the braille display is connected. * Virtualization - Radio Button Group * If you intend to use your computer remotely through Microsoft Remote Desktop or Citrix Xenworks, this group of radio buttons lets you choose the type of virtualization to use. You can then use your Braille display from the machine that remotely connects to this computer. * C = Activate - Button * This button activates the braille display changes. * Command Line Startup - Edit Box * This edit box contains the command line parameter to send Window-Eyes to force it to load the selected braille display when it starts. Profiles: This group of settings allows you to add, modify, remove, and switch to, all of the Window-Eyes profiles available on your computer. For more information on how Window-Eyes profiles work, see article 1124 on the GW Micro Support knowledge base at http://www.gwmicro.com/kb/. Set Active Profile: * Available Profiles: - List View * Choose a Window-Eyes profile to activate. * Current Profile: - Edit Box * This edit box displays the name of the active Window-Eyes profile. * Current Profile Folder: - Edit Box * This edit box displays the name of the folder containing the active Window-Eyes profile. * Current Profile Path: - Edit Box * This edit box displays the full path to the active Window-Eyes profile. * Activate - Button * This button activates the selected profile. * Explore Profile Folder - Button * This button opens the selected profile folder in Windows Explorer. Manage Profiles * Profile Name to Add: - Edit Box * Enter the name of the Window-Eyes profile to add. * Add Profile - Button * This button adds the selected profile. * Add/Update Using Settings From: - List View * Choose an existing Window-Eyes profile from which you want to add or update settings. * Current Profiles: - List View * Choose the Window-Eyes profile to which you want settings added or updated. * Update Selected Profile - Button * This button updates the selected Window-Eyes profile. * Delete Selected Profile - Button * This button deletes the selected Window-Eyes profile. Hot Key Reference The following section lists all of the available Window-Eyes hot keys along with their default assignments. Default Layout Browse Mode Description Key to Press Link Next L Link Prior Shift-L Button Next B Button Prior Shift-B Check Box Next X Check Box Prior Shift-X Combo Box Next C Combo Box Prior Shift-C Control Next F Control Prior Shift-F Edit Box Next E Edit Box Prior Shift-E Radio Button Next R Radio Button Prior Shift-R Landmark Next Semicolon Landmark Prior Shift-Semicolon Specified Control Next Slash Specified Control Prior Shift-Slash Text Next N Text Prior Shift-N Graphic Next G Graphic Prior Shift-G Frame Next M Frame Prior Shift-M Different Line Next D Different Line Prior Shift-D Visited Link Next V Visited Link Prior Shift-V Anchor Next A Anchor Prior Shift-A Fieldset Next Undefined Fieldset Prior Undefined Form Next Undefined Form Prior Undefined Heading Next H Heading Prior Shift-H Paragraph Next P Paragraph Prior Shift-P Block Quote Next Q Block Quote Prior Shift-Q List Next S List Prior Shift-S List Item Next I List Item Prior Shift-I Table Next T Table Prior Shift-T Enter Table Mode Control-Numpad-Plus Exit Table Mode Control-Numpad-Minus Exit All Table Modes Control-Shift-Underline Cell Right Insert-Right Arrow Cell Left Insert-Left Arrow Cell Up Insert-Up Arrow Cell Down Insert-Down Arrow End of Row Control-Insert-Right Arrow Beginning of Row Control-Insert-Left Arrow Top of Column Control-Insert-Up Arrow Bottom of Column Control-Insert-Down Arrow Header Rotor Control-Shift-H Place Marker Dialog Control-Shift-K Next Place Marker K Prior Place Marker Shift-K Jump to Place Marker J Element Properties Insert-E Page Navigation Insert-Tab Previous Position Insert-R Auto Load Insert-A Refresh Rotor Alt-Shift-M Browse Mode Control-Shift-A Form Interaction Control-Slash Cursor Hot Keys Description Key to Press Character Prior Undefined Character Control-Numpad-Left Arrow Character Next Undefined Word Prior Undefined Word Control-Numpad-Right Arrow Word Next Undefined Line Prior Undefined Line Control-Numpad-Center Line Next Undefined Sentence Prior Undefined Sentence Control-Numpad-Down Arrow Sentence Next Undefined Paragraph Prior Undefined Paragraph Control-Numpad-Up Arrow Paragraph Next Undefined Top To Cursor Undefined Cursor To Bottom Undefined Left To Cursor Undefined Cursor To Right Undefined Unicode/Attribute/Font Control-Numpad-Delete Position Control-Numpad-Plus Signal Cursor Position Toggle Undefined Miscellaneous Hot Keys Description Key to Press Read Active Window Control-Shift-W Speak Summary Control-Shift-S Title/Status of Current App Control-Shift-T Progress Or Scroll Bar Control-Insert-B Status Line Control-Insert-S Last Flash and Tooltip Control-Insert-T Highlighted Block Control-Shift-M Read To End Control-Shift-R Key Describer Insert-1 Program Help Control-Shift-Question Mark Field Data Control-Shift-D Field Name Control-Shift-N Highlight Undefined Time/Date Insert-T Battery Level Insert-Q Sys Tray Insert-S Entire Screen Undefined Menu Bar Undefined Default Button Numpad-Delete Any Line Undefined Focus Title Undefined Verbosity Dialog Insert-V Menu Control-\ Edit Dictionaries Control-Shift-E Bypass Insert-B Voice Down Control-Alt-Down Arrow Voice Up Control-Alt-Up Arrow Voice Selection Rotor Control-Alt-Right Arrow Voice Parameter Rotor Control-Alt-Left Arrow Attribute Changes Toggle Undefined Numbers Rotor Insert-6 Keyboard Voice Rotor Insert-2 Line Filter Status Rotor Insert-3 Capitalization Alert Rotor Insert-4 Format Alert Toggle Insert-5 Set Format Alert Offset Undefined Auto Label Graphics Insert-G Label Field Name Control-Insert-F Set Highlight Color Undefined Highlight Rotor Undefined Silence Undefined Speak All Toggle Insert-A Toggle All Voices (current program) Undefined Toggle All Voices (global) Undefined Auto Detect Cursor Control-Insert-C Switch Language Control-Windows-L Reclass Insert-R Redraw Insert-\ Load Set Undefined Save Set Undefined Reload App Undefined App Status Rotor Insert-7 Shutdown Window-Eyes Control-Insert-F4 Dump OSM Control-Shift-Insert-D Mouse Hot Keys Description Key to Press Character Prior Numpad-Left Arrow Character Control-Insert-Numpad-Center Character Next Numpad-Right Arrow Word Prior Insert-Numpad-Left Arrow Word Insert-Numpad-Center Word Next Insert-Numpad-Right Arrow Line Prior Numpad-Up Arrow Line Numpad-Center Line Next Numpad-Down Arrow Sentence Prior Insert-Numpad-End Sentence Insert-Numpad-Down Arrow Sentence Next Insert-Numpad-Page Down Paragraph Prior Control-Insert-Numpad-End Paragraph Control-Insert-Numpad-Down Arrow Paragraph Next Control-Insert-Numpad-Page Down Icon Prior Undefined Icon Undefined Icon Next Undefined Clip Prior Insert-Numpad-Home Clip Insert-Numpad-Up Arrow Clip Next Insert-Numpad-Page Up Single Click Left Button Numpad-Slash Single Click Middle Button Undefined Single Click Right Button Numpad-Star Double Click Left Button Undefined Double Click Middle Button Undefined Double Click Right Button Undefined Toggle Left Button Insert-Numpad-Slash Toggle Middle Button Undefined Toggle Right Button Insert-Numpad-Star Top Left Numpad-Home Top Right Numpad-Page Up Bottom Left Numpad-End Bottom Right Numpad-Page Down Mouse Up Control-Shift-Numpad-Up Arrow Mouse Down Control-Shift-Numpad-Down Arrow Mouse Left Control-Shift-Numpad-Left Arrow Mouse Right Control-Shift-Numpad-Right Arrow Beginning of Line Alt-Insert-Numpad-Home End of Line Alt-Insert-Numpad-End Top to Mouse Alt-Insert-Numpad-Up Arrow Mouse to Bottom Alt-Insert-Numpad-Down Arrow Left to Mouse Alt-Insert-Numpad-Left Arrow Mouse to Right Alt-Insert-Numpad-Right Arrow Position Control-Insert-Numpad-Plus Unicode/Attribute/Font Control-Insert-Numpad-Delete Search Control-Shift-F Continue Search Insert-F Boundary Rotor Control-Shift-B Drag and Drop Insert-Numpad-Delete WE/Mouse Toggle Numpad-Minus Mouse to Focus Insert-Numpad-Plus Cursor to Mouse Numpad-Plus Sync WE and Mouse Insert-Numpad-Minus Route Mouse to Window Undefined Describe Pointer Undefined Capture Pointer Undefined Up Down Speak Alt-Numpad-Center Route to Specified Highlight Undefined Attribute Prior Undefined Attribute Next Undefined Control Prior Undefined Control Next Undefined Horizontal Lock Undefined Vertical Lock Undefined Office Hot Keys Description Key to Press Line Next Alt-Period Line Prior Alt-Comma Spelling/Grammar Next Alt-Apostrophe Spelling/Grammar Prior Alt-Semicolon Revision Next Alt-Right Bracket Revision Prior Alt-Left Bracket Cell Right Insert-Right Arrow Cell Left Insert-Left Arrow Cell Up Insert-Up Arrow Cell Down Insert-Down Arrow To First Cell of Row Control-Insert-Left Arrow To Last Cell of Row Control-Insert-Right Arrow To First Cell of Column Control-Insert-Up Arrow To Last Cell of Column Control-Insert-Down Arrow To Top Left Cell Insert-Home To Bottom Right Cell Insert-End Row Shift-Insert-Down Arrow From Row Start Shift-Insert-Left Arrow Row To End Shift-Insert-Right Arrow First Row Cell Shift-Insert-Up Arrow Column Alt-Insert-Down Arrow From Column Start Alt-Insert-Left Arrow Column To End Alt-Insert-Right Arrow First Column Cell Alt-Insert-Up Arrow Current Cell Insert-Numpad-Enter Element Properties Insert-E Page Navigation Insert-Tab Headers and Totals Alt-Shift-H Monitor Cells Alt-Shift-M Monitor Cell 1 Alt-Shift-! Monitor Cell 2 Alt-Shift-@ Monitor Cell 3 Alt-Shift-# Monitor Cell 4 Alt-Shift-$ Monitor Cell 5 Alt-Shift-% Monitor Cell 6 Alt-Shift-^ Monitor Cell 7 Alt-Shift-& Monitor Cell 8 Alt-Shift-Star Monitor Cell 9 Alt-Shift-( Monitor Cell 10 Alt-Shift-) Any Monitor Cell Alt-Shift-A Read Total Cell Alt-Shift-T Read Comment Alt-Shift-C Read Formula Alt-Shift-F Previous Cell Alt-Shift-P Outlook Calendar Insert-C User Window Hot Keys Description Key to Press Window 0 Alt-0 Window 1 Alt-1 Window 2 Alt-2 Window 3 Alt-3 Window 4 Alt-4 Window 5 Alt-5 Window 6 Alt-6 Window 7 Alt-7 Window 8 Alt-8 Window 9 Alt-9 Window 10 Undefined Window 11 Undefined Window 12 Undefined Window 13 Undefined Window 14 Undefined Window 15 Undefined Window 16 Undefined Window 17 Undefined Window 18 Undefined Window 19 Undefined Read Any Window Undefined Read Active User Window Undefined Select User Window Insert-F3 User Window Coordinates Insert-F4 User Window Top Left Insert-F5 User Window Bottom Right Insert-F6 User Window Definition Insert-F7 User Window Status Undefined Read User Window Coordinates Undefined Set User Window Color Undefined Select Hyperactive Window Control-Shift-F3 Hyperactive Window Coordinates Control-Shift-F4 Hyperactive Window Top Left Control-Shift-F5 Hyperactive Window Bottom Right Control-Shift-F6 Hyperactive Window Definition Control-Shift-F7 Read Hyperactive Window Coordinates Undefined Hyperactive Windows Rotor Control-Shift-F8 Laptop Layout Browse Mode Description Key to Press Link Next L Link Prior Shift-L Button Next B Button Prior Shift-B Check Box Next X Check Box Prior Shift-X Combo Box Next C Combo Box Prior Shift-C Control Next F Control Prior Shift-F Edit Box Next E Edit Box Prior Shift-E Radio Button Next R Radio Button Prior Shift-R Landmark Next Semicolon Landmark Prior Shift-Semicolon Specified Control Next Slash Specified Control Prior Shift-Slash Text Next N Text Prior Shift-N Graphic Next G Graphic Prior Shift-G Frame Next M Frame Prior Shift-M Different Line Next D Different Line Prior Shift-D Visited Link Next V Visited Link Prior Shift-V Anchor Next A Anchor Prior Shift-A Fieldset Next Undefined Fieldset Prior Undefined Form Next Undefined Form Prior Undefined Heading Next H Heading Prior Shift-H Paragraph Next P Paragraph Prior Shift-P Block Quote Next Q Block Quote Prior Shift-Q List Next S List Prior Shift-S List Item Next I List Item Prior Shift-I Table Next T Table Prior Shift-T Enter Table Mode Control-Numpad-Plus Exit Table Mode Control-Numpad-Minus Exit All Table Modes Control-Shift-Underline Cell Right Insert-Right Arrow Cell Left Insert-Left Arrow Cell Up Insert-Up Arrow Cell Down Insert-Down Arrow End of Row Control-Insert-Right Arrow Beginning of Row Control-Insert-Left Arrow Top of Column Control-Insert-Up Arrow Bottom of Column Control-Insert-Down Arrow Header Rotor Control-Shift-H Place Marker Dialog Control-Shift-K Next Place Marker K Prior Place Marker Shift-K Jump to Place Marker J Element Properties Insert-E Page Navigation Insert-Tab Previous Position Insert-R Auto Load Insert-A Refresh Rotor Alt-Shift-M Browse Mode Control-Shift-A Form Interaction Control-Slash Cursor Hot Keys Description Key to Press Character Prior Control-Capslock-M Character Control-Capslock-Comma Character Next Control-Capslock-Period Word Prior Control-Capslock-J Word Control-Capslock-K Word Next Control-Capslock-L Line Prior Control-Capslock-U Line Control-Capslock-I Line Next Control-Capslock-O Sentence Prior Alt-Capslock-J Sentence Alt-Capslock-K Sentence Next Alt-Capslock-L Paragraph Prior Alt-Capslock-U Paragraph Alt-Capslock-I Paragraph Next Alt-Capslock-O Top To Cursor Shift-Capslock-I Cursor To Bottom Shift-Capslock-K Left To Cursor Shift-Capslock-J Cursor To Right Shift-Capslock-L Unicode/Attribute/Font Control-Delete Position Control-Equals Signal Cursor Position Toggle Undefined Miscellaneous Hot Keys Description Key to Press Read Active Window Control-Shift-W Speak Summary Control-Shift-S Title/Status of Current App Control-Shift-T Progress Or Scroll Bar Control-Capslock-B Status Line Control-Capslock-S Last Flash and Tooltip Control-Capslock-T Highlighted Block Control-Shift-M Read To End Control-Shift-R Key Describer Capslock-1 Program Help Control-Shift-Question Mark Field Data Control-Shift-D Field Name Control-Shift-N Highlight Undefined Time/Date Capslock-T Battery Level Capslock-Q Sys Tray Capslock-S Entire Screen Undefined Menu Bar Undefined Default Button Capslock-D Any Line Undefined Focus Title Undefined Verbosity Dialog Capslock-V Menu Control-\ Edit Dictionaries Control-Shift-E Bypass Capslock-B Voice Down Control-Alt-Down Arrow Voice Up Control-Alt-Up Arrow Voice Selection Rotor Control-Alt-Right Arrow Voice Parameter Rotor Control-Alt-Left Arrow Attribute Changes Toggle Undefined Numbers Rotor Capslock-6 Keyboard Voice Rotor Capslock-2 Line Filter Status Rotor Capslock-3 Capitalization Alert Rotor Capslock-4 Format Alert Toggle Capslock-5 Set Format Alert Offset Undefined Auto Label Graphics Capslock-G Label Field Name Control-Capslock-F Set Highlight Color Undefined Highlight Rotor Undefined Silence Undefined Speak All Toggle Capslock-A Toggle All Voices (current program) Undefined Toggle All Voices (global) Alt-Capslock-V Auto Detect Cursor Control-Capslock-C Switch Language Control-Windows-L Reclass Capslock-R Redraw Capslock-\ Load Set Undefined Save Set Undefined Reload App Undefined App Status Rotor Capslock-7 Shutdown Window-Eyes Control-Capslock-F4 Dump OSM Control-Shift-Capslock-D Mouse Hot Keys Description Key to Press Character Prior Capslock-M Character Capslock-Comma Character Next Capslock-Period Word Prior Capslock-J Word Capslock-K Word Next Capslock-L Line Prior Capslock-U Line Capslock-I Line Next Capslock-O Sentence Prior Undefined Sentence Undefined Sentence Next Undefined Paragraph Prior Undefined Paragraph Undefined Paragraph Next Undefined Icon Prior Undefined Icon Undefined Icon Next Undefined Clip Prior Capslock-7 Clip Capslock-8 Clip Next Capslock-9 Single Click Left Button Capslock-Semicolon Single Click Middle Button Undefined Single Click Right Button Capslock-Apostrophe Double Click Left Button Undefined Double Click Middle Button Undefined Double Click Right Button Undefined Toggle Left Button Shift-Capslock-: Toggle Middle Button Undefined Toggle Right Button Shift-Capslock-" Top Left Capslock-Home Top Right Capslock-Page Up Bottom Left Capslock-End Bottom Right Capslock-Page Down Mouse Up Alt-Capslock-Up Arrow Mouse Down Alt-Capslock-Down Arrow Mouse Left Alt-Capslock-Left Arrow Mouse Right Alt-Capslock-Right Arrow Beginning of Line Control-Capslock-Home End of Line Control-Capslock-End Top to Mouse Control-Shift-Capslock-I Mouse to Bottom Control-Shift-Capslock-K Left to Mouse Control-Shift-Capslock-J Mouse to Right Control-Shift-Capslock-L Position Control-Capslock-Equals Unicode/Attribute/Font Control-Capslock-Delete Search Control-Shift-F Continue Search Capslock-F Boundary Rotor Control-Shift-B Drag and Drop Capslock-Delete WE/Mouse Toggle Control-Capslock-Dash Mouse to Focus Capslock-Dash Cursor to Mouse Shift-Capslock-Underline Sync WE and Mouse Control-Shift-Capslock-Underline Route Mouse to Window Undefined Describe Pointer Undefined Capture Pointer Undefined Up Down Speak Alt-Capslock-8 Route to Specified Highlight Undefined Attribute Prior Undefined Attribute Next Undefined Control Prior Undefined Control Next Undefined Horizontal Lock Undefined Vertical Lock Undefined Office Hot Keys Description Key to Press Line Next Alt-Period Line Prior Alt-Comma Spelling/Grammar Next Alt-Apostrophe Spelling/Grammar Prior Alt-Semicolon Revision Next Alt-Right Bracket Revision Prior Alt-Left Bracket Cell Right Capslock-Right Arrow Cell Left Capslock-Left Arrow Cell Up Capslock-Up Arrow Cell Down Capslock-Down Arrow To First Cell of Row Control-Capslock-Left Arrow To Last Cell of Row Control-Capslock-Right Arrow To First Cell of Column Control-Capslock-Up Arrow To Last Cell of Column Control-Capslock-Down Arrow To Top Left Cell Capslock-Home To Bottom Right Cell Capslock-End Row Shift-Capslock-Down Arrow From Row Start Shift-Capslock-Left Arrow Row To End Shift-Capslock-Right Arrow First Row Cell Shift-Capslock-Up Arrow Column Alt-Capslock-Down Arrow From Column Start Alt-Capslock-Left Arrow Column To End Alt-Capslock-Right Arrow First Column Cell Alt-Capslock-Up Arrow Current Cell Capslock-Numpad-Enter Element Properties Capslock-E Page Navigation Capslock-Tab Headers and Totals Alt-Shift-H Monitor Cells Alt-Shift-M Monitor Cell 1 Alt-Shift-! Monitor Cell 2 Alt-Shift-@ Monitor Cell 3 Alt-Shift-# Monitor Cell 4 Alt-Shift-$ Monitor Cell 5 Alt-Shift-% Monitor Cell 6 Alt-Shift-^ Monitor Cell 7 Alt-Shift-& Monitor Cell 8 Alt-Shift-Star Monitor Cell 9 Alt-Shift-( Monitor Cell 10 Alt-Shift-) Any Monitor Cell Alt-Shift-A Read Total Cell Alt-Shift-T Read Comment Alt-Shift-C Read Formula Alt-Shift-F Previous Cell Alt-Shift-P Outlook Calendar Capslock-C User Window Hot Keys Description Key to Press Window 0 Alt-0 Window 1 Alt-1 Window 2 Alt-2 Window 3 Alt-3 Window 4 Alt-4 Window 5 Alt-5 Window 6 Alt-6 Window 7 Alt-7 Window 8 Alt-8 Window 9 Alt-9 Window 10 Undefined Window 11 Undefined Window 12 Undefined Window 13 Undefined Window 14 Undefined Window 15 Undefined Window 16 Undefined Window 17 Undefined Window 18 Undefined Window 19 Undefined Read Any Window Undefined Read Active User Window Undefined Select User Window Capslock-F3 User Window Coordinates Capslock-F4 User Window Top Left Capslock-F5 User Window Bottom Right Capslock-F6 User Window Definition Capslock-F7 User Window Status Undefined Read User Window Coordinates Undefined Set User Window Color Undefined Select Hyperactive Window Control-Shift-F3 Hyperactive Window Coordinates Control-Shift-F4 Hyperactive Window Top Left Control-Shift-F5 Hyperactive Window Bottom Right Control-Shift-F6 Hyperactive Window Definition Control-Shift-F7 Read Hyperactive Window Coordinates Undefined Hyperactive Windows Rotor Control-Shift-F8 End User License Agreement End User License Agreement GW Micro, Inc. End User License Agreement This End-User License Agreement (?EULA?) is a legal agreement between you and GW MICRO, INC. (?GW MICRO?), an Indiana corporation. This EULA governs your use of the Window-Eyes? software that you have purchased. The Window-Eyes? software and digital content are sometimes referred to herein as the ?Licensed Materials.? This EULA may not, in any part, be copied, photo-copied, reproduced, translated, or be reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form or other alternative format without prior written consent from GW MICRO, Inc. License warranty restrictions and information for the agreed on number of users based on the latest invoice for the serial number supplied on this media, referred to herein as the AUTHORIZED LICENSE COUNT, subsists in one of the following license paragraphs: 1a. SINGLE USER LICENSE. GW MICRO is granting you a single license in the Licensed Materials. You may install the Licensed Materials on as many machines as you need so long as you are the sole user of the Licensed Materials. Installation for use, or use, of the Licensed Materials by any person or entity other than you constitutes a violation of this EULA. The license granted hereunder is a personal, non-exclusive and non-transferable license, with no right to grant sublicenses, to use the Licensed Materials in accordance with the terms and conditions of this EULA. This license will not expire so long as you comply with the terms of this EULA. The Licensed Materials include computer software and include associated media, printed materials and "on-line" or electronic documentation. 1b. SITE LICENSE. GW MICRO is granting you an AUTHORIZED LICENSE COUNT site license in the Licensed Materials. You may install the Licensed Materials on as many machines as you need so long as only the AUTHORIZED LICENSE COUNT of individuals are authorized to use the Licensed Materials. In the event that you install the Licensed Materials on multiple machines, all such machines must be located at the same site. In the case of colleges, universities, learning/tutorial institutions and companies with multiple locations, this site license is only valid for only one campus and/or location. Additional site licenses must be obtained in order to install the Licensed Materials at multiple locations. Installation of the Licensed Materials for use by more than the AUTHORIZED LICENSE COUNT of users constitutes a violation of this EULA. Use of the Licensed Materials for use by more than the AUTHORIZED LICENSE COUNT of users constitutes a violation of this EULA. The license granted hereunder is a non-exclusive and non-transferable license, with no right to grant sublicenses, to use the Licensed Materials in accordance with the terms and conditions of this EULA. This license will not expire so long as you comply with the terms of this EULA. The Licensed Materials include computer software and include associated media, printed materials and "on-line" or electronic documentation. 1c. AGENCY LICENSE. GW MICRO is granting you an agency license in the Licensed Materials. You may install the Licensed Materials on as many machines as you need so long as only the AUTHORIZED LICENSE COUNT of individuals are authorized to use the Licensed Materials. Additional licenses must be obtained in order for more than the AUTHORIZED LICENSE COUNT of users to use the Licensed Materials. Installation of the Licensed Materials for use by more than the AUTHORIZED LICENSE COUNT of users constitutes a violation of this EULA. Use of the Licensed Materials for use by more than the AUTHORIZED LICENSE COUNT of users constitutes a violation of this EULA. The license granted hereunder is a non-exclusive and non-transferable license, with no right to grant sublicenses, to use the Licensed Materials in accordance with the terms and conditions of this EULA. This license will not expire so long as you comply with the terms of this EULA. The Licensed Materials include computer software and include associated media, printed materials and "on-line" or electronic documentation. 1d. WIDE AREA NETWORK LICENSE. GW MICRO is granting you a Wide Area Network license in the Licensed Materials. The AUTHORIZED LICENSE COUNT of users are authorized to use the Licensed Materials, but you may only install the Licensed Materials on one server computer in one location. Additional licenses must be obtained in order for more than the AUTHORIZED LICENSE COUNT of users to use the Licensed Materials. Installation of the Licensed Materials on more than one computer server constitutes a violation of this EULA. Use of the Licensed Materials for use by more than the AUTHORIZED LICENSE COUNT of users constitutes a violation of this EULA. The license granted hereunder is a non-exclusive and non-transferable license, with no right to grant sublicenses, to use the Licensed Materials in accordance with the terms and conditions of this EULA. This license will not expire so long as you comply with the terms of this EULA. The Licensed Materials include computer software and include associated media, printed materials and "on-line" or electronic documentation. 2. SOFTWARE PROTECTION. The Licensed Materials are the property of GW MICRO and contain confidential information and trade secrets of GW MICRO. You agree to use the Licensed Materials only as provided in this EULA and agree not to make the Licensed Materials available to any third party without the prior written consent of GW MICRO. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, loan, resell for profit, distribute or otherwise disseminate the Licensed Materials. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Licensed Materials. You are permitted to make one copy of the Licensed Materials for back-up purposes only; any other copy or copies of the Licensed Materials are strictly unauthorized without the prior written consent of GW MICRO. Although Window-Eyes is not copy protected in the United States (other countries may apply), a unique serial number has been assigned to your copy of Window-Eyes and has been registered in your name. You agree to visit http://www.gwmicro.com/upgrade, or call GW MICRO at 260-489-3671, and register your copy of the Licensed Materials as soon as possible. This EULA shall not apply to any copy of the Licensed Materials which is or becomes part of the public domain through no fault of your own. 3. SUPPORT AND SOFTWARE UPDATES. GW MICRO is under no obligation to provide product support (?Support?) for the Licensed Materials, or to provide you with updates, bug fixes, builds or error corrections ("Software Updates"). Any decision to provide you with Support and/or Software Updates shall be made at the sole discretion of GW MICRO. In the event GW MICRO chooses to provide you with such Support and/or Software Updates, such Support and/or Software Updates shall be considered part of the Licensed Materials for all purposes hereunder. 4. LIMITED WARRANTY; ALL OTHER WARRANTIES DISCLAIMED. GW MICRO warrants that the original software media are free from defects in material and workmanship, assuming use is in accordance with the designed and/or intended use of the Licensed Materials, for a period of 30 days from the date of purchase. If a defect occurs during this period, you may return your copy of the software media to GW Micro, Inc., along with a dated proof of purchase. Upon receipt of such proof of purchase GW MIRCRO will replace the Licensed Materials free of charge. YOU AGREE THAT YOU ARE INSTALLING AND USING THE LICENSED MATERIALS AT YOUR OWN RISK. EXCEPT FOR THE 30-DAY LIMITED WARRANTY PROVIDED HEREIN, THE LICENSED MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY GW MICRO ?AS-IS? AND WITHOUT ANY OTHER WARRANTY. GW MICRO EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. IN THE EVENT THAT SUPPORT AND/OR SOFTWARE UPDATES ARE PROVIDED BY GW MICRO, SUCH SUPPORT AND/OR SOFTWARE UPDATES SHALL NOT CREATE ANY WARRANTY, TERM OR CONDITION RELATING TO THE LICENSED MATERIALS. IN THE EVENT THAT THE LICENSED MATERIALS ARE DEFECTIVE, YOU AGREE TO ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIRS AND/OR CORRECTIONS. THIS WARRANTY DISCLAIMER SECTION DOES NOT APPLY TO YOU IF YOU RESIDE IN A JURISDICTION THAT DOES NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES. 5. EXPIRATION AND TERMINATION. The rights granted to you to use the Licensed Materials are conditioned on your continued possession of the Licensed Materials and your continued right to use the Licensed Materials that you have purchased. Your rights to use the Licensed Materials shall expire immediately, without notice from GW MICRO, in the event that you violate any of the terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA, you agree to destroy the Licensed Materials and otherwise render your copy of the Licensed Materials unusable. The obligations of this EULA shall survive the termination of this Agreement and shall apply to the Licensed Materials regardless of its incorporation by you into any other programs not provided by GW MICRO. 6. OWNERSHIP AND COPYRIGHT. All rights, title to and intellectual property rights in the Licensed Materials and any related documents shall remain owned and/or controlled exclusively by GW MICRO. GW MICRO reserves all rights in the Licensed Materials not specifically granted to you under this EULA. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT GW MICRO MAY PURSUE CIVIL AND CRIMINAL PENALTIES FOR THE UNAUTHORIZED REPRODUCTION AND/OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE LICENSED MATERIALS. 7. ASSIGNMENT. Your rights under this EULA may not be assigned by you without receiving prior written approval from GW MICRO. GW MICRO may freely assign this EULA, in which case this EULA shall be binding upon the assignee of GW MICRO. 8. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. GW MICRO SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGE, EITHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF ANY INJURY, LOSS, DAMAGE OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY KIND OR NATURE SUSTAINED BY, INCURRED BY, ASSESSED, ASSERTED AGAINST, OR IMPOSED UPON YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY, ARISING OUT OF, IN CONNECTION WITH OR RESULTING FROM THE PRODUCTION, USE OR SALE OF THE LICENSED MATERIALS. YOU SHALL DEFEND AND HOLD GW MICRO HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL LIABILITIES, DAMAGES, COSTS, EXPENSES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE LICENSED MATERIALS, YOUR NEGLIGENCE, VIOLATION OF LAWS OR REGULATIONS, AND/OR YOUR BREACH OF ANY PROVISION OF THIS EULA. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE LIABILITY OF GW MICRO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE LICENSED MATERIALS. NEITHER GW MICRO NOR ANY OF ITS EMPLOYEES, MAKES ANY WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OR ASSUMES ANY LEGAL LIABILITY OR RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE ACCURACY, COMPLETENESS, OR USEFULNESS OF ANY DATA, APPARATUS, PRODUCT, OR PROCESS DISCLOSED, OR REPRESENTS THAT ITS USE WOULD NOT INFRINGE PRIVATELY OWNED RIGHTS. 9. GOVERNING LAW; WAIVER OF TRIAL BY JURY. This EULA shall be governed by the internal laws of the State of Indiana, without giving effect to the principles of conflict of laws. You consent to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of the state courts sitting in Allen County, Indiana, and/or the federal courts in the Northern District of Indiana to resolve any disputes arising under this EULA. You hereby waive all rights and/or entitlement to trial by jury in connection with any dispute that arises out of or relates in any way to this EULA or the Licensed Materials. 10. General. This EULA constitutes the entire agreement between you and GW MICRO and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous agreements or understandings, whether oral or written. The failure or delay of GW MICRO to exercise any of its rights under this EULA or upon any breach of this EULA shall not be deemed a waiver of those rights or of the breach. This Agreement may be amended or modified by GW Micro, Inc. without notification. GW Micro, Inc. is not responsible for any typographic errors or interpretation errors of this EULA or any other information created and/or maintained by GW MICRO. If any provision of this EULA is held to be invalid or unenforceable by any court or other authority, that provision will be enforced to the maximum extent permissible and such invalidity or unenforceability shall not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision contained in this EULA. (c) 2011 GW Micro, Inc. - All Rights Reserved Contact Information GW Micro, Inc. 725 Airport North Office Park Fort Wayne, IN 46825 Phone: 260-489-3671 FAX: 260-489-2608 WWW: www.gwmicro.com FTP: ftp.gwmicro.com E-MAIL: support@gwmicro.com Twitter: www.twitter.com/gwmicro Facebook: http://www.facebook.com/gwmicro